Home

ACD Systems ACDSee 14

1. acoseoninecom_ Transfer Manage 175 ACDSee 14 User Guide You can usethe Online mode to upload your images to ACDSeeOnline com an image sharing and storage service available to ACDSee 14 users With the Online mode and ACDSeeOnline com you can upload and browse through your online images without having to launch an Internet browser Or you can access ACDSeeOnline com at any time directly from an Internet browser Online mode has two parts ACDSeeOnline com and Transfer a enable the ACDSeeOnline com and Transfer tabs you need to create an ACDSeeOnline com account ACDSeeOnline com Clicking the ACDSeeOnline com tab takes you to ACDSeeOnline com where you can browse through images you have uploaded to your online account or see other users images ACDSeeOnline com has the following menus Manage Organize your images into folders Upload Click Upload to switch to Transfer for uploading images Profile Modify your profile and set specific information to public or private Help See the Help for assistance with ACDSeeOnline com Transfer Transfer allows you to upload images to your ACDSeeOnline com account In Transfer the screen splits into two The bottom of the screen displays the available images in your computer and the top of the screen displays your ACDSeeOnline com account You cannot take an image from Online mode and open it in Edit mode for editing To edit an image select an image in __ M
2. Skip No duplicates are extracted 7 ClickOK To view files inside an archived file 1 In Manage mode navigate to the folder containing the archived file 2 Double click the archived file Thumbnails of the contents of the archived file open in the File List pane Creating a SendPix album ACDSee 14 includes SendPix a free digital image sharing service You can create albums of your images to share with your friends and family The albums you create are stored on ACD Systems secure servers for 30 days SendPix sends an email to selected recipients who can then view your albums using a standard Web browser no special software is required You can also create a photo widget that you can host on your blog or Web site The photo widget is a scrollable gallery of your photos that a visitor can click on to go to the full album on Sendpix If you want to use SendPix you must first activate the plug in To activate the SendPix plug in 1 In Manage or View mode click Tools Plug in Settings 2 Onthe Command tab select the CX_Sendpix apl check box 81 ACDSee 14 User Guide 3 Click OK 4 Close ACDSee 14 and restart it to activate the plug in To share your images with SendPix 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you want to share 2 ClickFile Send SendPix Album 3 Follow the instructions in the SendPix Image Sharing Wizard For help with any of the controls or features click the Hel
3. sd ls ee User Guide V5 1 ACDSee 14 User Guide Notice of Liability The information in this document is distributed on an As Is basis without any representation or warranty of any kind whether express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability title or fitness for a particular purpose or use While every precaution was taken in the preparation of this document neither the author nor ACD Systems shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any loss or damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly in connection with the use or inability to use the instructions contained in this document ACD Systems reserves the right to make changes to this document without notice Copyright and Trademark Notices ACDSee Photo Manager software and documentation was designed programmed and is Copyright 2011 ACD Systems International Inc All rights reserved worldwide Unauthorized duplication strictly prohibited ACD ACDSee and ACDSee logo are trademarks of ACD Systems International Inc and may be registered in Canada the United States European Union Japan or certain other jurisdictions Adobe Acrobat Photoshop PostScript and XMP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Apple Macintosh and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Paint Shop Pro is a tr
4. None Clears all the current import settings Saves all the current import settings with aname so that you can use them again To save or edit import settings select the Save icon and type in new name or re save existing settings The new name for the import settings appears in the drop down list Deletes the saved import settings currently selected in the Import settings drop down list Displays the names of recently used destinations to use again or you can select one of the following Last used Uses the destination from the last import None Clears all the current destination settings Chapter 3 Manage mode Place in Subfolders drop Displays the following pre defined subfolder options to select subfolders down list Single folder by name Creates a new subfolder with the name you type into the Name field which activates when you select this option All the files are placed into a folder with the new name Single folder by today s date Creates one folder using today s date as the name and places all the files into the folder Nested folder by today s date Creates a series of nested folders one below the other based on today s date and the format you select in the Format field The folders are created as the sample shows and all the files are placed in the lowest folder Nested folders by file s date Creates multiple sets of nested folders based on the files dates and on the format you select
5. P aui hover icons display in Thumbnail view only Y Use the keyboard shortcut CTRL 0 5 to quickly rate a file The rating number you select can be reflected as a star rating in other applications Give your favorite shots a high rating J and your least favorite shots a low rating Assign and Search Categories and Ratings in the Organize pane The Organize pane allows you to both assign categories and ratings as well as search them 44 Chapter 3 Manage mode To assign files to categories or ratings in the Organize pane 1 In Manage mode do one of the following Drag selected files to a category or rating in the Organize pane Drag the category or rating from the Organize pane to selected files Right click the files and then click Set Categories and click the category in the fly out or click Set Rating and click the rating 2 In View mode do one of the following Click Edit Set Categories and then click the category to which you want to assign the file Right click the file click Set Categories and then click the category to which you want to assign the file Click Edit Set Rating and then click the rating to which you want to assign the file Right click the file click Set Rating and then click the rating to which you want to assign the file Onthestatus bar click the rating icon and then click a new rating This icon only appears once a rating is set 3 If you are comparing images and want to categ
6. Displays the previous item in the slideshow Auto Advance or View sequenc Displays the previous image Displays the next image Assigns arating tothe currently selected item Use only the numeric keypac O to remove a rating Displays or hides headers and footers Adds currently displayed item to the Image Basket in Manage mode Copies the currently displayed file to the Clipboard Opens the currently selected image in Edit mode Opens the Batch Convert File Format dialog box Closes the current item Copies the selected portion of an image to the Clipboard Opens the Batch Rotate Flip Images dialog box Reduces the magnification of the area inside the Magnifying Glass pane Opens the Open files dialog box in which you can select one or more image Opens the current image in the ACDSee 14 Print utility Increases the magnification of the area inside the Magnifying Glass pane Clears the current selection Opens the Save Image As dialog box in which you can save you image with i 209 ACDSee14 User Guide Shortcut CTRL T CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL ALT LEFT ARROW CTRL ALT RIGHT ARROW CTRL ALT L CTRL ALT W CTRL ALT X CTRL Right click CTRL SHIFT A CTRL SHIFT B CTRL SHIFT C CTRL SHIFT F CTRL SHIFT F4 CTRL SHIFT H CTRL SHIFT P CTRL SHIFT Q CTRL SHIFT S CTRL SHIFT T CTRL SHIFT W CTRL SHIFT ALT W CTRL SHIFT 1 CTRL S
7. wildcard in your pattern the pattern is matched as a sub string For example cat would match cat cathy and bobcat and is equivalent to the pattern cat Using selective browsing You can use selective browsing to browse for files that are located in a specific folder assigned a specific date and or assigned to a specific Organize classification By adjusting the selective browsing criteria you can quickly include or exclude files fromthe File List pane and view only those files you want to browse To get the most out of selective browsing it is recommended that you catalog and organize your files in the ACDSee 14 database The more information you enter for your files the more helpful you will find the selective browsing feature To use selective browsing Open the Selective Browsing pane by clicking View Selective Browsing The pane appears on the left side of the File List pane Setting selective browsing criteria The Selective Browsing paneis divided into three areas Folders Organize and Calendar each of which corresponds to the Manage mode pane of the same name When the Selective Browsing pane is open the Contents bar in the File List pane is replaced by the Selective Browsing bar which lists all of the current browsing criteria When you add a folder date range or organize method to the Selective Browsing pane ACDSee 14 excludes any files that do not match that criteria You can add or remove criteria to narrow o
8. You can save your options as a preset for future use To remove flaws from a photo 1 Zi In Edit mode in the Repair group click Repair Tool Select one of the following Heal Copies the pixels from the source area to the target area and blends pixels into the surrounding image area Clone Copies the pixels from the source area to the target area Drag the Nib Width and Feathering sliders as described in the table below Right click the image to set a source location Pixels will be copied from this location and used in the target location Click and drag over the area that you want to cover If you selected the healing brush ACDSee 14 analyzes and replaces the pixels when you release the mouse button Do one of the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 9 Scroll with your mouse to adjust the size of the nib width at anytime Repair Tool options Nib Width Sets the width of the brush in pixels Feathering Sets the amount to feather on the edge of the brush to prevent sharp transitions between the original and 130 healed part of the photo Feathering is set as a percentage of the nib width not as a specific number of pixels This means that you do not have to adjust the feathering when you reset the Nib
9. www sencha com Copyright 2006 2011 Sencha Inc Contents CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 2020 o oie 1 Welcome To ACDSEE ld o 2282 ce ebb aadeciceisedenctsid id cidcid ad 1 WhatsNew In ACDSee 14 sock wes ec eens ii A cbc eens td tit iaa 1 Starting ACDSee 14 omiso sa 4 About The ACDSee 14 User Interface a th Po ha lee ih acl ree ad 5 Manage MOG Cusseta tcs delete te ck tek eee li e etapotas 9 Vew ModE o ii tii 5 A A O 5 A A A 6 Switching Modes In ACDSee 14 20 0222 eee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eees 6 Using Manage Mode e eronoricins caridad A id die 6 About The Manage Mode Panes 6 Manage Mode Drop down Menus a voiaiiateiacidieoiab ici bite 7 Working With Manage Mode Panes 8 MOVINGHPAMCS lt 2aat AA he Niles as ote le E EI eee Seta RAR ose eats 8 DOCKING PAMELA EE 8 Stacking Panes eer e IT ins 8 Resizing PANES a eee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee cee ee eee eee eee EEEa 9 Resetting The Layout omita oe ee eee A Se et oe Ae is ii ees 9 Using WiCW MOG Gras toca io ds nee masons tate aon ese e ae 9 Viewing Images In Full Screen Mode 2 2 2222 e eee eee ee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ce ee eee eee e eee ee eee 10 Using The View Mode Panes 22 22 2226 5 0 idad dci ee SEERE AI ASNE L prei dcir dinos 10 Using The Bottom MOOD ar 2c tbo E E riencia dde rinitis ibidade 10 switching To Manage Mode ia iaa ii 11 Using Edie Mode cdas st os ne eye E sae 11 Using Online MOE oes ices oes ses eee di A
10. Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 144 Chapter 5 Edit mode Furry Edges options Frequency Specifies how much fur is added tothe image The higher the setting the more dense the fur that is applied to the image Threshold Specifies how sharp an edge must be before fur is applied to it As the value decreases the area of the imagethat fur is added to increases Fur length Specifies the length of each strand of fur As the value increases the length of each fur strand also increases Variance Specifies how much of the fur grows in the direction indicated by the Hair direction setting The higher the value the more random the fur direction will be Hair direction Specifies the general direction in which fur appears to grow Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm The algorithm controls the formula used to detectthe edges and the direction of the edge indicators Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Fur color Specifies the color of the fur Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the fur strands When you apply the Furry Edges effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the fur
11. Fit Width Resizes images to fit the width of the View mode window Fit Height Resizes images to fit the height of the View mode window Fit Image Resizes images to fit the size of the View mode window 4 Select one of the following options from the Resize drop down list Reduce Only Reduces large images to fit the size of the View mode window Enlarge Only Enlarges smaller images to fit the size of the View mode window Reduce or Enlarge Reduces large images and enlarges smaller images to fit the size of the View mode window 5 ClickOK Zoom mode and Resize results Fit Image Fit Width Fit Height Reduce Reduces largeimages to fitthe size Reduces largeimages to fit Reduces large images to fit between the Only of the View mode window between the left and right sides of top and bottom of the View mode window Images that are smaller than the Bre View mage WING OW Images that are smaller than the View View mode window are displayed at Images that are smaller than the mode window are displayed at their their original size View mode window are displayed at original size their original size Enlarge Enlarges small images to fit the size Enlarges small images to fit Enlarges small images to fit between the Only of the Viewer between the left and right sides of top and bottom of the View mode window Images that are larger than the PAG MEN MORE INGO Images that are larger than the View mode View mode window are displayed at Images
12. For example you could display all your photos with a rating of 1 that belonged to the category People You can also use the Easy Select indicators with the Selective Browsing pane View Selective Browsing When you usethe Match Any All buttons and the Easy Select indicators together the Organize pane becomes a powerful search tool for finding unique sets of files To use the Easy Select bar In the Organize pane select the indicator to the left of each item with contents you want to display The indicator changes orientation to pointto the item you have selected Y If you select a category rating or combination that does not have any files that match the File List displays a message and shows no thumbnails The quickest way to return to a folder with files is to click the back arrow To view organized files Select one or more categories ratings auto categories saved searches or special items Files assigned to those classifications are displayed in the File List pane The Contents bar at the top of the File List pane displays whatever categories or items are currently selected You can browse through specific categories ratings or items within specific folders using the Selective Browsing pane Match All Match Any There are two Match All Match Any drop down lists on the Organize pane one at the top of the pane that affects categories and one that affects saved searches You can use the Match All and Any options to affect
13. Manage mode 6 Select one of the following Add to existing archive Adds your files to an existing archive This option is only available if the archive specified in the Output File field already exists Overwrite existing archive Replaces any existing archive with the archive you are creating This option is only available if the archive specified in the Output File field already exists 7 When you are satisfied with your choices click Create to begin archiving your files Extracting archived zip files You can extract archived zip files very quickly and easily without leaving ACDSee 14 You can either extract the files to a folder or simply double click and view them To extract an archived file to a folder 1 In Manage mode navigate to the folder containing the archived file using the Folders pane Click the archived file in the File List Click Edit Extract to Folder 2 3 4 Inthe Extract to Folder dialog navigate to and select the folder where you want to keep the files 5 To create a new folder click Create Folder type in the name of the folder and then press Enter 6 Usethe Overwriting duplicate files drop down listif you want to specify what do so with files in the folder that have the same name as those you are extracting You can select any of the following Ask To be asked whatto do about each individual file Rename Duplicates are given a new name Replace Duplicate files are overwritten
14. Selective Browsing Organize Task Properties Map Image Basket Burn Basket Chapter 1 Getting started This pane displays the contents of the currently selected folder the results of your latest search or the files and folders that match your selective browsing criteria The File List pane is always visible and cannot be hidden or closed You can customize the File List pane by changing the way the files are displayed or the size of the thumbnails This pane displays the directory structure of your computer much like the directory tree in Windows Explorer You can use the Folders pane to browse through the folders and display their contents in the File List pane You can also display the contents of multiple folders in the File List by clicking the Easy Select indicator opposite each folder on the left side of the pane This pane displays a calendar that you can use to organize and browse your files according to their associated dates This pane stores shortcuts to your favorite images files folders or even applications Dragging an image file or folder into the Favorites pane creates a shortcut to the original without affecting itin any way This pane provides access to a powerful search utility You can specify the type of search you want to perform and enter your search criteria intothe fields provided in the Search pane You can also save a search and give it a name Saved searches are listed on the Search pane an
15. Then instead of having to search for a specific file you can quickly access it in the Favorites pane Whenever you browse to a folder using the Folders pane the ACDSee 14 database catalogs any images or media files in the folder To open or close the Folders pane 29 ACDSee 14 User Guide In Manage mode click View Folders When you connect a removable device such as a mass storage device or digital camera the Folders pane displays the device as another drive and assigns it a drive letter automatically You can access the device and its contents by clicking on it in the Folders pane Selecting multiple folders Easy Select bars are vertical columns of indicators on the left side of the Folders and Organize panes You can use the Easy Select bars to select multiple folders categories or ratings and display their contents in the File List pane To use the Easy Select bar In the Folders pane select the indicator to the left of each folder with contents you want to display You can also use the Easy Select bars with the Selective Browsing pane Creating and managing folders You can use the Folders and File List panes to create delete rename and move folders on your hard drive to help organize your files To manage your folders 1 IntheFolders pane browse to where you want to add delete or rename a folder 2 Dooneof the following Tocreate a folder click File New and then select Folder Type a name for
16. Tobrowse your imported photos click Yes when the Import Complete dialog box displays You may require Direct X 9 0c and QuickTime to download audio and video files from your camera For more information __ please see System requirements 20 Chapter 3 Manage mode Import From options 21 ACDSee 14 User Guide View files Choose Import Settings Choose destination 22 View by Date View by File Type View all View selected lt x gt Files selected for import Zoom slider Import settings drop down list Save import settings Delete import settings Destination drop down list Displays all the files grouped by the dates they were created To deselect a date click the check box beside the date To deselect all dates click the All Dates check box Displays all the files grouped by their file type To deselect a file type click the check box beside the file type To deselect all file types click the All files types check box Displays all the thumbnails of the files on the device Displays only the files selected for import Displays the number of files currently selected for import Adjusts the size of the thumbnails as you drag the slider left shrinks or right enlarges Displays the names of recently used import settings to use again or you can select one of the following Current Uses the current settings to import Last used Uses the import settings from the last import
17. __ default image folder For multiple page contact sheets the utility adds a number to the file name for example Contact Sheet3 bmp 79 ACDSee 14 User Guide Contact sheet format options Thumbnail settings Frame options Thumbnail options Page background options Size Spacing Use thumbnail frame Margin Solid color Tiled image Colored drop shadow Colored edge fade Colored matte Beveled edges Solid color Tiled image Creating archives of your files Specifies the number of columns and rows to create on each page Creates a frame around each thumbnail Specifies the amount of space between rows or columns In the Horizontal and Vertical spin boxes type a value to indicate the amount of space to display Creates a frame around each thumbnail Specifies the width of the frame Specifies the frame s color Click the color picker to define a color Specifies an image to use as a frame Click Browse to locate the image you want to use Creates a drop shadow effect around each thumbnail Click the color picker to define a color Creates a fading frame effect around the image Click the color picker to define a color Creates a beveled edge effect on each thumbnail This effect is not displayed in the Preview window Uses a solid color as a background for the page Click the color picker to define a color Uses a solid color as a background for the page Click the color picker to define a col
18. color or left less color 7 Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 2 Scroll with your mouse to adjust the size of the nib width at anytime 129 ACDSee 14 User Guide Removing flaws You can usethe Repair Tool to remove flaws such as La La La Skin blemishes Telephone wires and other unwanted objects Flash flares from snowflakes or windows Lens scratches and water drops There are two options available for the Repair Tool the Healing Brush and the Cloning Brush When you select the Healing Brush the Repair Tool copies pixels from one area of a phototo another but it analyzes the pixels in the source area before copying them It also analyzes the pixels in the targetarea and then blends the pixels of both source and target to match the surrounding area This ensures that the lighting and color of the replacement pixels integrate with the surrounding area The Healing Brush works particularly well with photos that involve complicated textures like skin or fur When you select the Cloning Brush the Repair Tool copies the exact pixels from one area of a photo to another creating an identical image area The Cloning Brush is more effective for photos that have strong simple textures or uniform colors as itis more difficult to identify the copied pixels in the finished photo
19. or cancel the operation entirely To use the Confirm File Replace dialog box 1 If you are moving a number of files and want to handle all potential file name collisions in the same manner select the Apply to all check box 2 Tohelp determine any differences between the two files use the toolbar between the two preview fields to shrink or enlarge the size of the previews 3 Doone of the following Toreplace the destination file with the source file click Replace Torename the new file before moving it into the destination folder type a new name for the file in the Rename to field and then click Rename Toskip this file and leave both files intact click Skip Todelete either the destination or source file click Delete below the file you want to remove from your hard drive Tocancel the operation and not move or copy any more files click Cancel In the Confirm File Replace dialog box destination file refers tothe file that exists in the target folder and source file 7 refers to the file you are moving or copying Renaming a file or folder You can rename a file or folder on your hard drive in the Folders and File List panes To rename a file or folder 1 In Manage mode in the File List or Folders pane select the item you want to rename Click Edit Rename 2 3 Without removing or changing the file name extension such as jpg type a new name for the file 4 Press Enter P You can rename multipl
20. or even changing the background color in the Quick View window To customize ACDSee Quick View 1 Double click on an image For example double click on the image in Windows Explorer or in an email message ae cee UN Click Tools Options Set or change the options as described below Click OK to apply your changes 197 ACDSee 14 User Guide ACDSee Quick View options Use ACDSee Quick View Enable gamma correction Disable animation Always on top Full screen Hide mouse cursor in full screen Default zoom mode Background Setting JPEG options If selected ACDSee Quick View is set as the default viewer for images when ACDSee 14 is closed Applies the specified amount of gamma correction when viewing images Displays only the first frame of an animated image Keeps the Quick View window as the top window in a stack of windows Opens images in the Quick View window in full screen mode Hides the cursor in full screen mode Fit image Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in the Quick View window Images that are smaller than the Quick View window display at their original size Actual size Displays the image at its actual sizein the Quick View window Default color Uses the ACDSee 14 background color in Quick View Custom color Specifies a color to use as the background in the Quick View window Clickthe color swatch to select a different color You can change the settings in the O
21. reminder Manage excluded folders Display embed ACDSee Metadata reminder Set database date Import EXIF and IPTC metadata from cataloged files Show separator conflict dialog for IPTC keywords Show separator conflict dialog for IPTC supplemental categories Chapter 7 Options and configuration Specifies the location on your hard drive to storethe ACDSee 14 database Clickthe Browse button to locate a folder Automatically reminds you to back up your ACDSee 14 database Click the Every drop down list and select how often you would like to be reminded Opens the Excluded Folders List dialog box where you can specify which folders you want to exclude fromthe ACDSee 14 database Displays a reminder to embed ACDSee Metadata Automatically adds the date of files to the ACDSee 14 database when you catalog the contents of a folder Select one of the following to specify which date you want to store as the database date EXIF date File modified date Specific date Select the date you want to use from the drop down list Automatically imports EXIF and IPTCinformation into the ACDSee 14 database whenever you catalog the contents of a folder If this option is not selected ACDSee 14 does not import the EXIF and IPTC information but does set asidespace within the database records To remove the empty records be sure to optimize your database frequently Displays the IPTC Keywords dialog box when a separator confli
22. sec Specifies how long you want the slideshow to display each image Advanced General settings Select or clear any of the following options Stretch images to fit screen Enlarges small images to fill the entire screen Play embedded audio Plays any audioclips embedded in the images Stretch video to fit screen Enlarges video files to fill the entire screen Autohide control bar Hides the slideshow controls whenever the cursor stops moving for more than a few seconds Loop Repeats the slideshow after displaying the last image 72 Chapter 3 Manage mode Slide order Select one of the following options to specify the order to display your images Forward Shuffle Music directory Displays music from the previously selected folders or you can click Browseto find a new folder Text Display header text Displays a text caption at the top of each image Set the options to specify the text you want to display Display footer text Displays a text caption at the bottom of each image Set the options to specify the text you want to display Save current settings as default Retains the current settings on all of the tabbed pages and applies them the next time you view a slideshow Slideshow text options Alignment Specifies the alignment of the text captions Background color Specifies a background color for the caption text Text Specifies the text to display as a caption Font Opens the Font dialog b
23. select the Load an existing slideshow project radio button and then click Browse to locate your project asw file Click Next to continue On the Choose your images page you can view the images included in your slideshow in the default order they will be displayed Click Add or Remove to change the images and use the arrow buttons to reorder them Click Next when you are ready to continue On the Set file specific options page click the underlined words beside each thumbnail to setthe individual options for each image These include transitions between photos the duration of the transition and slide text captions and audio files to 73 ACDSee 14 User Guide play when the image is displayed Note that the options available depend on your choice of output file format and not all formats support all options Click Next when you are ready to continue 7 On the Set slideshow options page set the timing for each slide to automatic or manual the order to display slides and whether or not to hide the controls You can also add audio files to play in the background and adjust the quality or speed of the transitions Click Next when you are ready to continue 8 Onthefollowing pages setthe options for image size location of your slideshow file and the project file 9 Finally click Next and wait a few moments while ACDSee 14 generates your slideshow When complete you can launch your slideshow exitthe wizard or start the Creat
24. 1 Drag the Midtones slider to the right to lighten and return detail to areas that are too dark 2 Adjustthe settings using any of the controls in the table below Lighting controls Right click on a Right click on a slider to reset it slider Exposure Warning Clickthe Exposure Warning to make any overexposed or underexposed areas visible Overexposed A pixels turn red underexposed pixels turn green You can also toggle Exposure Warning on and off momentarily by holding down the E key Auto Click to allow the software to analyze the photo and apply optimal settings based on the amount of light and dark pixels in the photo Darker photos are brightened more than photos that are already bright Done Click to apply your changes and close the tool Cancel Click to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and resetto default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Color tools Adjusting white balance You can use the White Balance tool to remove unwanted hue from an image For example if you take a photo at sunset and the resulting image has a reddish hue you can use the White Balance tool to remove it You can save your options as a preset for future use To remove a color cast from an image 1 In Edit mode in the Color group click White Balance 2 Clickan image area that should be white or gray The color square shows the color of the original pixel on the left a
25. 1h4 Ih5 Ih6 Ih7 Lzh RAR format Unix TAR format TAR format compressed with GZIP UUEncoded files Store and Deflate Lhd Iz4 Ih0 Ih1 Ih4 Ih5 Ih6 Ih7 Lzh ZIP format Video and audio file formats that ACDSee 14 reads AIF AIFC AIFF ASF AU AVI GSM M15 M1A Miv M2A M3U M75 MOV MP2 MP3 MPA MPEG MPG MPV QCP QTPF SD2 SMI SMIL SML SND SWA SWF ULW VFW WAV WMV Audio Interchange File Format Audio Interchange File Format Audio Interchange File Format Active Streaming File HoTMetaL Pro A sound file format used on Sun Microsystems or other UNIX computers AVI movie format Global System for Mobile Audio Apple MPEG 1 Video Apple MPEG 1 2 Audio Apple MPEG 1 Video Apple Mpeg 1 2 Audio MP3 Playlist files Apple MPEG 1 Video QuickTime movie MPEG Layer II compressed audio MPEG Layer III compressed audio Apple MPEG 1 2 Audio MPEG movie or animation file MPEG encoded file Apple MPEG 1 Video Qualcomm PureVoice QuickTime PreFlight Text Sound Designer II Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Sound file MPEG layer III audio Adobe Flash 4 ULAW Sun NeXT Video for Windows Sound file Windows Metafile About RAW Files Chapter 9 File formats A RAW file is like a negative RAW files contain all of the data that was collected by your digital camera s sensor when you took a photo If yo
26. A Sete A a a taa 12 ADOT ONIME Mode 22 ocotoic n cotorra di li ia as 12 Uploading IMagesS coocictileaioiices dolares dida ERORE 13 CHAPTER 2 GETTING HELP 000 e eee 15 Using ACDSee 14 Hel pieces cee toes er ts ds ty tia 15 Using The Quick Start Guide 2 22 5 2 fee ndsicedccck espai ia 15 Finding Other Resources And Support occ 15 CHAPTER 3 MANAGE MODE 2 2000 2 ooo eee 17 ThA POFCINGUPMOOS E EEE L A A de jae oats Rees eRe 18 Importing Files WithACDSGe 14 2s 2 2 cece conde ss Slew pe bead ened Sees codecs Seems ceases tr rra 18 About The ACDSEG Device Det Nie ree Se ee ws aed ieee ee noe A Lowel eee a as bey vee 19 Importing Photos From A DeviCe 2 5 2 22d fet comes ees ee te dd oo cence dels os Medes do Esrsneasnetced E Aa aran a iaa ena 19 ACDSee 14 User Guide vi Importing POCOS FEOMA CDODMD aca 25 Importing Photos FromA DISK 0 o tea 25 Importing Photos From A Scanner corista di ti a a dd y 25 Importing Photos From A Mobile Phone Folder 26 Creating A Renaming Template 00 26 BrOWSINO sc sicocbssiiuta tect tne aio botado resortes irector atico ita bress 27 Browsing Files In The File List Pane occ ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee cence eee eee ee 27 Browsing Using The Folders Panes 29 Browsing Files By Date Or Event o oo cc dccndvvimine aa e wtaeaeceesewtddexwbeluosdenebwes a aV EEUE e ii 30 Browsing Favorite Files 32 Using The Organize Panes 33 Changing VIEWS oca occur ese sc tr a Louse Sie ii aia
27. Adjust the following sliders to further remove noise Luminance Reduces the random variations of brightness in the noise Color Reduces the random variations of color in the noise 173 ACDSee 14 User Guide Adding noise You can usethe Add Noise tool to add a grainy texture to an image Adding small amounts of noise can reduce the appearance of minor imperfections in the original image You can save your options as a preset for future use To add noise to an image 1 In Edit mode in the Detail group click Noise 2 Selectthe Add Noisetab 3 Setthe options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to apply your changes and close the Add Noise tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Add Noise options Intensity Specifies the amount of noise to add to the image A higher intensity increases the chance thata noise pixel will replace a pixel in the original image Color proximity Specifies the color of noise pixels to add to the image A lower value gives each noise pixel a color similar to the pixel it replaces Higher values result in a random selection of the noise pixel color Noise color Select one of the following options to specify noise pixel color Random Randomly selects the color Monochrome Produces black and white noise pixels Adjustable Ra
28. By and then select Delete Custom Sort Selecting files In the File List pane you can select all of your files and folders at once select all of the files in the current folder select only the image files or clear your selection entirely You can also set an option to automatically select new files whenever you add them to the File List Click Tools Options File List to set this option To select your files or folders Click a thumbnail to select the file CTRL click to select more than one file SHIFT clickto select a number of files in a row Y Click off to the side in the file list pane to clear your selection To select your files or folders using the menu 1 In Manage mode click Edit 2 Selectone of the following Select All Selects all files and subfolders in the current folder Select All Files Selects all files in the current folder Select All Images Selects all image files in the current folder Select Tagged Selects all tagged image files regardless of their folder Select by Rating Displays a list of ratings and selects all files currently assigned to the rating you select Clear Selection Clears your selection Invert Selection Selects all files except for your original selections Previewing images You can preview image audio and video files in the Preview pane The Preview pane displays a thumbnail of the currently selected image or media file You can resize the pane to ad
29. Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Water options Position Specifies the position of the water below the subject of the photo Amplitude Specifies the height of the ripples in the water Drag the slider to the left to reduce the height of the ripples and the distortion caused by the ripples Drag the slider to the right to increase the height of the ripples and the distortion caused by the ripples Wavelength Specifies the distance between ripples Drag the slider to the left to reduce the distance between ripples and increase the distortion caused by the ripples Drag the slider to the right to increase the distance between ripples and reduce the distortion caused by theripples Perspective Changes the size of the waves as they get farther from the subject Drag the slider to the left to increase the size of the waves farthest from the subject and to increase the illusion of distance Lighting Specifies the amount of light in the water Applying a Water Drops effect You can use the Water Drops effect to display water drops on the surface of the photo You can control the number and size of water drops and their position on the photo You can save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply water drops to a photo 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Water Drops 3 Onthe Water Drops tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to ac
30. Embed ACDSee Metadata command The IPTC data fields provides a standard means for entering and storing information about your photographs such as description creator and copyright information ACDSee supports fields defined in IPTC Core 1 1 The EXIF data fields hold information captured by your camera such as shutter speed camera model and GPS information Certain EXIF fields are no longer visible by default The EXIF Artist Copyright Image Description and Date Time Original fields are automatically modified when their matching IPTC fields are modified see table below This change reflects the recommendations of the Metadata Working Group MWG If you need to have these fields visible in the EXIF section you can adjust your settings by clicking Tools Options Properties Pane and clicking the Manage Metadata Views button Matching 1PTC and EXIF fields IPTC EXIF Description writes to Image Description Creator writes to Artist Copyright Notice writes to Copyright Date Created writes to Date Time Original P When ACDSee parses metadata from a file the contents of the field is displayed without mapping Categories tab The Categories tab displays a tree of categories The Category tree context menu right click allows you to add and delete categories and sub categories You can create category sets to quickly categorize your files File tab The File tab displays detailed file information and image attributes for a selected f
31. File List pane Show image files Show media files Show folders Show archive files Select Show hidden files and folders to show files and folders that are normally hidden by your operating system Select Show THM files to show thumbnail files 4 Click OK Grouping files If you have to browsea lot of images in the File List you should consider using Group By to organize images into different groups You may find it easier to find images when they are organized into groups For example if you use more than one camera you can 34 Chapter 3 Manage mode quickly organize your images according tothe camera you used to capture the images Similarly if you save your images into different file formats you can quickly organize your images according to their file format P Group By only works in the Thumbs Thumbs Details Details Tiles and Icons views a Edited State group is particularly useful for finding images that you have edited To group files in the File List 1 Browseto the folder or folders containing your files 2 Dooneof the following Click View Group By and select a group option Click the Group drop down and select a group option Navigating through groups in the File List To expand and collapse specific groups Click the Expand or Collapse arrows on the left side of the group header To expand and collapse all groups Right click a group header and then select either Open All Groups or
32. How often you need to back up depends on how often you add or change information in the database A good ruleto use would be to back up your data as often as you want to avoid retyping it You can use the backup reminder settings on the Database page of the Options dialog box to set a regular reminder for yourself to back up your data as often as you think appropriate Business environments and professional users should back up every day It is also recommended that you back up your database before performing any major adjustments to it such as importing information from another ACDSee 14 user or converting a database from a previous version of ACDSee 14 Backup location It s a good idea to consider where you back up your data as well as how often If you re backing up to your hard drive ACDSee 14 creates a new folder for each day This helps to avoid overwriting your backup and gives you several increments from which you can restore Backing up the database to a CD or DVD once a week will help protect you in case of hard drive failure Also helpful is a monthly backup thatis stored in a different physical location than your computer such as a network drive Backup size To keep the size of the backup small choose to back up database information only and back up your images separately also ona regular basis Restoring database information from a backup You can use the ACD Database Restore Wizard to restore previously backed up database in
33. IPTC EXIF and ACDSee Metadata for the image Using the Bottom toolbar Use the Bottom toolbar to access commonly used tools 10 Bottom toolbar Add to image basket Rotate left Rotate right Scroll Select Zoom Full Screen External Editors Show Original Navigator Zoom slider Zoom drop down list Actual Size Fit Image Switching to Manage mode You can return to Manage mode at any time To return to Manage mode from View mode Do one of the following Double click the image Click the Manage mode button Using Edit mode Chapter 1 Getting started Adds the image to the image basket Rotates the image to the left Rotates the image to the right Pans or scrolls the image when the image is zoomed to a larger size than the View mode area Selects a rectangular area of the image Zooms in or out on the image Click to zoom in or right click to zoom out Displays the image on a full screen Press F to view full screen Opens the file in an external editor of your choosing Toggles between the original image and the edited image Displays the Quick Navigator pane so you can see athumbnail overview of a magnified image Only visible for images that are zoomed in to a size larger than will fiton the screen Controls the size of the image in the View mode area Drag the slider to adjustthe size Displays a list of zoom sizes to select Returns the image to its actual size Redu
34. In Manage mode click the drop down arrow located to the right of the Main toolbar or File List toolbar and then select Customize In View mode click the drop down arrow located to the right of the Bottom toolbar select Add or Remove Buttons and then select Customize Inthe Customize dialog box click the Keyboard tab Fromthe Category drop down select a top level menu such as File Edit or View The commands available from that menu display in the Commands list box 2 Selecta command in the Commands list box Ifa keyboard shortcut has been defined for that command it displays in the Current Keys box Ifakeyboard shortcut has not been defined for that command the Current Keys box will be empty 3 Toremove an existing keyboard shortcut select the keyboard shortcut in the Current Keys box and then click Remove To define a new keyboard shortcut 1 Clickin the Press New Shortcut Key text box 2 Press the keys on your keyboard that you want to use for the keyboard shortcut The keys display in the Press New Shortcut Key text box 3 Click Assign The new keyboard shortcut displays in the Current Keys box 4 Toremove all custom keyboard shortcuts and restore the default keyboard shortcuts click Reset All 5 Click Close 202 Chapter 7 Options and configuration Changing the display theme In ACDSee 14 you can change the display theme to change the background color of the panes and toolbars To change the disp
35. OK Tosetthe application as the default external editor for ACDSee 14 click Set As Default 201 ACDSee 14 User Guide Tospecify whether the application can handle multiple images at the same time select or clear the check box in the Supports Multiple Images column Toremove the application from the list click Remove 3 Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee 14 To open an image in an external image editor 1 In Manage or View mode select the image you want to open in the external editor 2 Dooneof the following Click Tools External Editors Default External Editor or the name of an editor Press CTRL ALT X to open the image in the default external editor Customizing keyboard shortcuts There are pre defined keyboard shortcuts for commands that you use frequently in Manage mode and View mode You can change pre defined shortcuts or create keyboard shortcuts for commands that do not currently have shortcuts Some commands such as Open and Copy are available in both Manage mode and View mode You can use the same keyboard shortcut for these commands in Manage mode and the View mode or you can define different shortcuts for these commands in Manage mode and View mode To define a shortcut for a command in a specific mode open the Customize dialog from that mode To customize keyboard shortcuts 1 Doone of the following In Manage mode click View Toolbars and then select Customize
36. Program Files and Windows folders on your hard drive are automatically excluded from the database To manage your excluded folders settings 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Excluded Folder Settings 2 Inthe Excluded Folders dialog box do one of the following To exclude a folder from the database click Add Browse to a folder on your hard drive and then click OK Toremove a folder from the excluded folders list select a folder in the list and then click Remove Toreset your excluded folders list to the default settings click Reset to Defaults 3 When you are satisfied with your choices click Close to return to ACDSee 14 Cataloging files in the database ACDSee 14 automatically adds file information and thumbnails to the database as you browse You can use the Catalog dialog box to add groups of files to the database without having to first browse the folders This can be particularly useful when using ACDSee 14 92 Chapter 3 Manage mode for the firsttime and when browsing or managing large collections of images as it reduces the loading time required for these folders The first time you run ACDSee 14 you are prompted to catalog your files To catalog your files 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Catalog Files 2 Inthe Folders to Catalog section select the check box next to the folders you want to catalog If you want to add folders that are not in the list click Add folder select the fold
37. Selecteach of the following Selectthe Image Files tab and then select the check boxes next to the image file formats that you want to associate with ACDSee 14 Selectthe Archives tab and then select the check boxes next to the archive file formats that you want to associate with ACDSee 14 3 Click OK For Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7 To set file association options in ACDSee 14 1 ClickTools File Associations Set File Associations 2 Select one of the following options All image file types Sets ACDSee 14 as the default application to open all image file types Image file types not currently associated with ACDSee or another program Retains any file types already associated with ACDSee 14 and adds any file types that are not yet associated with a program Choose the image file types myself Opens a dialog where you can select the files you want to associate with ACDSee 14 3 Click OK To register new file extensions with Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7 When you add a plug in to ACDSee 14 that allows it to recognize and use new file types you need to register the new file formats with the operating system as being used by ACDSee 14 You can then use the same dialog to associate these files with ACDSee 14 1 Click Tools File Associations Register New Extensions 2 Toonly register the new file formats in the list click OK 3 To associate the new file formats with ACDSee 14 so that it opens
38. Tochange which image displays in the comparison view do one or more of the following Inthe Comparison List right click an image and click Send to Active View indicated by a pale box Inthe Comparison List drag an image to a box in the Compare Images Viewer Inthe Compare Images Viewer right click an image and click Next Image or Previous Image Inthe Compare Images Viewer right click an image and click File Remove From View or click the Remove icon in the image toolbar 4 Totagimages do one of the following Inthe Comparison List click the check box that is located at the bottom of the image on the right side Inthe Compare Images Viewer right click an image and click Tag or click the Tag icon in the image toolbar Click the Tag All button in the bottom left corner to tag all of the images or click Untag All to untag all of the images 5 Torate images right click an image click Set Rating and then select an appropriate rating 6 To categorize images right click an image click Set Categories and then select an appropriate category or create an appropriate category 7 Click OK 38 Compare Images toolbar b b d e a aa Ue o ea e E amp Previous Next Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom menu Pan Lock Exposure warning Properties Histogram Metadata Setup One Image Two Images Three Images Four Images Properties Pane Help Image toolbars Each image in the Compare Images tool h
39. Width as it automatically adjusts to a percentage of the new nib width Chapter 5 Edit mode Add tools Adding text to an image You can usethe Add Text tool in Edit to add formatted textto a photo or add talk and thought bubbles to create a comic book effect You can also adjust the opacity of the textto create a watermark effect which is useful for putting copyright information onto your photos You can save your options as a preset for future use To add text to an image 1 2 3 In Edit mode in the Add group click Text Typethe text you want to add in the Text field In the Font area specify the font you want to use the formatting options such as italics or justification and the color of the text Drag the Size slider to specify a point size and then drag the Opacity slider to specify the transparency of the text Click and drag the text marquee to reposition it anywhere on your image or drag the marquee s handles to resize it Select an option from the Blend Mode drop down list to specify how you want the text to blend into the underlying image Do one of the following Selectthe Bubble Text check box and set the Bubble Text settings as explained in the table below Note that other text effects cannot be applied to bubble text Select one or more of the Effects Drop Shadow and Bevel check boxes to customize your text Click the Settings button to adjust the settings for each of these options as explained i
40. You can use the Auto Hide button to automatically hide some panes and panels in ACDSee 14 When a paneis set to auto hide it rolls away when you click outside of it leaving a tab displayed You can access the pane by moving the cursor over the tab When a pane or panel is floating the auto hide feature is not available You cannot move the pane to a new location if it is set to auto hide The Auto Hide button s appearance on the pane s title bar reflects its current setting 198 Chapter 7 Options and configuration gt A horizontal pushpin indicates that the pane is set to automatically hide when you click outside of it a A vertical pushpin indicates that the paneis fixed and will remain visible even if you click outside of it To set or remove auto hide Click the Auto Hide button on the title bar so that it displays a slanted or horizontal pushpin Using the Task Pane The Task Pane displays groups of often used tasks from the menus and toolbars based on your current location and selections in ACDSee 14 By default the Task Pane opens on the right side of the Manage mode window To open or close the Task pane In Manage mode click View Task Pane The menus in the Task Pane change depending on what area of the Manage mode window you are working in and what items you select For example if you select more than a folder in the File List pane the Task Pane displays different menus than it does if you select a photo or media
41. actually groups of images in one file you need to open them in View mode to see the individual images This icon indicates an abr brush file in ACDSee 14 To view brush files In Manage mode navigate to the folder containing your brush files Toseejust the top image in any abr file hover over the thumbnail to activate the pop up or click it to see the image in the Preview pane To view the other images in the abr file double click it to open it in View mode The file opens in View mode showing the individual images in a pane on the left hand side 108 Chapter 4 View mode Toseethe number of images and select them by number click the down arrow at the top of the sidebar and then select the number of the image Toscroll through the images clickthe right and left arrows at the top of the sidebar or on each image To use brush files in Adobe Photoshop With both Adobe Photoshop and ACDSee 14 open drag the file from the File List in Manage mode onto the Photoshop window Even though nothing appears to happen the brush is loaded into the Photoshop brush library To view the new brushes open the library and scroll tothe bottom of the pane 9 To make it even easier to use brushes in Photoshop you can configure it to be your default editor Then you can use CTRL ALT X to open Photoshop and use the brush right away Playing video and audio files You can play video or audio files in many formats in ACDSee 14 Y
42. add more images 4 Click Next 5 On the Presentation Options page do one or all of the following Inthe Presentation Options area if this is anew presentation set the duration that you want each slide to display If you are editing a presentation select Existing presentation to activate the Path field and browse to your presentation Select whether you want to Insert slides at the beginning or end of the presentation 75 ACDSee 14 User Guide Selectthe Number of images per slide from the drop down list If you select more than one the Title and Notes options on the next page do not appear SelectLink to Image file if you want your images to stay linked to ACDSee 14 rather than be embedded in the presentation Click Use a design template if you want to use a background template and browse to the folder on your computer to selectit PowerPoint templates are usually under Microsoft Office Templates Presentation Designs Click Next On the Text Options page do one or all of the following Onthe Caption tab type in a caption and select its background color and alignment You can also select a different font or insert metadata like file name or picture dimensions Captions appear at the bottom of the slide On the Title tab type in a title for the slide and select its background color and alignment You can also select a different font or insert metadata On the Notes tab type in any notes that you want t
43. adjustments to an image and automatically apply the same changes to all of the images you selected You can also save your settings as a preset for future use To adjust image exposure 1 In Manage mode select one or more images and then click Tools Batch Adjust Exposure 2 Inthe Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box do one or more of the following Toadjust image exposure contrast and fill light level select the Exposure tab and adjust the options Toprecisely adjust the contrast and light levels in your images select the Levels tab and set the options Toadjust image exposure automatically select the Auto Levels tab and set the options To precisely adjust the RGB color channels in your image select the Tone Curves tab and set the options 3 Dooneof the following Selectthe Apply settings to all selected images check box to apply the current settings to all of the images you selected 88 Chapter 3 Manage mode De select Apply settings to all selected images and click Next Image to move to the next image and then repeat step 2 for each image you want to adjust 4 Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images 5 Click Filter All Images P A can also adjust your image s exposure and color levels in Edit mode Renaming multiple files You can use the Batch Rename tool to rename multiple files You can specify a template with a numerical or alphabetical sequence save your
44. album information into the database 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Import and then select Album 2 Inthe Open dialog box locate and select the ais file you want to import 3 Click Open Working with descript ion files In previous versions of ACDSee file descriptions were stored in a separate descript ion file in each folder that contained images ACDSee 14 now stores file descriptions as captions in the database along with other file information such as notes and keywords 94 Chapter 3 Manage mode You can usethe Descript ion tools to import your old descript ion files and add the information to the database or export your existing file captions to a descript ion file To import a descript ion file 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Import and then select Descript ion File 2 Inthe Open dialog box locate and select the descript ion file you want to import 3 Click Open To export captions to a descript ion file 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Export and then select Descript ion File 2 IntheSave As dialog box type a name for the descript ion file in the File name field 3 ClickSave Exporting database information You can use the ACD Database Export Wizard to save selected database information in a compressed format and then store it as a backup or share it with other ACDSee 14 users You can also choose to export your category and keyword definitions to a text file Exporti
45. appears in the Taskbar Notification area Prepare your screen to show the area you want to capture and then follow the steps that appear in the bubble above the Screen Capture icon To exit the Screen Capture utility without taking a screen capture right click the Screen Capture icon and then select Exit Screen Capture Screen Capture options Desktop Current monitor Captures an image of the entire area displayed on the screen Window Entire window Captures an image of the entire active window Content only Captures an image of the window contents does not include the frame or title bar Region Fixed size Captures an image of a fixed area on the screen Object Clickthe drop down button and select a dimension setting or select Custom and enter the dimension in pixels Selected region Captures a selected area of the screen Click and drag your cursor to surround the area you want to capture Child window Captures an image of sections of the window For example a toolbar or button Menu under cursor Captures selected menu commands Include mouse cursor Includes the cursor in the screen capture Destination options Clipboard Places a copy of the image on the Clipboard From the Clipboard you can pastethe image in a new location File Displays the Save dialog box to save the file you can specify location format and file name Editor Opens the captured image in the default editor Initiate Capture Hot key Designates a keystroke
46. apply the slider setting to the magnification of the zoomed imagein View mode Selectthe Smooth check box to apply anti aliasing to the magnified portion of the image or clear the Smooth check box to view the individual pixels 117 Chapter 5 Edit mode Chapter 5 Edit mode Make your final edits in Edit mode where you can apply fine tuned adjustments on the more limited RGB image data Use the tools in Edit mode for any touch ups to specific areas of your images In Edit mode you can Usethe Selection tool to select and apply edits to a specific part of the image Remove flaws or red eye Add text borders vignettes special effects and drawing tools Crop flip resize and rotate Adjust lighting using the exposure levels auto levels tone curves and lighting tools Adjust color using the White Balance or Color Balance tool Add details to your image using Sharpen Remove Noise Add Noise or Blur tools Working in Edit mode Using Edit mode In Edit mode you can use the editing tools to fine tune your image remove red eye and apply special effects 119 ACDSee 14 User Guide Editing an image To edit an image 1 2 3 4 5 6 y 8 9 Select Edit mode In the Selections group click Selections In the Repair group click Red Eye Reduction or Repair Tool In the Add group click Text Borders Vignette Drawing tools or click Special Effect and select an effect In the Geometry
47. arrows of the Docking compass and then release the mouse button Stacking panes You can stack panes and reorder their tabs to suit your needs To stack panes 1 Doone of the following Drag one pane s title bar onto the title bar of another pane until the shaded marquee appears and then release the mouse button Chapter 1 Getting started Drag one pane inside another hold your cursor over the center of the Docking Compass and then release the mouse button 2 Toreorder the panes drag a tab to the left or right in the tab order 3 Toseparate atabbed pane drag the pane s tab to another location on the screen Resizing panes You can resize all the panes in Manage mode whether they are docked or floating To resize a docked pane 1 Hold your cursor over the edge of the pane until the cursor changes to arrows and lines 2 Drag the edge of the pane to the size you want To resize a floating pane Hold your cursor over the edge or corner of the pane and then drag the pane to the size you want Resetting the layout You can return all of the Manage mode panes to their default positions at any time To reset the Manage mode layout Click View Reset Layout Using View mode You can use View mode to display your images and media files using their actual dimensions or at a variety of magnifications You can also display a group of images in sequential order View mode contains four main areas Bottom tool
48. box where you can select an application Setting an image as the desktop wallpaper You can select any image and set it as the Windows desktop wallpaper You can also automatically stretch a wallpapered image to fill the screen or restore your previous wallpaper To set an image as the desktop wallpaper 1 Dooneof the following In Manage mode select an image and then click Tools Set Wallpaper In View mode click Tools Set Wallpaper 2 Select one of the following Centered Places the image in the center of the screen If the image is larger than the screen it is shrunk to fit Tiled Places the image in a tiled pattern that fills the entire desktop Stretched Stretches the image to fit the screen The selected image is saved as ACD Wallpaper bmp in the Windows folder ACDSee 14 automatically changes the wallpaper settings in the Control Panel Display properties to display the image To automatically stretch wallpapered images to fit the screen 1 Click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click General 3 Onthe General page select the Automatically stretch wallpaper to fit screen check box 4 Click OK To display the previous wallpaper Click Tools Set Wallpaper Restore Viewing and using brush files You can view brush files in Manage mode just like fonts or other files This means that you can assign ratings or organize them just like any other file in ACDSee 14 Because many abr files are
49. bpp no colormaps RLE or uncompressed All sub types supported 1 2 4 8 12 16 bits per sample 1 4 samples per pixel Bilevel RGB Paletted CMYK YCrCb LOGL LOGLUV Uncompressed PackBits LZW ThunderScan SGILog CCITT ZIP NEXT New JPEG no v6 0 JPEG support Support for multiple page documents Kodak RAW TIFF Canon RAW TIFF Win 3 x placeable metafiles Windows 1 8 24 bpp Non interlaced GIF 89a only 1 24 bpp including HAM and HAM8 multiple pages and animations not supported 8 and 24 bpp Progressive and baseline adjustable compression factor subsampling smoothing and Huffman code optimization 8 and 24 bpp RLE compressed 1 4 8 bpp colormapped 24 bpp RGB RGB grayscale duotone paletted and bi level Lab color interpreted as grayscale only Uncompressed and RLE compressed All sub types supported 8 32 bpp nocolormaps RLE or uncompressed 8 and 24 bpp RLE and uncompressed top down and bottom up 1 8 24 bits per pixel single page uncompressed CCITT3 CCITT4 LZW Deflate ZIP and JPEG compression Adjustable DPI tags 219 ACDSee14 User Guide Archive formats that ACDSee 14 reads ARJ ARJ archive CAB CAB archive GZ GZ archive LHA LHA and LZH archives RAR RAR archive TAR TAR archive TGZ TGZ archive UU UU archive ZIP ZIP archive Archive formats that ACDSee 14 writes LHA LHA and LZH archives ZIP ZIP archive 220 ARJ format Microsoft CAB file format Unix GZIP GnuZIP Lhd Iz4 IhO Ih1
50. cameras or quickly add location information yourself Finding viewing and selecting images is as easy as zooming in on the map and clicking the marker to select all the photos you shot at that location TAN AMES ua L et A ee te Sa Ly mm umeena New Yor S Smee E pr Sone Pensaytrares N 7 a kiga on wee gt yi s us ornare Missouri po 7 Ns e A pic NS ven Jersey 1 CS pitas Carolina Custom metadata panel A new metadata panelincludes custom views letting you see only the data that s meaningful and to you Color labels Color labeling capability takes you to a whole new level of visual tagging and image organization acdsee online Drawing Tools Put your photos to work for you using drawing tools to add lines and shapes such as squares circles and arrows to draw attention to certain elements in your image You can also adjust the width feathering and blending of your brush to create subtle or dramatic drawing effects Special Effects Quickly and easily apply a range of pre set special effects including Chapter 1 Getting started Do more in the cloud Your free ACDSee Online account is your personal space in the cloud to store manage and share your images now including RAW format files You can now email photo albums post albums on Facebook and Tweet links to your albums with just a few clicks ACDSee 14 User Guide New Collage Effectto creatively display your photo
51. can add tothe mood and atmosphere of a photo emphasize contrast and enhance color You can save your border settings as a preset to use again 133 ACDSee 14 User Guide To add a border to an image 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Borders 2 Createthe border by selecting its size color texture edge or edge effects as described in the Borders options below 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the Border tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool 4 Toadd another border restart the border tool and repeat these steps P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 134 Chapter 5 Edit mode Borders options 135 ACDSee 14 User Guide Eyedropper Picks up the color beneath the cursor when you click on the image The border changes to the clicked color which also appears in the Color box on the Borders pane so that you can adjust it if you open the Color dialog box s a eyedropper is not available when you are using a texture Border Size Sets the size of all the sides of the border simultaneously Drag the slider left and right to adjust the width of the border You can also type in a different number or use the up and down arrows to change the size of the border The text below the Size field shows the final size of your image with the border added The final size chan
52. combination to trigger the screen capture options To set the Hot Key press a key or combination of keys e g CTRL S on the keyboard do not type in the box Timer Takes a screen capture after a designated period Choose enough time to set up your desktop or window for the screen capture The maximum setting is 60 seconds 67 ACDSee 14 User Guide Emailing images You can usethe Send Email Wizard to send images directly from ACDSee 14 without opening an external email application To use the Send Email Wizard you will need an active email account and have a default email application set up on your computer or have access to an SMTP server To email your images 1 In the File List pane selectthe images you want to email and then click File Send Email Images If you want to add other images click Add When you have finished adding images click OK If you want to delete images select an image and click Remove The image is removed from the wizard but not deleted from ACDSee 14 If you want to set email and image options such as the maximum size for emails or the conversion of images to JPEG click Options When you have finished selecting options click Apply If you want to changethe email account settings to use either your default email client or an SMTP server click Change When you have finished changing your email account settings click OK In the Send Email Wizard click Next If you se
53. display at the top of the Web page SelectInclude header to display a header at the top of the Web page or clear the Include header check box to removethe header Select Include footer to display a footer at the bottom of the Web page or clear the Include footer check box to removethe footer If you want to display an image in the header or footer select Use image and click Browse and select a company logo a photo of yourself or another imageto display in the header If you want to display text in the header or footer select Use information and click Set Information and add enter the text that you would like to display Inthe Folder settings section click Browse and select the folder where you would like to save the HTML album files Click Next On the Thumbnail and Image page do one or all of the following Inthe Thumbnail settings section adjust the appearance and format of the thumbnails in the album Inthe Image settings section adjust the appearance and format of full size images in the album Inthe Slideshow duration section specify how long to display full size images during a slideshow Inthe Color and font settings section click Color and font adjust the colors and fonts used in the Web page and then click OK Click Save Settings to save the settings that you select for specific Web page styles If you save the settings you can quickly reapply them to a Web page style from the Style Settings page o
54. drop down arrow located to the right of the Main toolbar or File List toolbar and select Customize 199 ACDSee 14 User Guide In View mode click the drop down arrow located to the right of the Bottom toolbar select Add or Remove Buttons and then select Customize To display or hide text labels below toolbar buttons 1 Display the Customize dialog box 2 Clickthe Toolbars tab 3 SelectFile List Toolbar or Main Toolbar 4 Selectthe Show text labels check box to display text labels or clear the Show text labels check box to hide text labels 5 Click Close To display or hide tool tips for toolbar buttons 1 Display the Customize dialog box 2 Clickthe Options tab 3 Select Show ScreenTips on toolbars to display tool tips or clear Show ScreenTips on toolbars to hide tool tips If you selectthis option you can also select Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips to show keyboard shortcuts in the tool tips 4 Click Close To change the toolbar button size 1 Display the Customize dialog box 2 Clickthe Options tab 3 Select Large Icons to display larger toolbar buttons or clear Large Iconsto display smaller toolbar buttons 4 Click Close Resetting toolbars You can discard all of your changes and return the toolbars and buttons to their default states To reset the toolbars 1 Display the Customize dialog box Click the Toolbars tab and then click Reset All Click Yes to reset the toolbars oe Click
55. ed teas A e taal 115 Automatically Shrinking Or Enlarging IMages 0002 eee ee ce ee eee cece e cece ee eee 115 Displaying A Thumbnail Of A Magnified Image 2 22 ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee 116 Panning A Magnified Image 02 2 2 e eee eee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee cece eee eeee 117 Magnifying Specific Areas Of An Image 000 2 o cece eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee 117 CHAPTER 5 EDIT MODE ee o oo lone EU pEr EEPE eee eee eee ce eee ee ee eee cee e eevee eeeeeenes 119 Working If Edit Mode cit a ia 119 UsSINQIEdIEMOde ccanocictitoce cirios glee ates co capaci coo pon aioiina sauce cede edd beeen ete tica dead 119 Using Presets Edit os 2a 2320 ato cir occidentalis aia 121 Using The Undo redo Button ee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee cece eee 121 Restoring Originals 22 ca tesa tce A iS e il is 121 Using Blend Modes And Opacity 0000 A NS nde bce eeeN Nets p ioe bri sd AEE Dai 122 Previewing Changes To Images 123 Pixel Resize Options And Resulting Action 00 0 000 cee ce ee cee ee eee ee eee cece cece e eens 123 Saving Images In EditMOdJe co cc n coendanncsckedwanccagady seaheemenkensstdenzedehoatenekeeercedeieeeeohnag cede aasce 124 Saving And Canceling obec sade a uae a a ad 124 Selections OOS ce ee titres E E ete oc eaten isis a sae een es as 125 WSiIMG SClCCTIONS 2 55232 co oo ees eee A E E EEE 125 Applying Edits Or Effects To Selecti0NS ooocicccccccccccc ee ee ee ee ee ee ee cee ee
56. eens 33 iE Ene lesa a aa 34 Grouping AA RR 34 SOMO FES 2 taa e aa nds a bas 36 Selecting Piles o coocroto cion ocoertercencuntr roscar reci ness rete ereta a 37 ES CR 37 Rotana gia ges a daa 38 COMPA MNAE a tte 38 Gathering Images In The Image Basket 40 leine el oA A A eters casei 40 Organizing And Managing Files In ACDSee 14 000 40 Organizing With The Organize Panes 40 Creating Categories ic sete tek seme ted Sek heir sees Sean ee nae eae Bed we E vk ceeded Sek urease ade 43 Assigning And Searching Categories And RatingS 0 0 0 c ccc ccc cece ee eee ee cee eee eee e eee eee ee eee eee 44 Assigning Color Labels E a E a E e EEA eee eee eee 46 Usimg The PropertiesiPane ceniosin tadas cetro de omeis Saree ide Sas cta Dirt 48 Using The Map Pane oes es ccc canti cias 50 Creating And Assigning Keywords 51 Copying And Moving Rides 22452250 sseendue st see sess hice coco is o8o8ieeey oi 2eokenusebscsecausgeesceekessaeee 52 Copying Images To The Clipboard o oo cece eck ec ceeees cece aee ceuuees deneccuubesesccccuedecenasceuuusceeaccueeuee 52 Pasting Files And Folders 2 002 222 2 ccccc ccc e cece ccc c ec cccuce cece se scacccsueecesesscoeseseuceecacsseenceccesbeenescoeases 53 Replacing Or Overwriting Files o occ ia ic ria aca 53 Renaming A File Or Folder cocoa pc A o tia 53 Storing Files In Private FO deFS cocos a dira 54 TAGGING IMAaGes c e508 oe eet testers it ia rr tt tara 55 Adding ACDSee Metadata
57. footer text Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options In the text box type the text you want the caption to display To insert the current page number or the total number of pages into the text click Insert Page Number and then select an option from the menu In the Text alignment drop down list select the header or footer positioning To set a maximum number of text lines select the Number of lines check box and then specify a number in the field Chapter 3 Manage mode Setting contact sheet printing options The Contact sheet format area of the print utility contains settings you can adjust to control the appearance layout and size of your thumbnails If you saved your format options as a preset you can select the preset Contact sheet format options Thumbnail settings Frame options Thumbnail options Page background options Size Spacing Use thumbnail frame Margin Solid color Tiled image Colored drop shadow Colored edge fade Colored matte Beveled edges Solid color Tiled image Specifies the number of columns and rows to create on each page Specifies the amount of space between rows or columns In the Horizontal and Vertical spin boxes type a number to indicate the amount of space to display Creates a frame around each thumbnail Specifies the width of the frame Specifies the frame s color Click the color picker to define a color Specifies an image to u
58. generate identical fragment patterns To generate a new random seed click Random Seed Applying a Sunspot effect You can usethe Sunspot effect to add a bright spotin your images You can save your options as a preset for future use To apply a Sunspot effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Sunspot 3 On the Sunspot tab drag the Horizontal and Vertical sliders or click the image to set the location of the sunspot 4 Drag the Brightness slider to set the intensity of the sunspot 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Swirl effect You can use the Swirl effect to rotate and stretch people and objects in your images You can save your options as a preset for future use A To apply a Swirl effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickSwirl 3 OntheSwirl tab setthe options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 156 Chapter 5 Edit mode Swirl options Horizontal position Specifies the center of the swirl on the horizontal axis A value of 500 places the swirl in the middle of the image Vertical position Specifies the center of the swirl on the vertical axis A value of 500 places the swirl in the middle of the image Radius Spec
59. higher the value the rounder the lines Line frequency Specifies the amount of space between the contour lines The higher the value the closer the lines move together Line strength Specifies the strength of the line The higher the value the darker the line Line color Specifies the color of the contour lines Applying a Crayon Drawing effect You can use the Crayon Drawing effect to give your photos the appearance of a crayon drawing To use the Crayon Drawing effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Crayon Drawing 142 Chapter 5 Edit mode 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Crosshatch effect You can usethe Crosshatch effect to add crosshatching to an image To use the Crosshatch effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Crosshatch 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Dauber effect You can use the Dauber effect to make your images look like they were painted with a paint dauber You can select or change the Dauber options to apply the effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To use the Dauber effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Dauber On the
60. in a New Orton Effectto give an ethereal pastel like touch to collage of prints your portraits and landscapes New Lomo Effect to produce an edgy retro feel Choose from more than 20 special effect filters to add some dazzle to your images Starting ACDSee 14 After you install ACDSee 14 on your computer an application icon appears on the desktop and in the Start menu To start ACDSee 14 Do one of the following Double click the ACDSee 14 icon on the desktop Click Start ACD Systems ACDSee 14 Chapter 1 Getting started About the ACDSee 14 user interface Manage mode Manage mode is the main browsing and managing component of the user interface and is what you see when you start ACDSee 14 using the shortcut icon on your desktop In Manage mode you can find move preview and sort your files and access organization and sharing tools Manage mode consists of 12 panes most of which can be closed when not in use The File List pane is always visible and displays the contents of the current folder the results of your latest search or the files in your database that match your filtering criteria A status bar atthe bottom of the Manage mode window displays information about the currently selected file folder or category You can open and close panes move them to different areas of your screen and stack them on other panes or dock them to the edge of the window Most panes also have additional options you can set
61. in a format that the other application understands exposure Exposure is the amount of time that your digital camera s sensor is exposed to light F feather Softening image edges to blend theminto the background file listing In ACDSee 14 a report of the files currently displayed in Manage mode file format Medium for encoding information in a file Each type of file has a different file format that specifies how it organizes the information it contains filter Program that can apply an effect to an image such as an embossed appearance or a sepia tone fisheye distortion In fisheye distortion the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center as if the photo were wrapped around a sphere G gamma Range of color values a monitor scanner or printer can display Adjusting this value increases or decreases the intensity of the light spectrum grayscale image Image composed of different shades of gray H highlights Highlights are the brightest or whitest parts of an image histogram A histogram is a graph that displays the dynamic range of shadows and highlights in an image HSL An acronym for hue saturation and lightness hue Predominant color in an image image editor Program that you can use to create and edit images ACDSee 14 is an image editor 231 ACDSee 14 User Guide image resolution Quality of image details and colors Also used to describe the quality of monitors and printer outpu
62. in the Burn Basket If you drag the folder into the left pane be sure your cursor is over an existing folder in the folder tree before you release the mouse button 6 Toadd photos or other files to your disc drag them from the File List pane to the Burn Basket or select the files you want to add and then click Edit Add to Burn Basket You can use the buttons on the Burn Basket toolbar as explained below to adjustthe contents of the Burn Basket or to save or load projects 7 When you are ready to create your disc click Burn Burn Basket toolbar buttons 10 Format Options Opens the Format Options dialog box where you can specify the options for your selected format Add to Burn Basket Adds the currently selected files or folders to the Burn Basket Remove From Burn Basket Removes the currently selected files or folders from the Burn Basket b Remove All Clears the contents of the Burn Basket ES New Folder Creates a new sub folder A Rename Renames the currently selected file or folder Q Save Project Saves the current contents and settings of the Burn Basket as a project file you can edit later Q Load Project Opens a previously saved Burn Basket project Creating video files and VCDs You can use the Create Video or VCD Wizard to generate a video file slideshow of your favorite photos and media files or create a Video CD that you can watch on your TV The VCD Wizard creates a CD that is a different format from those cr
63. is useful for creating subtle and dramatic drawings You can save your options as a preset for future use To draw on your image 1 In Edit mode select Drawing Tools found under the Add group 2 Selectfrom the following tools 132 Tool Pencil Rectangle Ellipse Line Arrow Curve Polygon Chapter 5 Edit mode Instructions Drag over the image to draw a free flowing line Drag over the image to create rectangle Press the SHIFT key as you draw to create a square Drag over the image to create an ellipse Press the SHIFT key as you draw to create a circle Drag over the image to draw a straight line Press the SHIFT key as you draw to create a vertical or horizontal line Drag over the image to create an arrow Press the SHIFT key as you draw to create a vertical or horizontal arrow Drag over the image then release Next move your mouse to create the curve and click to set Clickto setthe corner points of a polygon then double click to connect the start and end points to complete the polygon 3 Selectfrom one or more of the following options Note options vary depending on the tool selected Option Color Fill Nib Width Feathering Instructions Selecta color by clicking the drop down arrow to display gradients of colors or click the color box to display a dialog of swatches to choose from Selectthe Fill check box and selecta color by clicking the drop down arrow to display gradients of colo
64. long list of categories or would like to break your categories up into different events or areas of interest you can use the Edit Category Sets feature To create easy access category sets 1 Createa categories tree as outlined above Clickthe Manage Category Sets drop down list Enter your commonly used categories into the entry fields For sub categories use the pipe key Example A B C 2 3 4 Clickthe Save button 5 Click OK This category set will be listed in the Category Sets drop down list 6 Select one or more files and click a button in the category set The category will be assigned to the selected files The button text color will change to indicate that the category is assigned to currently selected files and will display in italics if it is assigned to only some but not all of the currently selected files P Make sure the category button name matches the category name in the category tree Assigning and searching categories and ratings You can assign files to a rating or one or more categories without moving the file or making an extra copy Y If the Properties pane or Organize pane is not visible in Manage mode click View Properties or View Organize Quickly Assign Ratings with Hover Icons 1 Hover over athumbnail to display the gray rating circle 2 Clickthe gray rating circle to make your selection Example of hovering over a thumbnail to select a rating Bentley2 JPG Bentley2 JPG Bentley JPG
65. one of four date types when sorting files To set the Calendar pane options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Calendar 3 Onthe Calendar page set or change any of the options described below 4 Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee 14 189 ACDSee 14 User Guide Calendar pane options Date types Database date Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the date stored in the ACDSee 14 database Date taken Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the EXIF date of each item File modified Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the last modified date of each item date File created date Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the date each file was created on your computer Filters Apply Advanced Filters the items displayed in the Calendar pane based on the current File List File List Filters pane filter settings excluding folders Show image and Displays only image audio and video files in the Calendar pane media files only Start of week Specifies the first day of each week in the Calendar pane Clock formats 12 hour Uses a 12 hour clockin the Calendar pane 24 hour Uses a 24 hour clockin the Calendar pane Setting the CD DVD Management options You can use the Options dialog box to change the folder where Burn Basket files are stored and to set the preferred method for identifying Photo Discs To change the Burn Basket or Photo Disc Identification opt
66. overexposed Lunarize adjusts pixels located below the specified threshold option The effect takes any pixels below the threshold and replaces them with their negative value When you lunarize an image a higher threshold value sets a darker threshold and colors do not have to be as bright to be overexposed 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Stained Glass effect You can use the Stained Glass effect to divide your images into fragments of a random size and shape to give the photo the appearance of a stained glass window You can control the size and position of the fragments You can save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Stained Glass effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Stained Glass 3 On the Stained Glass tab set the options as described below 155 ACDSee 14 User Guide 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Stained Glass options Fragment size Specifies the size of the fragments Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the fragments When you apply the Stained Glass effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the fragments randomly This makes the effect different every time you apply the filter You can define a specific random seed to
67. overwrites files in the target folder without prompting for confirmation Skip Does not move copy or overwrite any files that result in naming conflicts Save Originals Saves a copy of the original file when itis edited using one of the batch editing tools This makes it possible to restore the original file later Turning this option off means that originals are not saved during batch editing and so cannot be restored In Edit mode a copy of the original file is always saved whether or not this option is selected Other Click to edit file Specifies that file names can be edited by clicking the file name in the name Use Recycle Bin Preserve ACDSee metadata when files are copied Setting the Database options File List pane Sends files to the Desktop Recycle Bin If not selected deleted files are permanently removed from your hard drive Copies ACDSee metadata with files when you copy them to another location You can adjust settings in the Options dialog box to display reminders control database information and specify a location on your hard drive where you want to store your database files and cached thumbnails To set the database options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog click Database 3 Onthe Database page set or change the options as described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 192 Database options Database location Display backup
68. pixel PICture ELement Smallest visible portion of a digital image arranged in rows and columns plug in Software module that adds functionality to a larger program PPI pixels per inch Measurement of how an image is displayed More pixels per inch result in higher image quality presets A preset contains image correction settings You can create and use presets to ensure that settings you apply are the same and consistent across all images primary colors Colors that can produce other colors when blended For example in the RGB color model red green and blue are primary colors R raster image Image composed of a rectangular grid of pixels Each pixel contains a defined value aboutits color size and location in the image As a result resizing the image can affect its quality rating 233 ACDSee 14 User Guide Assign ratings 1 2 3 4 5 to photos to help sort and manage them more easily RAW An image file format RAW files contain all of the image data that was captured by your digital camera s sensor RAW files are not processed by your camera instead you must process RAW images using a photo editing program such ACDSee Pro 5 recursive Program or task that can repeat itself indefinitely such as a slideshow red eye Red eye occurs when the light from your digital camera s flash reflects off the retinas in the subject s eyes The subject s eyes look red instead of their normal color Relative Colorime
69. processing except in the case of RAW images P You cannot set IPTC and EXIF information for read only files such as those on a CD ROM 9 If the Properties pane is not already open select View Properties To add metadata to one or more files 1 In Manage mode select one or more files in the File List pane 2 IntheProperties pane select the Metadata tab 3 Enter information into the metadata fields 4 Click Apply or press Enter to apply your changes 56 Chapter 3 Manage mode When you click Apply or Enter in Manage Mode the focus is returned to the File List pane allowing you to quickly make __ another file selection using your keyboard Metadata Tab keyboard shortcuts This shortcut Has this result TAB Jumps focus forward from field to field SHIFT TAB Jumps focus backwards from field to field CTRL K Places the cursor in the IPTC Keywords field of the Metadata tab in the Properties pane ALT K Places the cursor in the ACDSee Metadata Keywords field of the Metadata tab in the Properties pane ENTER Applies your changes ESC Discards your changes 1 If you click away from the Properties pane any metadata that you have just entered will be lost You must click Apply or press ENTER to apply your changes To use keyboard shortcuts to enter Metadata into the same field of multiple photos 1 2 3 4 Select the first photo in your list and enter content into a Metadata field Press the Page Dow
70. quickly organize your files The Auto Categories section can be used to find files with specific information such as file size keywords or shutter speed The Saved Searches section allows you to create and run custom searches Special items such as the Image Well display all the images on the computer in one click or you can click Uncategorized to display only those that are not yet in a category Easy Select bars Select multiple albums ratings labels and categories with the Easy Select bars to display files matching these selections in the File List pane To use the Easy Select bar Selectthe indicator Ve to the left of one or more items in the Organize pane to display the files in the File List pane that match the specific set of criteria The ACDSee 14 database Any organizing you do using categories ratings or labels on the Organize pane or the Properties pane is stored in the ACDSee 14 database If you choose to you can then also embed this information in each individual file making it easier to relocate and share files or retrieve the information from the file if you need to Changing views You can select different views to display your files in the File List pane including thumbnail previews and file details You can also customize the appearance and size of thumbnails and specify the information displayed in the Details view Views Thumbs Details Displays file names and details in a list and adds a thumbnail previ
71. select View ACDSee 14 User Guide To open a group of images in View mode 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select a group of images 2 Press Enter 3 Tonavigatethrough the images dothe following Toview the next image in the sequence click Next Toview the previous image in the sequence click Previous Viewing images in full screen mode You can usethe entire screen of your monitor to display images In full screen mode the window borders menu bar status bar and toolbars are hidden and only the image is visible If you want to always view your images in full screen mode you can set this option as the default for View mode To view images in full screen mode 1 Openan image or a group of images in View mode 2 ClickView Full Screen 3 Right click the imageto access the View mode tools and options via a shortcut menu To exit full screen mode Do one of the following Press the F key Right click the image and select View Full Screen Y Usethe keyboard shortcut F in View mode to toggle in and out of a full screen view Using the View mode panes To open the View mode panes 1 Open an image in View mode 2 Dooneof the following Click View Histogram to display the histogram for the image Click View Magnifying glass to magnify the area of the image under your cursor Click View Navigator to display a thumbnail overview of a magnified image Click View Properties to display the
72. select only the same color pixels that are actually touching the one you clicked or all the pixels in the photo that are similar You can increase the threshold to include more pixels in the selection The lower the threshold the more similar a pixel has to be to the one clicked to be included The greater the threshold the more different a pixel can be and still be in the selection Marquee Click and drag either a rectangle or an ellipse that begins where you first click and ends when you release the mouse Combining the tools You can use the Selection tools separately or in combination For example you can use the Magic Wand to select most of a particular color then switch to the Freehand Lasso to add to or subtract from the selection Or you could use the Marquee to select a large general area then refine it using the Freehand Lasso To use the Freehand Lasso 126 i 2 3 Click the Freehand Lasso to select it On the image click and hold down the left mouse button as you draw around the area you want to select Release the mouse button to complete the selection 4 Toclear the selection click anywhere on the image for the Freehand Lasso or Marquee or click Clear 5 Toadd to an existing selection hold down SHIFT and draw a shape that includes any part of the original selection line When you release the mouse the original selection expands to include the outer edge of your addition Chapter 5 Edit mod
73. slider to the right to widen the transition area Stretches the vignette horizontally to make the shape elliptical rather than round Specifies the shape of the frame Round Select Round if you want the frame to be round Rectangular Select Rectangular if you wantthe frame to be square Select Show outline if you want to display an outline that shows the outside edge of the clear zone and the inside edge of the frame Applies the following special effects to the vignette frame area around the focal point Color Changes the color of the frame area to the color you select in the color picker Saturation Removes color from the people or objects in the vignette frame sothey are gray scale Blur Blurs the vignette frame area Clouds Applies a Clouds effect to the frame area Edges Applies an Edges effect by tracing the lines and details of people or objects with neon colors Radial Waves Creates the appearance of waves radiating from the focal point into the frame area Radial Blur Creates a Radial Blur that rotates and stretches the frame area Zoom Blur Applies a Zoom Blur to the frame area Crayon Edges Applies the Crayon Edges effect by tracing the lines and details around people or objects with crayon Dauber Creates the impression that the people or objects around the focal point were painted with a brush Pixelate Applies a pixel effect to the frame Old Applies an aging effect to th
74. specify whether you want to find exact duplicates or just files with the same name 8 Select Find images only if you only want to search for image files 9 ClickNext 10 Ifno duplicates are found click OK and refine your search or click Cancel to exit the Duplicate Finder 11 If duplicates are found specify from which list you want to delete the duplicates and then select the check box next to the files you want to delete You can also right click a file name to open rename or delete a file 12 Click Next to review your changes and then click Finish Finding images quickly You can click on the name of a saved search to quickly re run the search You can select Special Items in the Organize pane to locate all of the images in your database or list all of the images that you have not yet assigned to a category To re run a saved search In Manage mode in the Organize pane click the name of a saved search The results of the search display in the File List pane To find all of your images at once 1 In Manage mode click View Organize to open the Organize pane 2 Inthe Organize pane under Special Items click Image Well To locate uncategorized images 1 In Manage mode click View Organize to open the Organize pane 2 Inthe Organize pane under Special Items click Uncategorized 3 TheImage Well and Uncategorized features only display images that have been cataloged in the database they do not search your hard d
75. that it appears higher The greater the size the more rounded the effect Strength Drag the slider to the right to increase the 3D effect of the raised edge Colored Select this option to apply the border color to the raised edge Light Source Activates when you click either the Drop shadow or Raised check boxes Click and drag the glow on the ball to reposition the imaginary light source for the 3D effect of the Drop shadow or Raised edge effects Adding your own textures or edges It is possible to add custom textures and edges to the libraries in the Borders tool If you make your own edges or textures or own a collection from the Internet you can add them to the texture and edge libraries You can also delete existing files from the libraries to make room for others The textures or edges have to be in the following file formats with these extensions BMP EMF GIF JPG GIF PNG TIF Textures The textures are tiled so they should be images that can be tiled seamlessly The files are used at their full resolution not scaled up or down For example if your texture imageis 100 x 100 pixels and you are creating a bordered image that is 1000 x 1000 pixels then your texture file will be tiled 10 times If you use a texture file that is 1000 x 1000 pixels then there would just be the one texture tile for the whole border To add your own textures to the texture library 137 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 Edge
76. that you will be able to remember To add an existing folder and its contents to a private folder 1 Open the private folder to which you want to add files 2 Clickand drag the folder onto the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane 3 Click Yes to move the folder and its contents to the private folder To restore folders and files from a private folder 1 Open the private folder containing the folders or files that you want to restore 2 Selectthe folders or files and click File Restore from Private Folder 3 Clickthe browse button navigate tothe folder where you would like to move the folders or files and then click OK 4 ClickOK ACDSee 14 moves the folders or files from the private folder to the selected location These folders and files are now visible to anyone with access to the computer To delete a private folder or the folders or files in the private folder 1 Open the private folder containing the folders or files that you want to delete 2 Dooneof the following Todelete the private folder right click the private folder icon and select Delete Todelete folders or files in a private folder right click them and select Delete A warning message displays 3 Click Yes to delete the private folder and all of its contents or the selected folders or files in the private folder Use caution when deleting folders or files in private folders If you delete folders or files in private folders they are permane
77. the Device Detector until you changethe settings manually Importing files from specific types of devices For more specific instructions select the type of device you connected La Importing photos from a device Importing photos from a CD or DVD Importing photos from a disk Importing photos from a scanner Importing photos from a mobile phone folder About removable devices With ACDSee 14 there are several ways to obtain images from your digital camera scanner or memory card For more information about how your device communicates with your computer please consult your device s Help file or manual Some different types of 18 Chapter 3 Manage mode removable devices are USB Removable device Removable devices include memory cards that you can attach to your computer using a USB card reader camera memory cards that insert directly into slots on the computer or flash drives USB removable devices are detected by your computer and are shown in the structure as a removable drive Windows Image Acquisition WIA Cameras and scanners that use Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers to communicate with the computer Some cameras including Canon cameras use WIA ACDSee 14 automatically detects the WIA protocol TWAIN Cameras and scanners that usethe TWAIN interface TWAIN supported devices use TWAIN drivers that you must install on your computer to communicate with the device For more information about drivers an
78. the Properties pane Opens or closes the Properties pane Closes ACDSee 14 Opens the Import dialog box Opens the Filters dialog box where you can specify the types of files displayed in the File List pane Places the cursor in the ACDSee Metadata Keywords field of the Metadata tab in the Properties pane Moves one or more selected files to a folder you specify Opens the Options dialog box Opens the next tab in the Properties pane Removes currently displayed item from the Burn Basket Maximizes the File List pane Restores your desktop wallpaper to the settings you were using before you applied an ACDSee 14 wallpaper Removes currently displayed item from the Image Basket Moves up one level in the current drive s folder structure Assigns a rating tothe currently selected item Press CTRL O to remove a rating Selects the tagged images Selects the entire contents of the current folder Adds the selected items to the Image Basket Copies the selected items to the Clipboard Opens the currently selected image in Edit mode Opens the Batch Convert File Format dialog box Generates a file listing as a text document Selects all images in the current folder Copies selected items to the Clipboard Opens the Batch Rotate Flip Images dialog box Places the cursor in the IPTC Keywords field of the Metadata tab in the Properties pane Opens the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box Open the Batch Set Information dialog bo
79. the Properties paneto add change or delete the metadata for image and media files To open the Properties pane Click View Properties The Properties paneis located by default on the right side of your screen The Properties paneis available in all modes except Online mode The Metadata panel offers adjustable width for metadata fields Simply hover between a corresponding label and field to display the double arrow cursor Click and drag to adjust width Double click to toggle between the width of the longest label in the group or the longest label in the pane Properties pane areas The Properties paneis divided into 3 tabs Metadata tab Categories tab and File tab 48 Chapter 3 Manage mode Usethe thumbnail hover icons to tag rate and add color labels to your images Alternatively you can display these setting in the Properties pane by clicking Tools Options Properties Pane and selecting Show Tagged Rating and Color Labels Metadata tab The Metadata tab displays the rating category IPTC EXIFand ACDSee metadata stored with a photo The ACDSee metadata fields are available for you to enter the caption for your photographs as well as date author notes and keywords IPTC information is automatically embedded into your image while ACDSee Metadata is not embedded in your files but instead is held in the database ACDSee Metadata can be embedded into all your files or just selected ones by clicking the Tools
80. the display of thumbnails in the File List in the following way Match All To be included a file has to belong to all the categories or searches you select So the file has to be in both or all of the categories or searches before it will display in the File List Match All is more exclusive You can use it to limit the number of files that display and narrow a search down Match Any To be included a file can belong to any of the categories or searches you select So any files in the selected categories or searches will display in the File List Match any it is more inclusive 42 Chapter 3 Manage mode Organize icons m t ul o 9 Category Identifies files that have been assigned to a category Ratings 1 5 Identifies file ratings New Saved search Opens the Search pane so that you can create a new saved search Saved search Displays the Save Save As menu so you can save a search Easy Select indicator selected Selects the category rating auto category or other item for display in the File List pane Easy Select indicator not selected Does not select the category rating auto category or other tem for display in the File List pane Match Any All Controls which images are displayed in the File List pane To hide the icons in the Organize pane click Tools Options and then select Organize Deselect the Show Icons check _ box in the Options dialog box Creating categories Organize your photos in a
81. the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying an Emboss effect You can use the Emboss effect to add a grayscale relief to an image You can save your options as a preset for future use To emboss an image 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Emboss On the Emboss tab set the options as described below E wes Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Emboss options Elevation Specifies the light source s elevation on the image Lower values produce more shadows and a darker image Higher values produce fewer shadows and a lighter image Weight Specifies the amount of relief added to the image Higher values increase the relief depth Azimuth Specifies the angle of shadows that extend from the edges of image details A value of 0 adds shadows to the left side while a value of 180 adds shadows to the right side Applying a Furry Edges effect You can use the Furry Edges effect to add fur and bristles to the lines and details of people or objects in your images You can save your options as a preset for future use To use the Furry Edges effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Furry Edges 3 OntheFurry Edges tab setthe options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing
82. the image Vertical position Specifies the center of the ripples on the vertical axis A value of 500 places the ripples in the middle of the image Amplitude Specifies the depth and height of each ripple Wavelength Specifies the amount of space between ripples Light strength Specifies the amount of light contrast between the top and bottom of each ripple Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Ripple direction Specifies the direction of the ripples Select one or both of the following Ripple vertically Makes the ripples move towards the top and bottom of the image Ripple horizontally Makes the ripples move towards the right and left sides of the image Applying a Scattered Tiles effect You can use the Scattered Tiles effect to divide your images into rectangular tiles and scatter and stack the tiles You can select or changethe Scattered Tiles options to apply this effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Scattered Tiles effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickScattered Tiles 3 On the Scattered Tiles tab set the options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 152 C
83. the screensaver on your desktop select the Set as default screensaver check box When you are satisfied with your choices click OK To activate the screensaver on your computer Selectthe Screen Saver tab in your Windows Display Properties dialog box and then select ACDSee Screensaver from the drop down list 68 ACDSee Screensaver options Basic Select transitions Variations Effects Background color Slide duration sec Advanced General settings Slide order Text Display header text Display footer text Screensaver text options Chapter 3 Manage mode Displays a list of transitions for you to select and plays each transition variation or effect in the Preview as you select it Select all Selects all the transitions and displays them randomly Clear all Clears any selected transitions r transitions do not work with the 2 up 4 up and Collage variations Click the drop down list to select from the following None Uses no variations Pan and Zoom Zooms in and pans across each slide during the time it is displayed 2 up Displays twoimages ata time 4 up Displays four images at atime Collage Displays images as a collage where images overlap each other Click the drop down list to select from the following None Uses no effects Black white Displays all images in grayscale Sepia Displays all images in sepia Vivid Increases the saturation of the images to make
84. to further customize their behavior and appearance Manage mode also features a toolbar and a set of drop down menus The toolbar provides buttons for your home folder and for navigating forwards and backwards through your folders The drop down menus provide quick access to the most common tasks View mode In View mode you can play media files and display images in full resolution one at a time You can also open panes to view image properties display areas of an image at varying magnifications or examine detailed color information You can open View mode by double clicking an associated file type in Windows Explorer and you can use the filmstrip in View mode to flip quickly between all of the images in a folder View mode contains a toolbar with shortcuts to commonly used commands and a status bar at the bottom of the window which displays information aboutthe current image or media file Edit mode Edit mode works on the image data already rendered to RGB Edits are independently applied to the converted RGB data in the order that you dothem This chain editing gives you full control over the pixels allowing creative freedom to apply precise adjustments This makes operations such as selections and blend modes possible ACDSee 14 User Guide Online mode Online mode provides an easy way to upload images to ACDSeeOnline com to share with your contacts or the public In Online mode you can select the images on your computer and then
85. to light long enough V vector image Image consisting of individual objects rather than pixels Mathematical equations define the objects You can adjust the sizeof a vector image and the image will retain its clarity and quality W watermark Background text or graphics added to an image usually to provide copyright protection white balance Removes color cast to create a photo that is correctly lit You can use your camera settings to apply the correct white balance before taking an image or correct the white balance in ACDSee 14 whitepoint Lightest image area You can control the intensity of the white in an image by adjusting its whitepoint X Z XML Extensible Markup Language 235 ACDSee 14 User Guide Standard language for Web documents zoom In ACDSee 14 zoom refers to the process of increasing or decreasing the display scale for an image Increase the display scale to view a portion of an image or a specific image detail Decrease the display scale to view more or all of the image 236 ACDSee 14 User Guide A ACDSee database importing photos starting system requirements user interface what s new acquiring importing acquiring photos archiving files assigning categories and color labels assigning categories and ratings associating files with ACDSee audio adding to images playing recording to images auto advance backing up database tips and strategies batch editing about e
86. ups Auto hide pop ups Show thumbnail in pop ups Show file information in pop ups Chapter 7 Options and configuration Does not highlight image files in Details and Thumbs Details views Uses a single color to highlight all image file types in Details and Thumbs Details views Uses a different color to highlight each image typein Details and Thumbs Details views Activates or deactivates the animated pop up preview that displays when you hover over thumbnails in the File List Settings below allow you to include text and or an image in the pop up or if you turn this option off to activate the pop up only when you hold down the SHIFT key Activates the pop up only if you hold down the SHIFT key while hovering over a thumbnail in the File List You can turn this option off if it interferes with SHIFT selection Hides pop ups after 5 seconds even if you are still hovering over the image Shows a pop up preview of images in the File List when you hover over them with a mouse Includes text file information in the mouse over pop up You can select the information to display by clicking Configure Pop ups and clicking on the type of information Opens the Choose Pop up Information dialog where you can select what information to display in the pop up when you hover over a thumbnail in the File List The default is file name location size modified date and image dimension but you can select other ACDSee Metadata EXIF
87. view full screen and to return to Edit mode Actual Size Returns the current image to its actual size Navigator Pane Zooms into a specific area of the image Click the Navigator icon to display a small duplicate of your image and drag your cursor to a section of the image Release the cursor to zoom into the image The Navigator icon is only available after clicking Actual Size Fit Image Reduces the image to fit within the Edit mode area Show Saved Toggles the changes on or off to compare the current image to the last saved version Zoom slider Increases the size of the image if you drag it to the right decreases the size if you drag to the left Zoom drop down list Displays alist of zoom sizes to select 120 Chapter 5 Edit mode Using presets in Edit Many ACDSee 14 editing tools and special effects allow you to save your settings as presets This is convenient when you frequently usethe same settings for a particular tool or effect For most tools ACDSee 14 automatically saves the last option settings you applied to an image when you clicked Apply or Done This presetis called Last Used P The Save Preset El and Delete X buttons are located at the top of an editing tool s panel To save a preset 1 Under the Edit tab select a tool and specify its settings 2 Clickthe Save Preset button 3 Inthe New Preset dialog box enter a name for your preset and then click OK The new preset will appear in the tool s
88. whereto place them on your hard drive When you are ready click Next to copy your images Select Browse to your new images if you want to view the files in Manage mode and click Finish to return to ACDSee 14 Importing photos from a mobile phone folder The Mobile Phone Acquire Wizard will guide you through the process of downloading images from your mobile phone folder To download photos from your mobile phone l 2 In Manage mode click File Import From Mobile Phone Folder On the Welcome page select the location of your mobile phone folder and where you want to place the images on your hard drive You can select options to place images in a dated subfolder and to remove the files from your device once they are on your hard drive Click Next when you are ready to continue On the Downloaded Images page preview your downloaded images Click Next when you are ready to place the images on your hard drive Creating a renaming template In the Import From dialog box you can create name and save a template that gives each file a unique name as they are imported and placed on your hard drive You can then re use the template each time you import photos Renaming templates can have a numerical sequence custom text and file specific information in each new file name You can create and save different renaming templates for different sorts of files For example you could have a different renaming template for a different camera o
89. 0 40 53 109 48 99 53 53 37 36 217 59 34 162 86 29 92 26 pasting renaming synchronizing files synchronizing in View mode Folders pane options using footer in View mode printing on pages fullscreen mode Furry Edges effect G getting photos Device Detector renaming templates Glowing Edges effect Granite effect grayscale Group by Edited State H header in View mode printing on pages Heal tool hicolor highlights histogram home folder HTML album I Image Basket Image Well images adding audio comparing Index 53 53 59 105 188 29 104 84 10 144 19 26 145 145 170 35 104 84 130 170 167 169 182 77 40 66 111 38 241 ACDSee 14 User Guide converting to another format copying downloading emailing extracting from video files finding quickly import importing panning supported formats uploading viewing import photos importing images importing database information importing photos froma CD from a digital camera froma disk from a mobile phone from a scanner IPTC removing IPTC keywords auto categories viewing J JPEG options K keyboard shortcuts customizing Manage mode View mode L labels assigning light levels 242 85 52 18 68 110 66 19 18 117 217 177 10 19 18 93 25 19 25 26 25 57 49 198 202 205 208 46 165 listing files local contrast enhancement magnifying gla
90. 4 User Guide 4 Onthe Page Settings tab specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths 5 Specify the number of prints of each photo If you are printing a Full page or a Contact sheet this option is available on the Page Settings tab If you are printing a Layout this option is available below the list of layouts 6 Add captions headers or footers You can only add captions headers or footers if you are printing a Full page or a Contact sheet 7 Click Print Showing originals When you make changes to your images the original image is saved so that you can restore the image to its original settings To show the original image 1 In View mode select an image that has been edited 2 Clickand hold the Show Original button in the bottom toolbar When you release the mouse button the edited image is displayed Committing changes When you make changes to your images the original image is saved so that you can restore the image to its original settings If you decide that you want to keep your edited image and save that as your original image you can commit the changes to the image This deletes any sidecar files or originals that have been saved and removes the E overlay icon that indicates the image has been edited To commit changes to an image 1 In Manage mode or View mode select an image that has been edited 2 Click Tools Commit Changes Zooming images Zooming an image In View mode you can use t
91. 4 database will be broken If this happens and you have embedded the information in each file you can rebuild the database and retrieve all the information You can also use the Properties pane to add information to the ACDSee 14 database like captions keywords and much more Taking the time to assign categories and add keywords notes etc makes it much easier to find and organize your files ACDSee 14 uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file Only some file formats and file extensions support XMP 27 These include GIF JPEG DNG PNG and TIF In the case of these file formats the ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee 14 and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata For formats that currently do not support XMP including RAW PSD ABR the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder as its file Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself you need to rename or move themtogether or you could lose the ACDSee Metadata permanently Easy Select bars The Easy Select bars are the indicators on the left side of the Folders and Organize panes You can use the Easy Select indicators to select multiple folders or categories and display their contents in the File List pane In the Organize pane you can also use the Easy Selectindicators to select combinations of categories ratings auto categories saved searches and special items
92. 58 Dauber effect 143 descript ion files 94 Details view 33 Details View options 187 Device Detector 19 digital camera getting photos 19 plug ins 18 display theme 182 203 downloading photos from a CD 25 photos from a digital camera 19 photos from a mobile phone 26 photos from a scanner photos in ACDSee dual monitors moving the panes Duplicate Finder DVD creating setting CD DVD management options VCD E icon Edge Detect effect Edit Add Noise Auto Levels Blur Border Color Balance Crop Flip presets Red Eye Reduction Remove Noise Repair tool Resize Rotate Selections Sharpen Text Tone Curve Vignette Edit mode customizing the Editing Tools pane Edited State group by editing adding noise adding text blurring Index 8 29 131 131 25 18 137 65 76 190 77 186 143 119 174 166 171 133 169 162 162 121 129 173 130 163 161 125 171 132 167 138 11 200 35 174 132 171 239 ACDSee 14 User Guide brightness 164 Old 147 cloning 130 Outline 148 configuring editors 200 Pencil Drawing 148 correcting shadows and highlights 167 Pixel Explosion 149 cropping 162 Pixelate 149 exposure 166 Posterize 150 flipping 162 Radial Waves 150 light levels 165 Rain 151 presets 121 Ripple 151 removing noise 173 Scattered Tiles 152 removing red eye 129 Sepia 153 repairing 130 Sheet Metal 153 resizing 163 Shift 154 RGB values 169 Slant 154 rotating 161 Sobel 155 sharpen 1
93. 71 Solarize 155 special effects 139 Stained Glass 155 tone curve 167 Sunspot 156 toolbars 199 Swirl 156 effects Threshold 157 about 139 Topography 157 Bathroom Window 140 user defined 161 Blinds 140 Vignette 138 Blur 148 Water 158 Bulge 140 Water Drops 158 collage 141 Waves 159 Colored Edges 141 Weave 159 Contours 142 Wind 160 Crayon Drawing 142 emailing images 68 Crosshatch 143 Emboss effect 144 Dauber 143 excluding folders from database 92 Edge Detect 143 EXIF Emboss 144 adding EXIF information 56 Furry Edges 144 viewing 49 Glowing Edges 145 exporting database information 95 golden hue 146 exposure Granite 145 adjusting automatically 166 Mirror 146 adjusting for multiple images 88 Negative 147 Oil Paint 147 F Favorites pane 32 240 file formats File List pane customizing filtering files full screen setting Details View options setting File List options setting thumbnail display options using views files archiving associating with ACDSee cataloging in the database changing dates copying and moving details finding duplicates listing management options map coordinates organizing pasting playing audio and video properties quarantining renaming replacing selecting sorting supported formats synchronizing between folders filtering files flipping in Edit multiple photos folders browsing excluding from database mobile phone 217 182 34 29 187 182 185 28 33 80 222 92 58 52 33 65 96 191 5
94. ACDSee 14 includes a variety of powerful searching tools and a Compare Images feature to eliminate duplicates View mode quickly generates high quality displays of your images You can run slideshows play embedded audio and display multiple page images in any of the more than 50 image and multimedia file formats Also ACDSee 14 includes a wide variety of image editing tools you can use to create edit and touch up your digital images Use tools such as red eye reduction crop sharpen blur and photo repair to enhance or correct your images Image editing tools such as exposure adjustment convert resize rename and rotate can be performed on multiple files at the same time The user interface is completely customizable and provides quick access to tools and features You can customize the screen layout the order of images toolbar display and many other options to suit your preferences ACDSee 14 contains extensive context sensitive Help to assist you as you move through the application ACDSee 14 is a fast powerful and easy to use image management system that everyone from beginners to professionals can use and enjoy What s new in ACDSee 14 For more detailed information on specific changes and fixes refer to the ACDSee 14 Release Notes ACDSee14 User Guide Map view and geotagging support Find and organize your photos by location with new Map view and geotagging support Instantly view the location of images from GPS enabled
95. COMMA ALT D ALT ENTER ALT F4 ALT M ALT O ALT PERIOD ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT W ALT X B BACKSPACE CTRL LEFT ARROW CTRL RIGHT ARROW CTRL O to5 CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL E CTRL F CTRL F4 CTRL INSERT CTRL J CTRL MINUS CTRL O CTRL P CTRL PLUS CTRL Q CTRL S Chapter 8 Shortcuts Resulting action Tags or untags the image Increases the magnification of the current image zooms in Toggles image audio on or off Opens or closes the Properties pane Zooms the image to fit the height within View mode window Does not enlarc Zooms the image to fit the width within View mode Window Does not enlarg Toggles the zoom lock on and off Adds the selected items to the Burn Basket in Manage mode Copies the current item to a folder you specify Moves the focus in the Properties pane to the previous tab Opens the Edit Caption dialog box Opens or closes the Properties pane Closes ACDSee 14 Moves the current item to a folder you specify Opens the ACDSee 14 Options dialog box Moves the focus in the Properties pane to the next tab Removes currently displayed item from the Burn Basket in Manage mode Opens the Rename File dialog box Starts or stops the Auto Advance slideshow Restores your desktop wallpaper to the settings you were using before you lt Removes currently displayed item from the Image Basket in Manage mode Displays or hides the status bar
96. Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Granite options Light Angle Specifies the direction from which an imaginary light source is shining on the image Drag the arrow to adjustthe angle Different light angles will change the highlights and shadows in the peaks and valleys on the rock Applying a Lomo effect Simulate the retro effects of a lomo camera Photos taken with a lomo camera are high contrast with a golden hue and a noticeable vignette You can save your settings as a preset for future use To usethe Lomo effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Lomo 3 Drag the Color Distortion slider to the right to increase the color distortion 4 Drag the Vignette Strength slider to the right to increase the vignette strength 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 6 Click Exit to leave Special Effects and return to Edit 5 9 Refer to the preview window to compare your image before and after Applying a Mirror effect You can use the Mirror effect to reflect an image along the horizontal or vertical axis You can select or change the Mirror options to apply mirroring to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Mirror effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Mirror 3 Onthe Mirror tab in the Mirr
97. Click Finish to closethe ACD Database Import Wizard If you are importing database information sent to you by another ACDSee 14 user ensure that the images to which the 27 information applies are in an identical location and folder structure on your hard drive Importing file information from other sources You can import file information into your database from other sources including ACDSee Photo Discs and files from previous versions of ACDSee Importing Photo Discs Previous versions of ACDSee versions 4 0 and 5 0 created separate database files with a ddf file extension for Photo Discs You can import the Photo Disc database files into your ACDSee 14 database To import a Photo Disc 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Import and then select Photo Disc 2 Inthe Open dialog box locate and select the photo disc file you want to import 3 ClickOpen To import the information from Photo Discs created with ACDSee 6 0 or later you must convert and import the entire _ database Importing albums In previous versions of ACDSee you could create albums in an ais file format that consisted of organized shortcuts to your images Now you can use categories to create albums of images that do not require a separate file extension You can however import your albums from previous versions of ACDSee and add the information from the albums to the database ACDSee 14 creates a new category for each album you import To import
98. Close Customizing the Editing Tools pane You can resize move and dock the Editing Tools pane in Edit mode to suit your preferences To customize the Editing Tools pane 1 In Edit mode drag the Editing Tools pane s title bar to a new location If you drag the Editing Tools pane to either the left or right side of the window it will dock against that side 2 Toresize the Editing Tools pane drag one of its edges Configuring external editors You can configure ACDSee 14 to work with a variety of image editors such as Canvas and specify which image editor ACDSee 14 uses by default You can then open images in any of your external editing applications from within ACDSee 14 200 Chapter 7 Options and configuration r You must configure an external editor before you can assign a shortcut key to it or place it as a button on the toolbar To configure an external editor in ACDSee 14 1 In Manage mode click Tools External Editors Configure Editors In the Configure Photo Editors dialog box click Add Browseto the folder on your hard drive that contains an image editing application 2 3 4 Selectthe executable file of the editing application For example Canvas12 exe 5 Click Open 6 In the Name field type a name for the editor and then click OK To create a shortcut to an external editor 1 Clickthe Toolbar drop down arrow to the right of the External Editors menu item and select Add or Remove Buttons Cust
99. Close All Groups To display a preview of the images in a closed group Hover your cursor over the group header To scroll through multiple groups Clickthe Next Group and Previous Group buttons at the bottom of the File List scroll bar To display the table of contents Do one of the following Click View Group By Table of Contents Clickthe Group drop down list and select Table of Contents Atthe bottom of the File List scroll bar click the Table of Contents button To quickly jump to a specific group 1 Display the table of contents 2 Clickthe group that you want to display To change the sort order of the groups Do one of the following Click View Group By and select either Group Forward or Group Backward Click the Group drop down and select either Group Forward or Group Backward Removing groups from the File List To remove a group 35 ACDSee 14 User Guide Do one of the following Click View Group By None Clickthe Group drop down list and select None Selecting files in one or more groups To select files in groups Do one of the following Clickthe group header to select all of the files in that group Press and hold the CTRL key and click two or more group headers to select all of the files in those groups Sorting files In Manage mode you can sort your files according to different file properties to quickly organize your images find specific files and cr
100. Dauber tab set the options as described below ene TO Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Dauber options Intensity Specifies the amount of color applied with each daub Frequency Specifies the number of daubs added to the image Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the paint daubs When you apply the Dauber effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the daubs randomly This makes the paint daubs different every time you apply the filter You can define a specific random seed to generate identical daubs To generate a new random seed click Random Seed Applying an Edge Detect effect You can use the Edge Detect effect to create a highlighted outline of your image After creating a black image the effect uses colored lines to outline the detail of an image where significant color differences exist Greater differences between colors in the original image produce brighter outline colors The Sobel effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect but produces sharper and brighter outlines 143 ACDSee 14 User Guide To use the Edge Detect effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Edge Detect 3 Doone of
101. Display the Selective Browsing pane by clicking View Selective Browsing then select the Calendar pane and selectthe appropriate date Only the images taken with that camera model on that day will be displayed Finding duplicate files You can usethe Duplicate Finder plug in to search for duplicate files on your hard drive Once you locate any duplicates you can rename or delete them to better manage your file collection The following steps are a basic overview of how to use the Duplicate Finder There is also extensive context sensitive Help in the plug in dialog box to provide you with additional information Y Limit your search by selecting only a portion of the photos or images in a folder To find duplicate files 1 In Manage mode select a folder or images to search for duplicates 2 Click Tools Find Duplicates 65 ACDSee 14 User Guide 3 Inthe Duplicate Finder dialog box on the Select Search Type page add any other files and folders you want to search 4 Dooneof the following Tofind duplicates within the files and folders you added to the list select Find duplicates within this list of files Tocompare files between the list you created and another group of files select Find duplicates between these files and another list 5 Click Next 6 If you are comparing the files with another list add the files or folders you want to compare to the second list and then click Next 7 Onthe Search Parameters page
102. E EN AT SERERE i gue da EEE ISEH REEE ARSE is 214 CHAPTER 9 FILE FORMATS aaa aana anaana n anaoa an0a o aoaaa eee 217 Supported File ForMatS sssicrosses anantonia aE A E A a a a A aA EIN S 217 Image Formats rt a a ii ss 217 A AAA A e esl oe ete eee ane as See ence canes none ae ne Ee 217 Video And Audio Formats e esousucus port tt tcs cc a 217 AD OUTIRAW FIlES 2272 etch Bh alee tots llss ri o i 221 Supported RAW FOnmMats 226 5022 54320580524 5ece Gn ebeGeeeoe A ns coeceeke risotto cebo bocce 222 Registering And Associating Files 222 FOFMICROS O XP o orar arre For Microsoft Windows Vista Or WIN OWS Zi A a ts 222 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS o ccc cece eee eee been eee eee ee eee eee eee eens 225 GLOSSARY ocioso ti Hester ad Sth tt ee eres ett ced deat ts ace a 227 TNDEX AAA 237 xiii Chapter 1 Getting started Chapter 1 Getting started Welcome to ACDSee 14 Welcome to ACDSee 14 and congratulations on choosing the industry leading digital photo management software ACDSee 14 is the essential application for importing organizing viewing enhancing and sharing your digital photos and other media files ACDSee 14 imports photos from your camera to your computer categorizes and rates your files and manages photo collections of any size from a few hundred to a few hundred thousand Choose to view thumbnail previews of any size or use a detailed list of file properties to sort your files Can t find a particular photo No problem
103. HIFT 2 CTRL SHIFT 3 CTRL SHIFT 4 CTRL SHIFT 5 CTRL SHIFT 6 CTRL SHIFT 7 DELETE E END ENTER ESC E F1 F2 F5 HOME INSERT 210 Resulting action Opens the Batch Adjust Time Stamp dialog box Pastes the contents of the Clipboard Returns to Manage mode Cuts the current item to the Clipboard Rotates the current image 90 counterclockwise Rotates the current image 90 clockwise Opens the previous image Sets the selected image as a stretched desktop wallpaper Opens the current image in the default external editor Opens the Windows Explorer context menu Opens or closes the Magnifying Glass Displays or hides the status bar Copies the currently displayed image to the Clipboard Toggles full screen mode Closes all images Opens or closes the Histogram pane Prints all currently selected images or all images in the current folder Opens the Edit Header Footer dialog box in which you can specify the text t mode Opens or closes the Navigator pane Displays or hides the Bottom toolbar Sets the selected image as a tiled desktop wallpaper Sets the selected image as a centered desktop wallpaper Changes the image color depth to Black and White Changes the image color depth to 16 grays Changes the image color depth to 256 grays Changes the image color depth to 16 colors Changes the image color depth to 256 colors Changes the image color depth to Hicolor Changes th
104. IN You can preview theimages you wantto download and specify a location for them on your hard drive 25 ACDSee 14 User Guide To use the Get Photos Wizard your scanner needs to use Windows Imaging Acquisition or TWAIN If you are not sure how your scanner connects to your computer see About removable devices To download photos from a scanner 1 Connect your scanner to your computer Make sure your scanner is turned on and the cableis properly connected to your computer In Manage mode click File Import From Scanner On the Source Device page in the Device list select the specific name of the scanner from which to download your files Click Next when you are ready to continue On the File Format Options page select the following options Documents to scan If you want to scan a single document do not make any selections in this section If you want to scan more than one document select the Scan multiple documents check box and then choose whether to create an imagefor each document or a single image for all the scanned documents Output file format Select a file format to save your images You can click the Settings button to select any file specific options available for your chosen format Note that not every file format has additional settings Click Next when you are ready to continue Finally on the Output Options page specify whether you want to rename your imported images using a name template and
105. Picker dialog box click Edit List Select the keyword you want to remove from the Value list 57 ACDSee 14 User Guide 9 To select more than one keyword press and hold the CTRL key while selecting the keywords 7 ClickRemove 8 ClickOK 9 ClickOK Only keywords that are notin use can be removed from the list To find photos associated with a keyword click the keyword listed under Photo Properties in the Auto Categories list of the Organize pane Changing the date and time properties of images You can usethe Batch Adjust Time Stamp tool to change the date and time properties of one or more images in Manage mode or in View mode To change the date and time properties of a file 1 Doone of the following In Manage mode select one or more images and then click Tools Batch Adjust Time Stamp In View mode click Tools Modify Adjust Image Time Stamp 2 On the Date to Changetab choose from the following Date to Change EXIF date and time igi i i EXIF date time original The original date time the image was captured The date time the image was converted to EXIF date time digitized a digital image usually the same as original EXIF date time The date time the image was lasted edited File last modified date and time The date time the image or file was lasted edited for example image editing or updates to metadata File creation date and time The original date time the file was created ACDSee database dat
106. Presets drop down list To use a previously saved preset 1 Under the Edit tab select the tool for which you created the preset 2 Clickthe Presets drop down list and select the preset you want to apply To delete a preset 1 Under the Edit tab select the tool for which you created the preset Click the Presets drop down list and select the preset you want to delete Click the Delete button E ws In the Confirm Delete dialog box click Yes Using the undo redo button You can undoand redo your changes when editing an image To undo a change In Edit mode do one of the following Clickthe Undo button Usethe keyboard shortcut CTRL Z To redo a change In Edit mode do one of the following Click the Redo button Usethe keyboard shortcut CTRL Y Restoring originals If you have committed changes to an image you cannot restore the original 1 You can discard all your changes and revert to the original image To revert an image back to the original in Edit mode 121 ACDSee14 User Guide In Edit mode select File Restore to Original To revert an image back to the original in Manage or View mode 1 Selectthe image 2 Select Tools Restore to Original Using blend modes and opacity When using a tool in Edit at the top thereis a blend mode and opacity tools These tools give you creative control and let you combine the two to create a new image You can apply blend modes and o
107. RVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Xalan and Xerces libraries are licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License You may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License U S Government Restricted Rights The Software is provided with Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Chilkat Software Inc 1719 E Forest Ave Wheaton Illinois 60187 USA This Software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group TIFF support based on LibTIFF Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Le
108. Reduction Repair Tool Selections 122 Chapter 5 Edit mode Previewing changes to images You can usethe Preview bar to see how the changes you are making affect your image The Preview bar shows you the last loaded image in Edit and the image after your changes You can pan either image in the Preview bar by dragging it within its pane and drag the edges or corners of the Preview bar to resize it P You can access the Preview bar by clicking on the Preview button a You can usethe Preview bar with the following tools Add Vignette Special Effect Geometry Rotate Flip Exposure Lighting Exposure Levels Auto Levels Tone Curves Lighting Color White Balance Color Balance Detail Sharpen Noise To open the Preview bar 1 In Edit mode open an editing tool 2 Clickthe Preview button The Preview bar displays the original version of your imagein the top pane and the edited version of your image in the bottom pane with an image viewing toolbar between the two P You can also click the Show Saved button to toggle your changes on and off Pixel resize options and resulting action You can reduce and enlarge the size of one or more images from Manage mode by entering a new dimension in pixels For more information on how to resize an image using pixel dimensions please see Resizing an image or Resizing multiple images 9 Enlarging an image tends to pixelate the image reducing image quality It is best to avoid enl
109. See 14 Select this option to browse the files in ACDSee 14 You can then choose to import the files or simply copy and paste the files from the device Import pictures and videos using Windows Select this option if you prefer to use Windows to import the files Depending on the other applications installed on your computer there may be additional options Importing files using the ACDSee Device Detector If you have turned on the ACDSee Device Detector ACDSee 14 prompts you to choose one of the following Import files with ACDSee Select this option and click OK to open the Import dialog box You can then select settings to rename backup and place the files You can save your import settings and give them a name so that you can re use them later You can also create advanced settings for import dates and RAW JPEG options if your camera takes both file formats You can also create a file renaming template to use with specific kinds of files or projects Do nothing Select this option and click OK if you don t want to import photos using ACDSee 14 or if you want to simply copy and paste the photos from the device using ACDSee 14 Save setting and do not prompt again in the future If you select this option any choices you make in this dialog box are set permanently unless you later open the Device Detector fromthe Task bar and change the options For example if you select Do nothing and also select the Save Settings option it closes
110. To Multiple Files ooo 56 Removing IPTC Keywords From Auto Categories 57 Changing The Date And Time Properties Of Images 58 Backing Up Your Files To Another Computer e eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee cece eee e eee ees 59 EL A A NR 60 Searching With ACDSee ai 60 Using The Quick Search Bar eee ee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee cece eee eee ee eeee 60 Using The Search Panes soccer ce dee e E EEEE e berri cetro as danesa 61 Searching With File Name Patterns ee cee cee eee eee eee ee cee eee eee e cece ee eeee 63 Using Selective Browse 63 Searching With Auto Categories ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee cee eee eee e eens 64 FindiNd Duplicate Files acosada leet fe ote ee e eee msi sted aia das cla 65 Finding Images OU C V bi 66 Publishing And Sharing 2 2 222225ccc0225 sa cocseien rera pii a a eri 66 Sharing Files With ACDSee 14 0 0020 ccc ee ee cee eee ee cee cee eee eee cece eee eeees 66 Taking A Screen Capture coccion it n Seka See a a ic 67 Emallind Images daa ec te oe ee A taa al ge sees 68 Creating A Desktop Sereensaver 2 22 22 2 eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee ne eee eee eee ence eee eee eee 68 Viewing And Configuring A Slideshow 70 Sharing Slideshows And Screensavers 22 22 ce ee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee cece eee e ee eee nnn 73 Creating A Desktop Slid Show c2cccice ceevewsa comin dare a reve su eed dia 74 CheaulnGrA RD Fifa sce ot ae Pere ah oak a a tees seems dos 75 Creating A PowerPoint Pres
111. User Guide If your camera connects to the computer as a removable drive you can also simply copy photos directly from the File List _ and Folders pane because ACDSee 14 detects and displays the removable device in the Folders pane If you are not sure how your camera connects to your computer please see About removable devices in Importing files with ACDSee 14 Some cameras for example Canon use Windows Image Acquisition WIA to communicate with a computer Some __ scanners use TWAIN to connect to a computer If your devices use these protocols you can import by clicking From Device or From Scanner on the File Import menu ACDSee 14 automatically detects these protocols To download photos using the Import From dialog box 1 Connect your camera or device to the computer Make sure your camera is turned on and the cableis properly connected to your computer 2 Dooneof the following Ifthe Windows AutoPlay dialog box opens select Import pictures using ACDSee 14 If the Device Detector is on and detects the device when the ACDSee Device Detector dialog box opens select Import files and then click OK If you have more than one device connected to your computer select the device you want to use from the list and then click OK In Manage mode click File Import From Device Press ALT G on the keyboard 3 Inthe Import From dialog box select from the import options as described below 4 Click Import 5
112. View mode title and status bars Automatically sharpens the view for images zoomed in at less than 100 Setting the Display options You can use the Options dialog box to changethe window background and specify how images are zoomed To set the Display options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click View Mode Display 3 On the Display options page set or change the options described below 4 Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee 14 194 Display options Zoom options Default zoom mode Reset zoom mode to default on every image change Resize Pan tool Enable click zooming Pan speed Slow Fast Background Default color Custom color Tiled image Chapter 7 Options and configuration Specifies the default zoom level for images in View mode Resets the zoom mode to the selected default when the displayed image changes Resizes the image based on the selected option For more information about how these choices affect the Viewer see Automatically shrinking or enlarging images Deselect to turn off the one click image toggle between Default view and Actual Size view Specifies the speed when panning an image Uses the default ACDSee 14 color for the background in View and Edit mode Specifies a color to use as the background in View and Edit mode Uses a tiled image as the background for Develop and Edit mode Click Browse to locate an image on your h
113. Window effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickBathroom Window 3 Dragthe Bar width slider to set thethickness of the bars Thinner bars result in a more distorted image 4 IntheBar direction area select one of the following to specify the orientation of the bars in your image Vertical Horizontal 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Blinds effect You can usethe Blinds effect to divide your image into bars that look like venetian or vertical window blinds You can select or changethe Blinds options to add blinds to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Blinds effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Blinds 3 Onthe Blinds tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Blinds options Blind width Specifies the width of the blinds Type anumber from 1 to 1000 or drag the slider to adjust the width of each blind As the value increases the width of the blind alsoincreases Blind opacity Specifies the opacity of the blinds Type anumber from 1 to 99 or drag the slider to adjust the opacity of the blinds The higher the opacity the more the image is obscured Angle Spe
114. a o rr ii traia 90 About The ACDSee 14 Database 22 05 tt ii it debe es 90 Excluding Folders From The Database oocuoooccconipoacccocor rr is 92 Cataloging Files In The Database 0 2 ce ee cee eee eee ee ee eee eee cence eee eeees 92 Converting An Older Database 2 222 022 cc ce ee ee cee eee eee cece eee cece eee ence ee 93 Importing Databas eInformattONs 2 22 eee ee eres vol oaks ta tia ss 93 Importing File Information From Other Sources 94 Exporting Database Informationy c o lt otr A a ose 95 Generating File LiStS cocine 95 Backing Up Your Database 0 02 ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee cece eee ee nennen 96 Database Backup Tips And Strategies ee ee eee eee ee oorr naroroon oenn 97 Restoring Database Information From A Backup 2 2222 e cece ee eee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee e eee eee eeee 97 Maintaining The Database 2 24 ovcetendse A A de AEREE S 97 Optimizing The Database __ _ 2 22 ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee iE ii 98 Rebuilding Thumbnails And Metadata 99 SEA boa ckeieae Se sen added E E TE E a EEE 99 PIG UNS oe co ete AI ee a aioe a see een A IAS 99 WOKING WIP a eae 99 ManaginGtPlug ins 22 225 4 04 rn det dhe ee aa ira caia acces 100 Viewing Plug in Properties And Getting Help 0 202222 eee eee eee 100 CHAPTER 4 VIEW MODE 0 0 o ollie ccc cee cee cee cee eee eee eee aaan 103 Working With Images In View Mode 2 222 2 2 e eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee e
115. accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Sheet Metal options Rounding Specifies the amount of curve in the edges of the impressions Detail Specifies the amount of detail in the impression Angle Specifies the angle of the grain in the sheet metal Metal color Specifies the color of the sheet metal Direction Specifies the direction in which the sheet metal was manipulated Select one of the following Indented Stamps the metal from the top side of the image Pushed out Stamps the metal from underneath the image 153 ACDSee 14 User Guide Applying a Shift effect You can usethe Shift effect to divide your images into bars and shift them in random directions You can save your options as a presetfor future use To apply a Shift effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickShift 3 OntheShift tab set the options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Shift options Strength Specifies the amount of shift between the bars Width Specifies the width of each bar Angle Specifies the angle of the bars Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Applying a Slant eff
116. account and modify your account settings In Transfer the screen splits into two The bottom part of the screen displays the images in your computer and the top part of the screen displays your ACDSeeOnline com account You can simply click and drag images in your computer displayed in the bottom part of the screen and drag them into the top part of the screen to upload the images to your ACDSeeOnline com account 12 Chapter 1 Getting started You cannot take an image from Online mode and open it in Edit mode To edit an image select an image in Manage or View _ mode and open it in Edit mode Uploading images To upload photos to your ACDSeeOnline com account 1 In Online mode click Login 2 Login to your account 3 Click Transfer Your screen splits in two with the bottom part of the screen displaying images in your computer 4 Selectan image to upload To select multiple photos press the SHIFT or the CTRL key 5 Clickand drag the image into the top part of the screen to upload it to your ACDSeeOnline com account a is no upload size limit when uploading your images to your ACDSeeOnline com account 13 Chapter 2 Getting help Chapter 2 Getting help Using ACDSee 14 Help There are two levels to the help system The main help system that contains detailed instructions about every aspect of the application Context sensitive Help that opens from inside a dialog box or wizard in ACDSee 14and gives you specific inf
117. act any device that your computer can map to When you connect a removable drive or to a network disk or another computer ACDSee 14 sees itas a removable drive and you can browse to it and around it using the Folders pane You can just copy and paste the files into ACDSee 14 If the files in the disk or drive have a complex folder structure or you want to organize rename and back up the files as you import them it is worth using the Import From dialog box which has import settings do all of these tasks simultaneously To import photos from a disk 1 Connectthe disk tothe computer 2 Dooneof the following Ifthe Windows AutoPlay dialog box opens select Import pictures using ACDSee 14 Ifthe Device Detector is on and detects the disk when the ACDSee Device Detector dialog box opens select Import files and then click OK If you have more than one disk or drive connected to your computer select the device you want to use and then click OK In Manage mode click File Import From Disk 3 IntheBrowse for Folder dialog box navigate to the removable drive or device in the folder tree and then click OK 4 Inthe Import From dialog box select the options you want to use and then click Import 5 Tobrowse your imported photos click Yes when the Import Complete dialog box displays Importing photos from a scanner The Get Photos Wizard guides you through the process of downloading files from your scanner if it uses TWA
118. adata to Display dialog box Click the plus signs to expand the tree and select your preferences egy he ie I Click OK 8 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 9 You can also click the Metadata View drop down listin the Properties pane Metadata tab and select Manage Metadata Views Setting the File Management options You can specify how ACDSee 14 handles renaming and deleting files and folders and whether ACDSee 14 sends deleted files to the desktop Recycle Bin by default To set the File Management options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click File Management 3 Onthe File Management page set or change any of the options as described below 4 Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee 14 191 ACDSee 14 User Guide File Management options Confirmations Confirm folder delete Confirm file delete Confirm read only rename and delete Overwriting duplicate Ask Prompts you for confirmation when deleting folders Prompts you for confirmation when deleting files Prompts you for confirmation when renaming or deleting read only items Prompts you for confirmation when overwriting duplicate files files Rename Automatically resolves any naming conflicts when moving or copying files by renaming the source files In the Separator character field type a character to use to separate file names in the automatic renaming system Replace Automatically
119. ademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation and or its subsidiaries in Canada the United States and or other countries DirectX Internet Explorer Microsoft Windows Windows logo Windows Media Windows Vista and Windows Vista Start button are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other marks products and company names are the property of their respective owners Third Party Software Licenses This Software also contains software of ACD Systems and its suppliers which are used in accordance with the notices reproduced below This Software contains Method and System for Calendar Based Image Asset Organization Patent No US 7 398 479 B2 This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated More information may be found at http www adobe com products dng main html All rights reserved XMP Toolkit 4 1 1 is copyright 1999 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SE
120. ag the slider to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease the image s brightness Red Adjusts the red channel in the image Drag the slider to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease the red tonein your image Green Adjusts the green channel in the image Drag the slider to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease the green tone in your image Blue Adjusts the blue channel in the image Drag the slider to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease the blue tone in your image Using the Histogram The Histogram displays a graphical representation of the distribution of intensity levels of pixels for each color channel in an image To display and use the Histogram 1 In View mode click View Histogram 2 Onthe Histogram select or clear the following check boxes R Shows or hides the red color channel G Shows or hides the green color channel B Shows or hides the blue color channel L Shows or hides the lightness of the image Changing image color depth You can modify an image s color depth in View mode Color depth refers to the range of colors an image contains To change the color depth of an image In View mode click Tools Modify Change Color Depth and select one of the options described below 169 ACDSee 14 User Guide Color depth options Black and White Two color black and white palette 16 Grays 16 color grayscale palette 256 Grays 256 color gr
121. age When an image is larger than the ACDSee 14 window and you use the Scroll tool the cursor changes to a hand To pan an image Do one of the following Drag the image to center the area you want to view Press an arrow key You can hold the CTRL key to pan quickly or hold the SHIFT key to pan more slowly Using Pan Lock You can use the Pan Lock setting to automatically center the same area of a series of larger images in View mode To use Pan Lock 1 In View mode pan over a large image to a specific area you want to view 2 Using the Zoom menu zoom in on the image until you reach the magnification you want to use for all of your images 3 Click Tools Zoom Zoom Lock to keep the current zoom level 4 Click Tools Zoom Pan Lock As you move through your images each one will be automatically zoomed and panned to the same area Magnifying specific areas of an image You can view specific areas of an image at a higher magnification in the Magnifying Glass pane To use the Magnifying Glass pane 1 In View mode click View Magnifying Glass 2 Movethe cursor over an area of the image to view that areain the Magnifying Glass pane 3 Changethe Magnifying Glass pane settings by doing any of the following Movethe slider at the bottom of the Magnifying Glass pane to increase or decrease the magnification Select the Fixed check box to apply the slider setting to the original size of the image Clear the Fixed check box to
122. all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Cropping an image You can usethe Crop tool to remove unwanted parts of your images or to reduce the image canvas to a particular size You can also save your options as a presetfor future use To crop an image 1 In Edit mode in the Geometry group click Crop 2 Resizethe crop window and position it over the area of the image you want to keep 3 Todarken the parts of the image outside the crop window drag the Darken outside crop area slider to the left Drag the slider to the right to lighten the area outside the crop window 4 Click Estimate new file size to view how big your image file is after cropping 162 Chapter 5 Edit mode 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to crop the image and close the tool Click Cancel to exit the tool without cropping the image Resizing the crop window You can resize the crop window in three ways Drag the edges of the crop window to the desired size Specify an exact size for the crop window in pixels inches centimeters or millimeters Applya ratioto constrain the crop window proportions To resize the crop window by dragging 1 Position your cursor over the edgeor corner of the crop window until it changes into a double pointed arrow 2 Drag the crop window s border to the desired size To specify an exact s
123. ample of how renaming template will look Skips the renaming of video and audio files during the rename process Browsing files in the File List pane The File List pane is the large pane in the center of the Manage mode window The File List pane displays the contents of the currently selected folder the results of your latest search or the files and folders that match your selective browsing criteria The File List pane is always visible and cannot be hidden or closed 27 ACDSee 14 User Guide Files display as thumbnails in the File List pane by default However you can change the File List pane view from thumbnails to details list icons tiles or filmstrip You can sort your files according to name size image properties and more You can also use filters to control which files display in the File List pane Using the File List pane There are three sections in the File List pane the Contents bar the File List drop down lists and the File List toolbar The overlay icons which appear on thethumbnails allow you to rate tag and label your images and indicate additional information such as if the file has been processed or geotagged The contents bar The Contents bar is located at the top of the File List pane and describes what you are currently browsing When you are using the Folders pane the Contents bar will display the path or paths to the folders you are browsing as in the following example go OO If you are bro
124. an reproduce Device dependent color spaces are used to map colors between devices for example from a monitor to a printer to ensure that colors are reproduced accurately compression 229 ACDSee 14 User Guide Process that converts data to a storage format requiring less space than the original data contact sheet Physical or digital page that contains a series of small images usually in a grid format contrast Measure of an image s color and brightness differences convert Change a file from one format to another For example you might convert a file from a bitmap bmp to a JPEG jpg to reduce the file size cropping Removing unwanted image areas D database Electronic filing system that provides fast access to stored data The ACD Systems Database contains two parts a cached thumbnail file and an information file The cached thumbnail file contains small copies thumbnails of the images on your system The information file contains details about the files on your system such as descriptions dates authors notes keywords and categories database date Date that you apply to the properties of a file and save in the ACD Systems Database descriptions ACDSee 14 stores descriptions in a hidden file named descript ion Descriptions such as file name and captions for an image will be included in the descript ion files dock Attaching a toolbar window or paneto different screen areas DPI dots per inc
125. anage or View mode and open it in Edit mode for editing Creating an ACDSeeOnline com account Before you can upload your images to ACDSeeOnline com you need to create an account To create an ACDSeeOnline com account 1 Clickthe Online tab to enter Online mode 2 IntheACDSee 14 dialog box enter your information and click Create your account P If you already have an account click the Have an account Log in button Uploading images to ACDSeeOnline com P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline com tab then click Help ACDSeeOnline com is an image sharing and storage service for ACDSee 14 users You need to create an ACDSeeOnline com account first before uploading your photos There is no size limit for uploading images to your ACDSeeOnline com account To upload your images 1 In Online mode click Login 2 Login to your account 3 Click Upload to switch to Transfer Your screen splits in two with the bottom part of the screen displaying images on your computer and the top part of the screen representing your images online 176 Chapter 6 Online mode Usethe drop down list in the top right corner to select one of the following La Upload Original with associated data Upload images in current file format including any associated files such as those containing metadata This option is the bestfor images you want to archive Upload Original as JPG Uploads image as a JPG in it s original size Up
126. anager z Cancelan upload or download Retry the image upload or download A Pause an upload or a download Continue the image upload or download Selects all images in the list Om y Clear uploaded downloaded or canceled images fromthe list 180 Chapter 7 Options and configuration Chapter 7 Options and configuration Setting options Setting the General options You can adjust settings in the Options dialog box to display helpful tips set the format for date displays set automatic rotate options and control the display of certain image types To access the General options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click General 3 On the General page set or change any of the options described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 General options Enable gamma correction Applies the specified amount of gamma correction when viewing or previewing images Show screen capture help Displays the Help Tips dialog box when using the screen capture tool tips Automatically stretch Stretches small images to fit the entire desktop when you set them as your wallpaper wallpaper to fit screen Disable image animation Displays only the first frame of an animated imagein Manage mode s Preview pane and in View mode Automatically rotate JPEG Automatically corrects the orientation of TIFF and JPEG images based on their EXIF data when and TIFF images based on disp
127. and then Cat Dog returns all items that contain displays only those items that don t also contain the second search Cat except those that also contain Dog term Be sure to insert a space before the minus sign If you do not insert a space ACDSee 14 will assume you are searching for a hyphenated word Searches for all items containing both the search term before and Cat Dog or Cat Dog returns items after the operator Those items that only contain one of the terms containing both Cat and Dog are excluded The Quick Search bar treats spaces between words Cat Dog Kittens returns items that as operators include both Cat and Dog but notthose thatinclude Cat and Dog and Kittens Searches for all items containing one or the other of the search Cat Dog includes all items with either elements Cat or Dog in the search Cat Dog Kittens includes items that contain both Cat and Dog and those that contain Kittens Using the Search pane You can use the Search pane to search for your files and folders You can do basic searching by file name or keyword phrase and create advanced searches to narrow your results by folders categories and image properties You can also search for patterns in file names and find duplicate files You can also save a search and giveit a name Saved searches are listed on the Search pane and the Organize pane On the Search pane can select Saved searches from the drop down list to run again On the Orga
128. ard drive gy background color and tiled image options do not affect full screen mode Y change the background color in ACDSee Quick View open an image in Quick View and then click Tools Options Setting the Edit mode options You can use the Options dialog box to show icons in Edit mode To show icons in the Edit pane 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Edit Mode 3 OntheEdit Mode page select Show icons in Edit pane 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee Setting the ACDSee Online options You can usethe Options dialog box to set options for ACDSee Online such as the temporary folder location and what to do with uploads and downloads when you close ACDSee 14 To set the ACDSee Online options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click ACDSee Online 3 OntheACDSee Online page set or change any of the options described below 4 Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee 14 195 ACDSee 14 User Guide ACDSee Online options Folder locations Uploads Downloads Ratings Temporary folder On shutdown always pause all transfers On startup always automatically resume all paused transfers Number of concurrent uploads 1 10 Number of concurrent downloads 1 10 Convert Rating 1 to 5 stars Convert Rating 1 to 1 star Setting the ACDSee Showroom options Clickthe Browse button to
129. area you want to set as the white point When you click around the image with a selected eye dropper you will see the RGB numbers changing to reflect the RGB J values of the pixel under the eye dropper The RGB values represent the source pixel unprocessed and the current pixel as it appears on the screen Adjusting levels automatically You can use the Auto Levels tool to automatically correct the exposure levels of your images Auto Levels makes the darkest image pixels darker and the brightest pixels brighter You can save your options as a preset for future use To automatically correct an image s levels 1 In Edit mode in the Exposure Lighting group click Auto Levels 2 Select one of the following options Auto Contrast and Color Adjusts color differences brightness and balances RGB channels Auto Contrast Adjusts the color differences and brightness only Auto Color Balances the RGB channels in the image without changing the brightness or contrast 166 Chapter 5 Edit mode 3 Usethe Strength slider to fine tunethe amount of exposure you want to apply Click Exposure Warning to make overexposed and underexposed pixels visible Overexposed pixels turn red underexposed pixels turn green 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane P Click Reset to clear your changes and resetto default settings If you save
130. arger image collections you can use Selective Browsing to specify broad or narrow criteria for the images you want to display in the File List pane Using the Quick Search bar You can use the Quick Search bar in Manage mode to quickly locate files or folders You can use the Quick Search options or basic operators to refine or expand your search and view the results in the File List pane The Quick Search feature always searches the following IPTCfields Title Headline Description Keywords Creator City Location State Province Country and Instructions The Quick Search also searches Color labels and the ACDSee Metadata fields Caption Author Notes and Keywords When ACDSee 14 searches file names it only considers the first term in the file name For example a file called Cat_Dog _ would be found by searching for Cat but not for Dog Search terms are not case sensitive To run a Quick Search Do one of the following Inthe Quick Search bar type the term or part of a word for which you want to search Click the drop down list beside the Quick Search field and select a previously entered search term 60 Chapter 3 Manage mode Quick Search operators You can usethe following operators to further refine or expand your searches in the Quick Search bar Note that a search term cannot begin with an operator it must start with a word Operator Result Examples Searches for all items containing the first search term
131. arging images 123 ACDSee 14 User Guide Resize options Enlarge only Reduce only Enlarge or reduce Fit within options Width only Height only Width and height Width or height largest image Width only Height only Width and height Width or height largest image Width only Height only Width and height Width or height largest image Saving images in Edit mode Saving and canceling Action Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are larger than the image s original dimensions The width is increased to the specified value and the height is increased to maintain the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are larger than the image s original dimensions The height is increased to the specified value and the width is increased to maintain the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are larger than the image s original dimensions The width and height are increased as close tothe specified value as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are larger than the image s original dimensions The width or height is increased as closeto the specified value as possible to maximize the size of the image while maintaining the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are smaller than the image s original dimensions The width is decreased to the specified value and the height is decrea
132. as a toolbar located below it You can use this toolbar to adjust each image individually Chapter 3 Manage mode Swaps the selected image with the previous image in the Comparison List Swaps the selected image with the next image in the Comparison List Increases the magnification of the selected image Reduces the magnification of the selected image Opens a menu of zoom options Select from the following options Actual Size Displays the image at its original size Fit Image Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in the Compare Images Viewer Fit Width Displays the image to fit between the left and right sides of the Compare Images Viewer Fit Height Displays the image to fit between the top and bottom of the Compare Images Viewer Zoom Lock Displays all images at the zoom option of the current image If the zoom is adjusted the new zoom level is applied to all images that you view Zoom To Opens a dialog box where you can select a zoom option Locks the panned image area so that when you zoom and pan an image to a specific area the Compare Images Viewer displays the same area for all images you view Indicates pixels that may be over or underexposed Displays properties for each image in the Compare Images Viewer Click the Metadata Setup button to specify which file properties are displayed The Compare Images tool displays the file properties in a field below each image Differenc
133. ase Maintenance dialog box displays a list of the folders on your system and uses icons to indicate the status of database information within specific folders Database content icons E Folder contains files with cached thumbnails stored in the database ir Folder contains files that were changed without a database update For example a folder or file was renamed or moved outside of ACDSee 14 To perform database maintenance 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Database Maintenance 2 Inthe Database Maintenance dialog box browse for folders marked with the database content icons If there are no marked folders you do not need to perform database maintenance and can exit the Database Maintenance dialog box 3 Selecta folder and click one of the following buttons to identify the maintenance you want to perform on that folder Remove Thumbnails Removes all thumbnail information for the selected folder Remove All DB Info Deletes all database and thumbnail information for the selected folder Remove Orphan Folders Deletes any out of date or broken references to missing files or information for the selected folder Itis only possible to check for orphans in folders located on your computer This option will not be visible if the folder is located on a network Change Binding Changes all location references for the selected orphaned folder to another folder and retains all database information The default binding folder is M
134. ata included in digital photos This pane displays marked locations on a map for any file or folder you select in the File List pane You can usethe Map to view and markthe geographic location of your files While browsing through your files and folders you can place images in the Image Basket to hold them temporarily You can then edit print or share those images without moving them all into a single folder This pane provides the tools you need to group and organize files and then burn them to CDs and DVDs from within ACDSee 14 Manage mode drop down menus The drop down menus in Manage mode give you quick access to often used tasks The drop down menus include the following Import Where you can import photos from cameras and other devices Batch Where you can run all the batch editing processes Create Where you can create slide show files PDFs PowerPoint presentations CD DVDs online albums or archives Slideshow Where you can configure and run a slideshow Send Where you can upload to photo sites or an FTP site or send photos by email External Editors Where you can list external editors for easy access ACDSee 14 User Guide Working with Manage mode panes You can open and close panes in Manage mode to suit your preferences and move float or stack any of the panes to customize the layout of the Manage mode window To open or close panes in Manage mode Click View and select the pane you wan
135. atabase information Select from the following file types Image Includes imagefiles in the backup Media Includes audio and video files in the backup Archive Includes archive files in the backup All files of specified types on Backs up all specified files on your hard drive your local hard drives All files of specified types on Backs up all specified files on your hard drive and network drives local and network hard drives All files of specified typesin a Backs up all specified files in a specified folder Click the Browse button and select the folder folder to back up If your disc burner uses packet software to format re writable CDs and DVDs ACDSee 14 will not be able to burn your J backup to a disc Instead ACDSee 14 will recognize your burner as a hard drive which you can select on the Backup Location page 96 Chapter 3 Manage mode Database backup tips and strategies The ACDSee 14 database stores information about your files including EXIF information file name and folder location thumbnails categories rating and any other information you add using the Properties pane The more information you store in the database and the more time you spend entering that information the more important it is to back up your database and to have a good strategy for managing your backups Losing hours of work to a system crash or other uncontrollable event is something that should and can be avoided Backup schedule
136. ate WAV audio files Image files and their associated audio files contain the same file name and are located in the same folder You can associate any WAV file with an image file by giving them the same name and placing them in the same folder or by adding audio to the image If you move or rename either an image file or the audio file associated with it both files must be renamed and in the same 2 folder or they will no longer be associated This does not apply to images with embedded audio To add audio to an image 1 Doone of the following Selectan image in Manage mode Open an image in View mode Click Tools Image Audio Edit In the Edit Audio dialog box click the Browse button Selecta WAV file and click Save MAA O If you would like to truncate or clip the audio file select the Use markers check box and drag the Start marker and End marker sliders Do one of the following Click the Truncate button to remove the beginning and end of the audio file the sections outside of the start and end markers Click the Clip button to remove the section of the audio file inside the start and end markers 6 Tohear a preview of the file click the Play button 7 ClickOK Recording audio to an image You can record your own audio files and add them to your images When you add audio to a JPEG or TIFF image the audiois embedded in the image With other file formats the audio file is associated with the image the audio f
137. ates the selection tool Activates the zoom tool Displays the first page of the current multiple page image Pastes the contents of the Clipboard Opens the file using the system application associated with its file extension Displays the next page in a multiple page image Displays the previous page in a multiple page image Displays the next page in a multiple page image Activates the Select tool and zooms into the selected area Displays the next item in the slideshow Auto Advance or View sequence Displays or hides the Bottom toolbar Moves the focus of the Properties pane to the next field Opens the Set Zoom Level dialog box P Note Use the numeric keypad for the following View mode keyboard shortcuts asterisk minus plus forward slash ONU View mode mouse shortcuts Automatically zooms the image to fit within View mode window Decreases the magnification of the image zooms out Increases the magnification of the image zooms in Zooms the image to its actual size Displays the last item in the current folder Displays the next item Displays the previous item Displays the last item in the current folder You can usethe following mouse shortcuts while working in View mode y To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print 211 ACDSee 14 User Guide Shortcut Double click Right click Middle click Wheel click Wheel up Wheel down CTRL Right cli
138. ayscale palette 16 Colors 16 color palette 256 Colors 256 color palette GIF format uses 256 colors by default Hicolor 32 768 color palette Truecolor 16 777 216 color palette of all colors visible to humans You can use ACDSee 14 to convert an image to any of these color depths However to use certain image enhancement tools filters blends and adjustment options the image must be Hicolor or Truecolor To edit an image that is not originally Hicolor or Truecolor you can convert it edit the image and then convert it back to its original color depth Using the Color dialog box The Colors dialog box appears in several places in Edit when you select or apply a color You can use the Color dialog box to select a color in multiple ways and to adjust a color using several different tools Basic i E E a E a LLL LLL STE TT ie LLL LT EE CHENN Define Custom Colors gt gt The color grids In the top left corner thereis a fixed grid of Basic colors to choose from including gray black and white in the last three boxes Below it is a grid of Custom colors that you can fill in by creating a custom color and then clicking the Add to Custom Colors button The color palette and slider Beside the Basic colors is a color palette It contains all the colors of the spectrum from red through yellow green turquoise blue purple pink to red again The colors at the top of the palette are pure primary colors with increa
139. bar Located below the main viewing area the Bottom toolbar provides shortcut buttons to commonly used tools and commands such as the zoom and scroll tools You can customize the toolbar to use large or small icons or you can choose to not display the toolbar View area This is the main viewing area which displays the current image or media file You can customize the view and zoom in or out on your images and media files Filmstrip This is an area below the main viewing area which displays thumbnails of the images in the current folder or in the group of images you selected in Manage mode It provides a scroll bar along the bottom so that you can scroll through your images and buttons for moving to the next or previous image Status bar Located at the bottom of the window the Status bar displays information and properties for the current image or media file It also displays overlay icons for rating and tagging that you can click to edit View mode can also display the Properties pane to show EXIF IPTC and ACDSee metadata information about the image or file View mode also has the Navigator Magnifying Glass and Histogram panes each of which show detailed image information To open an image or media file in View mode In Manage mode in the File List pane do one of the following Selecta file and press Enter Selecta file and click the View mode button Double click a file Right click an image or media file and then
140. before opening the Slideshow Properties dialog box Always use these contents for Retains the current Slideshow contents setting and starts this selection type and start automatically the next time you launch the slideshow slideshow automatically Select transitions Displays a list of transitions for you to select and plays each transition variation or effect in the Preview as you select it Select all Selects all the transitions and displays them randomly Clear all Clears any selected transitions Thesetransitions do not work with the 2 up 4 up _ and Collage variations 71 ACDSee14 User Guide Variations Clickthe drop down list to select from the following None Uses no variations Pan and Zoom Zooms in and pans across each slide during the time it is displayed 2 up Displays twoimages ata time 4 up Displays four images at a time Collage Displays images as a collage where images overlap each other Effects Click the drop down list to select from the following None Uses no effects Black amp White Displays all images in grayscale Sepia Displays all images in sepia Vivid Increases the saturation of the images to make colors brighter Soft Blurs images slightly for a softening effect Background color Specifies the background color Click the color picker to select or change the color Click Other to set a custom color in the Color dialog Slide duration
141. box 5 Toautomatically update your database after converting select the Optimize database files after convert check box 6 Click Next 7 Onthe Summary page review your selections and then click Next to convert your database Importing database information You can use the ACD Database Import Wizard to import archived database information or to import database information that was sent to you with images from another ACDSee 14 user After you import the information ACDSee 14 associates it with the appropriate images If you have already added information to your current ACDSee 14 database it is recommended that you create a backup of 27 your database before converting an older ACDSee 14 database To use the ACD Database Import Wizard 93 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Import and then select Database 2 Click Next to start the wizard 3 On the Import Options page select the type of exported database information you want to import You can import image information from a compressed database version or information from an XML based text file 4 Clickthe Browse button to locate the database you want to import and then click OK 5 Selectthe Optimize database files after import check box to optimize the database after exiting the wizard and then click Next 6 OntheSummary page review your selections Click Back to make changes or click Next to begin importing the database information 7
142. cal axis and then rotates it clockwise 90 degrees P You can also use the Rotate tool in Edit mode to rotate an image using a custom angle of rotation Resizing multiple images You can resize a group of images by specifying their dimensions in pixels specifying a percentage of their original size or by constraining them to a physical print size To resize a group of images 1 Zi In Manage mode select one or more images and then click Tools Batch Resize In the Batch Resize Images dialog box select one of the following options Percentage of original Resizes the images to a percentage of their original size Size in pixels Resizes the images to a specific size in pixels Actual Print size Resizes the images to specific printed dimensions Set the options for your selection as explained in the table below Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images When you are satisfied with your choices click Start Resize a can alsoresize an image and use alternate resampling filters in Edit mode 87 ACDSee 14 User Guide Resize options Percentage of original Size in pixels Actual Print size Adjusting exposure for multiple images Percentage Apply to Width Height Resize Preserve original aspect ratio Fit within Units Width Height Resolution Preserve original aspect ratio Fit within Specifies how to resize the images Enter a percentage less than 100 to red
143. calendar to select all the photos in that month Click the name of the week to select all the photos in those weeks of the month Drag and select any days in the calendar to select all the photos in those days Edit mode keyboard shortcuts Usethe following keyboard shortcuts in Edit mode y To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print Shortcut Resulting action ALT ENTER Opens or closes the Properties pane CTRL Y Redo CTRL Z Undo CTRL E Opens the image in Edit mode CTRL SHIFT H Toggles the histogram to open and close in Edit mode PAGE UP Opens previous image PAGE DOWN Opens the next image 212 Chapter 8 Shortcuts Edit mode mouse shortcuts Usethe following mouse shortcuts in Edit mode to make quick image adjustments Y To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print Shortcut Resulting action SHIFT click Turns off the auto collapse feature in the pane as you open groups SHIFT wheel up or down Makes large adjustments to the sliders Right click Resets any slider to its default value Wheel up or down Makes fine adjustments to a slider Place your cursor over the slider and scroll up or down Online mode keyboard shortcuts Use the following keyboard shortcuts in the Transfer mode 9 To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print 213 ACDSee14 User Guide Shortcut ALT A ALT D ALT ENTER ALT Num ALT Nu
144. cally Explodes the pixels towards the top and bottom of the image Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the pixels When you apply the Pixel Explosion effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the pixels randomly This makes the pixels different every time you apply the filter You can definea specific random seed to generate identical pixel patterns To generate a new random seed click Random Seed Applying a Pixelate effect A pixel is the smallest piece of a digital image arranged in rows and columns When you reduce the resolution of your image the size of the pixel increases and produces blurring You can use the Pixelate effect to increase the size of the pixels in your image and save your options as a preset for future use To apply a Pixelate effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Pixelate 149 ACDSee 14 User Guide 3 OnthePixelate tab drag the Width and Height sliders to set the size of the pixels in your image Select the Square check box to make the width and height equal 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Posterize effect You can use the Posterize effect to reduce the number of brightness levels in your image You can select or change the Posterize options to apply this effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To appl
145. can also click on the arrow to automatically set itto where the blackpoint startin the image Specifies the midtones in an image Move the slider or type a number into the spin box to set the midtone Higher values make the image appear brighter while lower values make the image appear darker You can also click on the arrow to automatically set itto the midtone of the image Specifies the whitepoint of an image Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin box to define the whitest area of an image As the value increases the light colored areas of the image become lighter You can alsoclick on the arrow to automatically set it to where the highlights startin the image Select one of the following options Adjust Contrast Automatically analyzes and adjusts image contrast Adjust Color and Contrast Automatically analyzes and adjusts each color channel independently and then adjusts the contrast Adjust Color and Brightness Automatically analyzes and adjusts image color and brightness Tolerance Opens the Tolerance settings dialog box Specify the maximum clipping percentage for black and white levels and click OK ACDSee 14 adjusts the image levels automatically Click the Black Point picker and then click the image area you want to set as the black point Click the Mid Point picker and then click the image area you want to set as the mid point Click the White Point picker and then click the image
146. ce automatic zooming customizing displaying text fullscreen mode histogram keyboard shortcuts magnifying glass mouse shortcuts navigator panning setting display options setting zoom level synchronizing to a folder using zooming an image viewing file properties file types in the File List fullscreen images images in another application Index 157 170 18 25 121 18 77 110 109 103 115 193 104 10 169 208 117 211 116 117 194 115 105 114 113 34 10 107 245 ACDSee 14 User Guide text on images in View mode 104 Vignette effect 138 WwW wallpaper 108 Water Drops effect 158 Water effect 158 Waves effect 159 Weave effect 159 White Balance 168 wildcards 63 Wind effect 160 Z zooming automatically 115 setting level 115 246 Serial number acdsee 2006 2011 ACD Systems International Inc All Rights Reserved Worldwide
147. cept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 158 Chapter 5 Edit mode Water Drops options Density Specifies the number of water drops on the photo Drag the slider to the left to remove water drops Drag the slider tothe rightto add water drops Radius Specifies the size of the water drops Drag the slider to the left to make the water drops smaller Drag the slider to the right to make the water drops larger Height Specifies the height of the water drops above the photo surface Drag the slider to the left to reduce the height of the water drops and the distortion caused by the water drops Drag the slider to the right to increase the height of the water drops and the distortion caused by the water drops Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the water drops When you apply the Water Drops effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the water drops randomly This makes the effect different every time you apply the filter You can define a specific random seed to generate identical water drop patterns To generate a new random seed click Random Seed Applying a Waves effect You can use the Waves effect to display waves across the photo You can change the distance between waves This distance is called wavelength You can also change the height of the waves and the angle at which the waves cross the photo You can save your options as a preset for future use To apply a Wave
148. ces the image to fit within the View mode area Edit mode is where you can apply changes to the image You can edit the overall look of your image by changing the lighting and color or you can crop flip resize or rotate your image You can also use selections to fix specific parts of the image And you can also add final touches to your image such as red eye removal borders and special effects 11 ACDSee 14 User Guide lt 4 r Show Saved C Sat a Bos Filmstrip In Edit mode you can Usethe Selection tool to select and apply edits toa specific part of the image Remove flaws or red eye Add text borders a vignette special effects or drawings Crop flip resize or rotate your images Adjustlighting using the exposure levels auto levels tone curves and lighting tools Adjustcolor using the White Balance or Color Balance tool Add details to your image using Sharpen Remove Noise Add Noise or Blur tools Using Online mode About Online mode You can use Online mode to upload your images to ACDSeeOnline com ACDSeeOnline com is an image sharing and storage service available to ACDSee 14 users With Online mode and ACDSeeOnline com you can upload and browse through your online images without having to launch an Internet browser Online mode has two parts ACDSeeOnline com and Transfer In ACDSeeOnline com you can browse through your images in your ACDSeeOnline com
149. ch pane Opens or closes the Calendar pane Opens or closes the Image Basket Selects all files in the current folder Shows or hides the status bar Copies the currently selected image to the Clipboard Clears your current selection Opens the current file in the default system application or opens a dialog box where you can selectan application Toggles the full screen view for the File List pane Inverts your current selection Opens or closes the Selective Browsing pane Toggles the main Manage mode menu Opens the file using the system application associated with its file extension Opens or closes the Preview pane Displays or hides the Manage mode Main toolbar Moves the focus of the Manage mode window between the currently displayed panes Sets the selected image as a tiled desktop wallpaper Sets the selected image as a centered desktop wallpaper Deletes the selected items to the Recycle Bin Opens the selected item in View mode Opens the ACDSee 14 Help file Renames one or more selected files Opens the Search pane Displays the Contents bar drop down list Refreshes Manage mode Changes the File Listto Thumbs Details view Changes the File List to Filmstrip view Changes the File Listto Thumbnails view 207 ACDSee 14 User Guide F9 F10 F11 F12 SHIFT DELETE SHIFT F5 SHIFT INSERT SHIFT TAB TAB Changes the File List to Tiles view Changes the File List to Icons view Changes th
150. ch you can create a folder structure and store photos and files of any type to be used on a computer Click the Format Options button to specify whether you want to include any ACDSee metadata associated with your files HTML Slideshow Creates a CD or DVD with a slideshow of any photos and media files copied to the disc The slideshow is setto start whenever the disc is placed in a CD or DVD drive on a computer in a browser An HTML Slideshow disc cannot contain multiple folders Click the Format Options button to specify the options for your slideshow HighMAT Disc Creates a HighMAT CD containing a slideshow of images that can be viewed on a HighMAT capable device A HighMAT disc contains a graphical interface to help viewers access your files but may alter your files or convert themto a different format Chapter 3 Manage mode MPV Disc Creates an MPV CD containing a slideshow of images that can be viewed on an MPV capable device An MPV disc contains a graphical interface to help viewers access your files but may alter your files or convert them toa different format 4 If you selected the Data Disc format you can use the left side of the Burn Basket to create a folder structure to organize the photos and files on the disc To create a new folder right click the name of a folder and select New Folder from the shortcut menu Type a name for the new folder and then press Enter 5 You can also drag an existing folder into either pane
151. change the folder where ACDSee 14 temporarily keeps files during uploads and downloads Pauses all transfers when you close ACDSee 14 Resumes all transfers when you reopen ACDSee 14 Selectthe number of files to be uploaded at the same time Selectthe number of files to be downloaded at the same time Converts a numeric rating of 1 to five stars Converts a numeric rating of 1 to one star You can customize the ACDSee Showroom desktop slideshow in a number of ways including changing the slide duration order and transition or changing the frame opacity size and frame style To customize the ACDSee Showroom desktop slideshow 1 Start ACDSee Showroom by doing one of the following In Manage mode click Tools Create ACDSee Showroom Click Start Programs ACD Systems ACDSee Showroom un A U N 196 Set or change the options as described below Click OK to apply your changes Right click anywhere in the ACDSee Showroom window and select Options Click Set As Default to use the currently selected options as the default for new Showroom windows ACDSee Showroom options Picture Folder Slide Showroom Window Run at startup Include subfolders Skip hidden folders Duration Order Transition Apply to all Opacity Size Frame Always on top Apply to all Chapter 7 Options and configuration Selectthis option if you want toinclude photos from subfolders in the slideshow S
152. cific zoom level in View mode To set a specific zoom level 1 ClickTools Zoom Zoom To 2 Inthe Zoom level area select one of the following Fit whole image Zooms the image to fit entirely within the window Fit width Zooms the image to fit the width of the window Fit height Zooms the image to fit the height of the window Specify Specifies a zoom percentage Type a number in the field or click the drop down list and select a zoom level 3 Tousethis setting as the default View mode zoom level select the Lock at this zoom level check box View mode displays all images based on the specified zoom level 4 Click OK If you select Fit whole image you can display the previous or next image by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your __ keyboard Automatically shrinking or enlarging images You can use the settings on the Display page of the Options dialog box to automatically enlarge or shrink images to fit the size of the ACDSee 14 window For information about how the combination of the choices affects the display of images see the Zoom mode and Resize results table below To automatically shrink or enlarge images 1 In Manage mode or View mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click View mode Display 115 ACDSee 14 User Guide 3 Inthe Zoom options area select one of the following options from the Default zoom mode drop down list Actual Size Keeps images at their original size
153. cifies the angle of the blinds Type anumber from 1 to 360 or drag the arrow to adjust the angle Blind color Specifies the color of the blinds Applying a Bulge effect You can use the Bulge effect to stretch or shrink areas of your images horizontally and vertically You can set the radius and position of the distortion and save the options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Bulge effect 140 Chapter 5 Edit mode 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Bulge On the Bulge tab setthe options as described below NS Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Bulge and Shrink options Horizontal position Specifies the center of the distortion along the horizontal axis A lower value moves the distortion towards the left side of the image while a higher value moves ittowards the right side of the image Vertical position Specifies the center of the distortion along the vertical axis Alower value moves the distortion towards the bottom of the image while a higher value moves it towards the top of the image Radius Specifies the radius of the distorted area A lower value decreases the radius of the distortion while a higher value increases the radius of the distortion Strength Specifies the strength of the distortion A negative value shrinks the center of the distortion while a higher value b
154. ck CTRL Wheel up CTRL Wheel down SHIFT Wheel up SHIFT Wheel down Resulting action Closes View mode and returns to the previous mode Opens the View mode shortcut menu Toggles full screen mode on 3 button mouse Toggles full screen mode Displays the previous item Displays the next item Opens the Windows Explorer context menu Increases the magnification of the image zooms in Decreases the magnification of theimage zooms out Displays the previous page of a multiple page image Displays the next page of a multiple page image Calendar pane shortcuts Once you are familiar with the basic calendar pane options consider using the following shortcuts Clickthe title bar on a year month or day table to display all available images for that year month or day Right click the title bar on a year month or day table to scroll through and select from adjacent years months or days In Year view double click any month to switch to Month view Or in Month view double click any date to switch to Day view In Month view click the letter indicating a day of the week to display all available images for that day of the week For example click F to select all Fridays in that month In Day view click AM or PM to select the first or second half of a day In Event view press and hold the CTRL key and click any month or day to display all available images for those months or days Clickon thetitle of any month
155. ck Special Effect 2 ClickPencil Drawing 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Pixel Explosion effect You can usethe Pixel Explosion effect to explode pixels from a center point in your images You can select or change the Pixel Explosion options to apply this effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To use the Pixel Explosion effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Pixel Explosion On the Pixel Explosion tab set the options as described below go ey 1 Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Pixel Explosion options Horizontal center Specifies the center point of the explosion on the horizontal axis A value of 500 places the explosion at the middle of the image Vertical center Specifies the center point of the explosion on the vertical axis A value of 500 places the explosion at the middle of the image Intensity Specifies the intensity of the explosion A higher value creates a larger more brilliant spread of the pixels in the image Explosion direction Specifies the direction of the explosion Select one or both of the following Explode horizontally Explodes the pixels towards the right and left sides of the image Explode verti
156. colors brighter Soft Blurs images slightly for a softening effect Specifies the background color Click the color picker to select or change the color Click Other to set a custom color in the Color dialog box Specifies how long you want the screensaver to display each image Select or clear the following options Play embedded audio Plays any audio clips embedded in the images Stretch images to fit screen Enlarges small images to fill the entire screen Select one of the following options to specify the order to display your images Forward Shuffle Displays a text caption at the top of each image Set the options to specify the text you want to display Displays a text caption at the bottom of each image Set the options to specify the text you want to display Alignment Specifies the alignment of the text captions Background color Specifies a background color for the caption text Text Specifies the text to display as a caption Font Opens the Font dialog box where you can select or change the font options for your text Insert Metadata Tag Inserts file specific information called metadata into the caption Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box and select the metadata you want to insert 69 ACDSee 14 User Guide Viewing and configuring a slideshow You can view a slideshow of images from Manage mode or from View mode You can also configure your slideshow to start automatically whenever you r
157. ct occurs You can specify a method of handling conflicts within the dialog and select not to display it again Select this option to change or adjust those settings the next time a separator conflict occurs Displays the IPTC Supplemental Categories dialog box when a separator conflict occurs You can specify a method of handling conflicts within the dialog and elect not to display it again Select this option to change or adjust those settings the next time a separator conflict occurs Setting the View mode options You can use the Options dialog box to adjust the behavior of View mode to suit your preferences and increase the speed with which images are displayed To set the View mode options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click View Mode 3 OntheView mode options page set or change any of the View mode options described below 4 Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee 14 193 ACDSee 14 User Guide View Mode options Decoding and caching Startup files Resampling algorithm Dropped files Always on top Full screen Hide mouse cursor in full screen Instant image preview Use ACDSee Quick View Exit after delete move View all images in folder Show full image file path Sharpen subsampled images Decode next image in advance Keep previous image in memory Replace images in list Images in new window Bicubic Bilinear Nearest neighb
158. d the Organize pane On the Search pane can select Saved searches from the drop down list to run again On the Organize pane Saved Searches are listed below Auto Categories where you can run them again by clicking once on the Saved Search name This pane displays athumbnail preview of any image or media file currently selected in the File List pane You can adjust the size of the thumbnail by resizing the Preview pane and also specify whether you want the Preview pane to play media files or just display the first frame This pane combines input from the Folders Organize and Calendar panes to limit the list of files in the File List pane to those that match a specific set of criteria You can include or exclude files by adjusting the different criteria in the Selective Browsing pane This pane lists the categories auto categories ratings color labels and saved searches to help you sort and manage your files You can also use the Special Items area in the Organize pane to quickly view all of theimages on your computer or see any uncategorized files in the current folder This pane displays menus of commonly used buttons and commands from the menus and toolbars The menus change dynamically based on your current location and selections in ACDSee 14 This pane displays file properties and metadata for any file or folder you select in the File List pane You can use the Properties paneto view and edit metadata for your files and the EXIF metad
159. d whether or not your device uses TWAIN please consult your device s Help file P You require DirectX 9 0c and QuickTime to copy and view audio or video files About the ACDSee Device Detector You can use the ACDSee Device Detector when you import files stored on your camera removable drives scanner or CD DVDs and display them using ACDSee 14 By default the ACDSee Device Detector is off when you install ACDSee 14 If you want to use the ACDSee Device Detector you must start it To start the ACDSee Device Detector In Manage mode click File Import ACDSee Device Detector After you start the ACDSee Device Detector it runs in the background and displays a camera icon in the Taskbar Notification area When you plug a camera or other device into your computer the Device Detector detects the connection the icon changes color and either prompts you to specify what you would like to do with your files or automatically launches the Import From dialog box in ACDSee 14 The Device Detector replaces the Windows AutoPlay feature To resume using the AutoPlay functionality close the Device _ Detector When you insert a CD or DVD into your CD ROM drive or attach a removable drive mass storage or Windows Image Acquisition WIA device to your computer the Device Detector senses it Such devices may include cameras card readers Web cams and scanners If your device does not have a TWAIN or WIA driver installed or is not a mass st
160. d your changes you cannot reset your settings Adjusting tone curves In Edit you can use the Curves tool to change the tonal range of an image Select the RGB color channel to adjust the entire range of the image or select a specific color You can save your options as a preset for future use To adjust the brightness curves in an image 1 In Edit mode in the Exposure Lighting group click Tone Curves 2 Setthe options as described below 3 Dooneof the following Click Apply to apply your changes Click Done to apply your changes and close the Curves tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Curves options Channel Specifies the color channels to adjust Show Histogram Toggles the histogram display on and off Histogram Displays a graphic of the color information levels in the image based on the selected channel Click and drag the line to manipulate the curve Each time you click the curve a new node is added You can drag the nodes up and down the curve To remove a node drag the node up and out of the graph or down and out of the graph Exposure warning Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of the image Overexposed pixels turn red underexposed pixels turn green Adjusting lighting You can usethe Lighting tool to adjust areas in an image that are too dark o
161. date how Sync should handle errors and logs In the Confirmations area update how Sync should handle file duplication conflicts Click OK when you are finished Torename the synchronization click Rename Type a new name for the synchronization and click OK Todelete the synchronization click Delete 4 Click Close Running a saved synchronization After you create a synchronization you can run it at any time even if itis scheduled to run at regular intervals To run a saved synchronization In Manage mode click File Sync and then select the name of the synchronization you want torun Searching Searching with ACDSee 14 ACDSee 14 includes a number of ways to search your computer for files and folders You can use the Search pane to search by file name keywords or image properties You can create advanced searches to locate files that fall within a date or rating range and then save and name the search to use later You can also use the Duplicate Finder to locate and manage identical files For simpler searches you can use the Quick Search bar to quickly locate files and folders or search the database for specific names and keywords You can also customize the Quick Search bar to only search for specific items or certain parts of the database Also you can use the Organize pane to quickly locate and list all images on your hard drive or to locate any files in a folder that have not been categorized If you are working with l
162. dialog box when the renaming process is complete Stores the current settings and loads them the next time you rename files Provides a warning if you have changed the file extension as part of the template Automatically resolves any naming conflicts by adding an underscore and a sequential number to the end of each file name The ACDSee 14 database stores image and media file information automatically when you browse your folders This process is called cataloging The database increases the speed with which you can browse your computer and you can usethe information stored in the database to sort organize search and filter your images and media files You can also backup restore and share database information You can store cached thumbnail previews and add or edit the following information for each image or media file on your computer 90 Chapter 3 Manage mode Categories Notes Keywords Color Labels Authors Dates Ratings Captions You can also choose to exclude folders from the database and keep the contents of those folders separate from your other images and media files When you add ACDSee Metadata to a file in ACDSee 14 the file is linked to the database If you then copy move or rename 27 your files using programs other than ACDSee 14 such as Windows Explorer the link to the database is broken and this can causethe loss of ACDSee Metadata Embedding ACDSee Metadata in files If you ed
163. dited and the Restore to Original command is used then the geotag will be lost To delete a pinned location on the map Right click the geotagged image thumbnail and select Map Remove from Map To view a geotagged image on the map Right click the geotagged image thumbnail and select Map View on Map To set default location zoom and map type 1 Panto your preferred location on the map then adjust the zoom level and select your preferred map type Map Satellite or Terrain 2 Click Tools Map Set default map location Note The map reflects the current File list If the File list has images mapped to a different location from your default _ setting then that location will be displayed 0 To pan and zoom the map to a specific location enter the location into the Map search field and press Enter 50 Chapter 3 Manage mode Using the Map pane in Manage mode All geotagged images in your current file list will be indicated by pins on the map Click a pin and the image taken at that location will be selected in the Filmstrip and will display in the View pane You can click through the list to display each one in the View pane With the images from a particular location all selected here are a few possible workflow options a a a Enter Develop or Edit mode to process this selection together Usethe Batch tool to apply the same settings on photos from the same location Click Slideshow to view and prese
164. drag and drop them directly into ACDSeeOnline com Switching modes in ACDSee 14 In ACDSee 14 you can quickly switch between the four modes Manage View Edit and Online modes The mode buttons are located at the top right of the ACDSee 14 window To switch from one mode to another Click one of the following mode buttons Manage Import browse organize compare find and publish your photos View Display and examine photos at any magnification Edit Fix and enhance photos using the pixel based Edit tools Online Upload images to ACDSeeOnline com to share with your contacts or the public Edit mode keyboard shortcuts Using Manage mode In Manage mode you can browse sort organize manipulate and share your files and images You can combine different tools and panes to perform sophisticated searching and filtering operations and view thumbnail previews of images and media files You can also switch very quickly to the other modes by clicking the mode buttons in the top right corner The panes in Manage mode are fully customizable and can be moved resized hidden docked or closed You can also stack the panes together for easy reference and accessibility and to maximize your screen space If the pane you want to view is not visible click View and select a pane About the Manage mode panes Manage mode consists of the following panes File List Folders Calendar Favorites Search Preview
165. ds are reflected in their corresponding EXIF field 24 Chapter 3 Manage mode Importing photos from a CD or DVD You can download photos from a CD or DVD using the Import From dialog box or the Folders pane Before you import photos you can browse to the CD and view them just like any other folder and then simply copy and paste them into a new location If you use the Import From dialog box you can set the subfolder options to import complex folder structures intact including all the folder names You can also organize your files as you import them as well as create a duplicate backup folder simultaneously To import photos from a CD or DVD 1 Insertthe CD or DVD into the drive 2 Dooneof the following Ifthe Windows AutoPlay dialog box opens select Import pictures using ACDSee 14 Ifthe Device Detector is on and detects the CD when the ACDSee Device Detector dialog box opens select Import files and then clickOK If you have more than one CD or DVD drive connected to your computer select the device you want to use and then click OK In Manage mode click File Import From CD DVD 3 Inthe Import From dialog box select the import from options you want to use and then click Import 4 Tobrowse your imported photos click Yes when the Import Complete dialog box displays Importing photos from a disk ACDSee 14 makes it easy to import photos from any other storage device computer network flash drive etc In f
166. e 6 Toadd multiple areas into your selection hold down SHIFT and draw around any part of the image As long as you do not touch the line of any other selection you can add several separate areas to a selection 7 Tosubtract from a selection hold down CTRL and draw a shape that includes part of the original selection or encircles it completely 8 If you wish to apply edits or effects to the outside areas of the image you need to click Invert to reverse the selected area Now the selection includes all the outside areas of the image with the central area outside the selection 9 ClickDone You return to Edit where you can select an editing tool or a special effect to apply to the selection To use the Magic Wand 1 Clickthe Magic Wand to select it 2 Clickany color in the image 127 ACDSee 14 User Guide 5 Do any of the following Slidethe Threshold slider to adjust the number of pixels to be included or excluded The Threshold slider sets how similar a pixel needs to be to the one you clicked in order to be included in the selection Clickthe Connected radio button if you want to include only pixels that are touching the one you clicked Clickthe Not connected radio button if you want to include all the pixels that are similar to the one you clicked Hold down SHIFT and click around the selection to include more pixels Hold down CTRL and click around the selection to remove pixels from the se
167. e The Properties pane provides another way to assign categories To assign files to ratings in the Properties pane 1 IntheFile List pane selectthe files you want to assign a rating 2 Inthe Properties pane select the Categories tab 3 Clickthe category you want these files to have from your Categories list 9 Assign files quickly with a category sets button See Create easy access category sets Removing files from categories or ratings You can remove a file from a category or rating without moving or deleting the original file or affecting any other files assigned to that classification To remove files from a category or rating 1 IntheFile List pane select the files you want to remove 2 Dooneof the following Right click a selected file and then click Set Rating Clear Rating Right click a selected file click Set Categories and then click the name of the category from which you want to remove the file or to remove all categories click Uncategorize All Selected Items Clear a check box for a category or a radio button for a rating in the Organize pane Right click a category or rating in the Organize pane and then click Remove Items Assigning Color Labels Color labels can be used in many ways to help you organize your files You can use different colors to represent different stages of your workflow As you review your photos you can assign them to the color labels For example assign files to upload pr
168. e imagine that you are learning to combine aperture and shutter speed settings to properly expose images in a variety of lighting and you want find images taken at specific settings If you click the Easy Select indicator beside the f 16 aperture auto category and the 1 30s shutter speed auto category ACDSee 14 will search for images that belong to both of those auto categories When you select more than one auto category you can further control the search by selecting Match All or Match Any from the Match Any All drop down list at the top of the Organize pane If you select Match Any ACDSee 14 will display any images associated with the selected auto categories If you select Match All ACDSee 14 will display only those images that are associated with all of the selected auto categories You can also refine your auto categories search by selecting a category or rating For example imagine that you clicked on the Photographer auto category and found over 1000 images However you only want to see the best images by that photographer Click the Easy Select indicator beside 1 in the Ratings area of the Organize pane Only the images by that photographer with a rating of 1 will display You can also use the Selective Browsing pane to refine your auto categories search For example imagine that you clicked on the Camera Model auto category and ACDSee 14 displayed over 1000 images However you only want to see the images that you took on a specific date
169. e in the Add group click Special Effect Click Colored Edges On the Colored Edges tab set the options as described below ee a Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Colored Edges options Intensity Specifies the amount of color added to the edges within the image The higher the setting the thicker the color that is applied to the image Edge color Specifies the color of the edges Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm The algorithm controls the formula used to detect the edges and the direction of the edge indicators Blurring Blurs the edges in the image Select the Use blurring check box and then select a blur setting to determine how much blur is applied Applying a Contours effect You can use the Contours effect to draw contour lines on your image to create a cartoon effect You can select or change the Contours options to apply the effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Contours effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Contours 3 On the Contours tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Contours options Rounding Specifies the amount of curve in the contour lines The
170. e Disc Wizard to burn your slideshow onto a CD or DVD If you assign an audio file to an individual image as well as to the whole slideshow on the Set slideshow options page then _ both audio files will play simultaneously when that slide displays Creating a desktop slideshow You can use ACDSee Showroom to create a slideshow of your photos and display that slideshow in a small window on your computer desktop You can run up to 16 different slideshows on your computer at once You can configure the ACDSee Showroom window to always stay on top of other application windows You can also configure it to open when you start your computer You do not haveto open ACDSee 14 to use ACDSee Showroom To create a desktop slideshow with ACDSee Showroom 1 In Manage mode navigate to a folder containing images that you want to add to the desktop slideshow 2 Dooneof the following Click Tools Create ACDSee Showroom Click Start Programs ACD Systems ACDSee Showroom The slideshow starts immediately and the ACDSee Showroom icon appears in the taskbar Using the ACDSee Showroom slideshow controls There are anumber of slideshow controls in the ACDSee Showroom window Click the Back or Forward buttons to display the previous or next photos in the slideshow Click the Pause button to pause the slideshow while a particular photo is displayed If you cannot see these slideshow controls in the ACDSee Showroom window click anywhere in
171. e File List to List view Changes the File List to Details view Removes the selected item from your hard drive Refreshes the File List pane Pastes the contents of the Clipboard Moves the focus of the Manage mode window to the previous pane or tool in sequence Moves the focus of the Manage mode window to the next pane or tool in sequence Manage mode mouse shortcuts You can use the following mouse shortcuts in Manage mode 9 To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print Shortcut Double click Right click SHIFT click Click drag CTRL click CTRL right click CTRL Wheel up CTRL Wheel down Resulting action Opens the selected image in View mode Opens the Manage mode shortcut menu Selects a group of images Selects a group of images Be sureto click on a blank area of the screen not on an image or folder before you drag so you can draw a selection box around the group of images Selects images you click on Opens the Windows Explorer context menu Increases the magnification of the image zooms in Decreases the magnification of the image zooms out View mode keyboard shortcuts You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while working in View mode 9 To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print 208 Shortcut backslash equal sign grave accent ALT ENTER ALT DOWN ARROW ALT RIGHT ARROW ALT ALT B ALT C ALT
172. e and time The date and time held in the ACDSee database 3 Onthe Advanced Options tab select the options for the Adjust Image Time Stamp tool described below then click Next Advanced options Accept defaults and Accepts the default settings for the new time stamp options To start changing the date and start conversion time of your images click Adjust Time Stamp Automatically close Closes the Adjust Image Time Stamp Wizard as soon as the process is complete wizard when finished Save current Remembers the current settings and applies them the next time you change time stamps settings as defaults 4 On the Choose new time stamp page select one of the following options Use different date and time Replaces the selected date and time with another time stamp property from the same file Select the file property you want to use from the Select date and time drop down list 58 Chapter 3 Manage mode Use specific date and time Changes the selected time stamp in each file to a specific date and time Type the new date and time for the time stamp in the Date and Time fields Shift to a new starting date and time Replaces the earliest time stamp with a date and time you specify and shifts all later time stamps ahead accordingly Specify the time stamp for the earliest file in the Date and Time fields Shift date and time by a specific number Shifts all the time stamps either forwards or backwards by a specific number of h
173. e edge box to open the edge library and view thumbnails of edges to select Click the forward and back arrows to browse through the edges one at a time without opening the library gm o a 0 Edge blur Blurs the edges of the edge of the image into the border Drag the slider to the right to increase the blur or to the left to decrease the blur m 36 Chapter 5 Edit mode Edge effects Drop Adds a drop shadow to the image that appears to lift it off the page shadow The drop shadow appears behind the image between it and the border You can adjust the depth of the blur on the edge of the shadow and the transparency of the shadow which affects how much of the border shows through the shadow You can also changethe direction of theimaginary source of light by dragging the glow on the Light Source ball Blur Adjusts the blur on the edge of the shadow when you drag the slider Opacity Adjusts the transparency of the drop shadow when you drag theslider Raised Adds a raised edge to the image that appears to raise it above the border giving it a 3D look The raised effect is applied to the image between it and the border You can change the direction of the imaginary source of light of the raised edge by dragging the glow on the Light Source ball You can also adjust the size strength and color of the raised edge in the following ways Size Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the raised edge so
174. e eee cee eee eee eee eee eee 195 Setting The ACDSee Showroom Options 2 2202 ce ee ce eee cee eee eee rroaren rnrn ee eeee 196 Setting The ACDSee Quick View Options 000 02 22 cece ee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee e eee eee 197 Setving JPEGIOPUONS 25 E fee ote E ta Aan ese iaa 198 Customizing And Contigua o p e AEDE REESE Ee 198 Auto hiding Panes And Panels 198 Using The Task Pane 225 escoba dt rca ada tato ore aie aus bias o ta deis 199 Customizing VOD a Di iaa 199 Customizing The Editing Tools PAne 222 a atada de cansrocas dass nveectedddeevcsss distin 200 Configuring External EIA da 200 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts _ 22 2 ienes enpe ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee cence eee 202 Changing The Display Theme 203 CHAPTER 8 SHORTCUTS eee 205 Manage Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 0 2 22 eco eee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee ce eee ee cee cece eee e eee eee 205 Manage Mode Mouse Shortcuts 2 2 5 2 occ menses colescudie tardor rito ii di 208 View Mode Keyboard Shortcuts eee eee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee cece eee e eee eeeeeeeees 208 View Mode Mouse ShortcUtS nissana nrnna aaia ode td ar Ela EEEE 211 Calendar Pane SmOntGuts xe cee eee cidad tantra iria irrita 212 EditMode Keyboard SNOFECU S ii a ti gi 212 EditiModelMouse SHOFEGUES lt corarisniocatas rca isso rr tasa ada li 213 Online Mode Keyboard Shortcuts 52a ts a 213 Online Mode Mouse Shortcuts cuooccoococ conococ secede dag sare ENRERE iI ER
175. e eee e eee eens 128 CS AAA AA 129 ReduciMgi RedEye tot A A ts 129 REMOVINGMRIAWS 322 co 5 e citserisias tner o SS a EREE EE 130 Add TO Sivad iria 131 Adding Text To AM IMage scort seendo aeea ni ario ra scott aus 131 Adding Drawings To Your IMAGe i cessed eese aae vase sees diia decada 132 AC GING LPS ts all etn eee II A A 133 AddiN GA VINE 3 823256 oc nae een dns er tn sI a Koes feet a teense 138 About Special Effect Filters 2 cti tah Rowse Rows A ees a eee E ae wre 139 Applying A Bathroom Window Effect 2 000222 c eee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee cece eee eee 140 Applying A Blinds Effect ox a 140 Applying A BUIJS EEC rai A state 140 Applying A Collage Effect 0 ci A a id sabe ee 141 Applying A Colored Edges Effect o ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee cece EEEE 141 Applying A Contours EffeCt coc aaa 142 Applying A Crayon Drawing Effect o 142 Applying A Crosshatch Effect 143 Applying AiDauber Etmect 2 5424 s2 sane oe eedadsccachecsass casseaSuens co eh seos bined E ae ceec see REA aA R ER E 143 Applying An Edge Detect Effect oo occas oc A ib cease 143 ACDSee 14 User Guide Applying AniEmbossEfeCE susurra ai 144 Applying A Furry Edges Elec rata 144 Applying A Glowing Edges Effect eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee 145 Applying A Granite Effect 145 Applying A Lomo Effect 20 a csldcdeasale 146 Applying A Mirror Effect 000000000000000 00000000000000 cee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee e
176. e files at the same time using the Batch Rename tool 53 ACDSee 14 User Guide Storing files in private folders Private folders are secure folders where you can store confidential files When you place files into a private folder ACDSee 14 moves them from their current location into the private folder Private folders are password protected and the files in them can only be viewed in ACDSee 14 When you add files or folders to a private folder all information related to themis permanently removed from the database Restoring files and folders from a private folder does not restore information to the database The only way you can preserve database information related to the files or folders is to back up or export the database before you add them to a private folder To open the Private Folder pane In Manage mode click View Private Folder To create a private folder 1 Closeany open private folders 2 Right click the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane and select Create Private Folder 3 Inthe Enter Password text box typea password for the private folder Your password must be less than 40 characters long 4 Inthe Re enter Password text box type the password again to verify it 5 Click OK A new folder will not display in the Private Folder pane Private folders are hidden and are only identified by their password When you have a private folder open you will see any subfolders that exist within the private folde
177. e frame to make it look like an old photo Glowing Edges Applies glowing edges to all the strong lines in the frame area Ripple Adds ripples to the frame so that it looks like liquid ripples moving outwards from the focal area The settings that display below the Frame drop down list change depending on the frame you select For example if you select Color in the Frame drop down list acolor picker displays so that you can select the color for the vignette Similarly if you select Blur in the Frame drop down list a slider appears that you can use to change the amount of blur surrounding the photo For some choices like Edges there are no settings to apply About special effect filters You can use filters to add unique effects to your images ACDSee 14 includes more than 20 special effect filters such as Crosshatch Pencil Drawing and Solarize To access the special effects filters In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect For more information about each effect click the Help button to view a Help file page specific to that effect 139 ACDSee 14 User Guide Applying a Bathroom Window effect The Bathroom Window effect divides your images into bars transforming them so they resemble the view through privacy glass often found in bathrooms You can select or change the Bathroom Window options to apply this effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Bathroom
178. e has been rated in the ACDSee 14 database Displays a database overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has information stored in the ACDSee 14 database Displays a file format overlay icon on thumbnails in the File List pane Displays a category overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has been categorized Displays a shortcut overlay icon on thumbnails if the item is a shortcut to another file Displays an offline overlay icon on thumbnails if the file is stored on an offline device Displays an excluded file icon on thumbnails if the file is excluded from the ACDSee 14 database Displays a tagging overlay icon on thumbnails If the file is tagged a checkmark displays in the icon If selected an empty tagging overlay icon displays on the thumbnails of untagged images Displays an auto rotate overlay icon on thumbnails if the file was automatically rotated Displays a sound overlay icon on thumbnails if the image contains embedded or associated audio Displays an Edit overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has been edited Displays a globe overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has been pinned on the map Displays a color label overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has been labeled You can use the Options dialog box to change how the thumbnails of images display in the File List pane These options are set under File List Thumbnail Style To adjust the Thumbnail Style options 186 Chapter 7 Options and confi
179. e image color depth to Truecolor Deletes the current image to your Recycle Bin Toggles the exposure warning on and off Displays the last of your selected items or the last item in the current folder Closes View mode and returns to the previous mode Closes current dialog box or closes View mode and returns to the previous Toggles full screen mode Opens the ACDSee 14 Help file Opens the Rename File dialog box Refreshes the View mode window and reloads the current image Displays the first of your selected items or the first item in the current folde Opensthe Open files dialog box in which you can select one or more image Shortcut L PAGE DOWN PAGE UP PAUSE SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT BACKSPACE DELETE E END ENTER Fi F2 F3 HOME INSERT L PAGE DOWN PAGE UP SPACEBAR Z SPACEBAR T TAB Z Chapter 8 Shortcuts Resulting action Toggles the pan lock Displays the next item Displays the previous item Stops or starts the Auto Advance slideshow Displays the previous page in a multiple page image Removes the current item from your hard drive Opens the current file in the default system application or opens a dialog bo application Displays the last page of the current multiple page image Closes View mode and returns to Manage mode Activates the image scrolling tool Activ
180. e operation if thereis a file with the same file name and extension 4 Click OK Copying images to the clipboard You can copy an image to the Clipboard and then paste it into another application Using the Copy Image command transfers only the image data to the Clipboard no EXIF IPTC or metadata information is retained To copy an image 1 In Manage mode or View mode select the image file you want to copy 2 Click Edit Copy Image 52 Chapter 3 Manage mode 3 Pastethe image into your other application Pasting files and folders You can cut or copy files to the Clipboard and then paste them into another folder without losing your ACDSee metadata To cut and paste files 1 In Manage mode in the File List or Folders pane select one or more files or folders 2 Click Edit Copy or Cut 3 Inthe Folders pane browse to a new location 4 Click Edit Paste to place the files or folders into the new location Replacing or overwriting files When copying or moving files from one location to another a file name collision occurs if a file already exists in the destination folder with the same file name and extension as a file you are relocating In ACDSee 14 you can view both of the files involved in the Confirm File Replace dialog box If the files involved are image files ACDSee 14 displays thumbnail previews of both files and provides options to replace the existing file rename delete or skip the file you are moving
181. e or move them together or you could lose the ACDSee Metadata permanently 47 ACDSee 14 User Guide To delete a Label Set 1 IntheOrganize pane click the Labels settings button and select Edit Label Sets 2 Selectthe set you want to delete from the Labels Sets drop down list 3 Clickthe delete button Assign Color Labels in the Properties pane The Properties pane provides another way to assign color labels To assign files to color labels in the Properties pane 1 IntheFile List pane selectthe files you want to assign a color rating 2 IntheProperties pane select the Metadata tab 3 Clickthe color label from the boxes along the top of the Properties pane Assign color labels in View mode To assign color labels in View mode do one of the following Click Edit Set Label and then select a color Right click the file click Set Label then select a color Removing color labels from files To remove a color label from a file 1 IntheFile List pane select one or more files you want to remove a label from 2 Dooneof the following Right click a selected file and then click Set Label Clear Label Inthe Organize pane click the Unlabeled radio button Inthe Properties pane click the gray delete label x Using the Properties pane The Properties pane displays all the metadata about your files It also displays file properties such as filesize creation date and read only or hidden status You can use
182. e to JPEG in it s original size Upload 1920 x 1440 JPG Converts the image to JPEG and sets the resolution to 1920 x 1440 This option is the best for high quality JPEGs Upload 1024 x 768 JPG Converts the image to JPEG and sets the resolution to 1024 x 768 This option is the best for images you want to view on a Netbook and results in the fastest upload Local Folder Displays the path to the folder you selected Click the Browse button to select a different folder Online Folder Enter a name for the online folder By default this is set to the same name as the folder on your computer that you want to sync to Web Sync to Web right Select to upload the images in the selected folder immediately If you do not select this check box away you can click Sync to Web to upload all the images in all the folders you have chosen to sync Creating and making folders public or private P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline comtab then click Help In ACDSeeOnline com and Transfer you can create folders and make them private or public When you make a folder public anyone can find and see the images in that folder You can also copy the URL for your public folders and sharethe URL with someone P When you create a new folder itis set to private by default To create a folder and make it private or public in Transfer 1 In Online mode click Transfer 2 Intheonline Folders pane right click your user name and select New O
183. eate a range of files with similar attributes for easy selection To sort items in the File List 1 Click View Sort By and then select a sort option Filename Size KB Image Type Modified Date Image Properties Caption Rating Tagged More sort by metadata EXIF file properties image attributes IPTC information or multimedia attributes 2 Tosetthe direction of the sort click View Sort By and then select a direction Sort Forward Sort Backward Your sort settings are saved until you change them For example if you sort images in the File List pane according to __ Rating the images will remain sorted according to Rating until you changethe sort settings Sorting files using column headers You can quickly sort files in Details view mode using column headings To sort files using a column header 1 Clicka column header An arrow appears indicating the sort direction 2 Clickthe column header again to change the sort direction 36 Chapter 3 Manage mode Custom sorting files You can use custom sorting to customize the order of files in the File List pane After custom sorting your files ACDSee 14 automatically saves the file order for the selected folder until you change it or delete the custom sort order To customize the sorting order of your files 1 Selectone or more files 2 Dragthe selected files to a new location in the File List gn delete a custom sort order click View Sort
184. eated using the Burn Basket To create a video file or VCD 1 In Manage mode click Tools Create Video or VCD 2 On the Welcome page click one of the following Create VCD Create Video 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard to create your slideshow For additional assistance creating your video files or VCDs clickthe Help button in the wizard Creating an HTML album You can usethe HTML Album Wizard to prepare photo collections for posting on the Internet The HTML album includes slideshow controls and athumbnail display You can select from a list of gallery style templates and then customize the gallery by adding your own logo as an image or textto the header or footer You can also change the fonts and colors used in the gallery To create an HTML album 77 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 2 3 0 9 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you want to share Click Tools Create HTML Album On the Style Settings page of the Create HTML Album Wizard select a Gallery Style from the Web page styles box After you select a Gallery Style and other settings you can click Preview Gallery to see how those selections affect the appearance of your HTML album You can also generate your HTML album from any page in the HTML Album Wizard by clicking Generate Album Click Next On the Gallery Customization page do one or all of the following Inthe Gallery Title text box type the title that you want to
185. ect You can use the Slant effect to make a photo appear slanted For example you could use the Slant effect to distort a photo by pushing the top of the photo to the left and the bottom of the photo to the right Similarly you could use the slant effect to push the left side of the photo upwards and the right side of the photo downwards You can save your options as a preset for future use To apply a Slant effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Slant 3 Onthe Slant tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Slant options Amount Specifies the degree of the slant Fulcrum Specifies the center of the slant Drag the slider to the left to place the center of the slant near the bottom of the photo Drag the slider to the right to place the center of the slant near the top of the photo Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Click the color picker to select a different color Slant Direction Specifies the angle of the slant La Horizontal Select Horizontal to push the top or bottom of the photo to the left or right Vertical Select Vertical to push the left or right side of the photo up or down 154 Chapter 5 Edit mode Applying a Sobel effect You can usethe Sobel effect to create a highlighted outline of your ima
186. edge of the selection and the edit or effect Feathering prevents an unnatural or sharp transition between the selection and the rest of the image as it blends the edges This control also makes it unnecessary for your selection to be perfectly on the edge of the area you want to select Repair tools Reducing red eye You can use the Red Eye Reduction tool in Edit to correct red eye in digital photographs It is possible to change the fill color if you need to restore the iris of the eye or an area of skin around the eye rather than the pupil Itis also possible to vary the intensity of the fill each time you click or drag which gives you precise control and allows incremental changes Sometimes it works best to have a low intensity and use repeated fine adjustments to get the best results To correct red eye 1 In Edit mode in the Repair group click Red Eye Reduction 2 Usethe Zoomtools in the bottom right corner to enlarge and center the eye you want to correct 3 IntheFill color drop down list select the right color to cover the area of the eye 4 Click within the red portion of the eye or drag across the eye You might have to click more than once in the red area or drag over it repeatedly to remove all the red 5 You can also select Custom and enter the color values to get precisely the color you need 6 Tosetthe intensity of the fill color each time you click or drag movethe Reduction intensity slider to the right more
187. ee 14 no longer uses it To disable a plug in 1 InthePlug in Settings dialog box select one of the Plug in tabs 2 Clearthe check box beside the name of the plug in that you do not want ACDSee 14 to use 3 Click OK Changing the plug in order Some file formats can be supported by more than one plug in However when this happens you can control which plug in is used to read or write a file format The order that plug ins appear in the Plug in Settings dialog box is the order that ACDSee 14 uses the plug ins to read or write a file To change the plug in order 1 InthePlug in Settings dialog box select one of the Plug in tabs 2 Selecta plug in in the Plug ins list 3 Dooneof the following Clickthe Move up button to move the plug in higher in the list Clickthe Move down button to move the plug in lower in the list 4 Click OK Susie plug ins do not have the features and speed of ACD Systems plug ins Therefore it is recommended that you give __ Susie plug ins a low priority to prevent them from being used instead of an ACD Systems plug in Also you can disable Susie plug ins that overlap the file formats that ACD Systems plug ins support Viewing plug in properties and getting help You can view and set properties for certain plug ins To view plug in properties 1 Inthe Plug in Settings dialog box select one of the Plug in tabs 2 Selecta plug in in the Plug ins list 3 Click the Properties button To view a plug i
188. ee eee e cece eee 146 Applying A Negative Eee 147 Applying An Oil Paint Effect eee cee eee ee ee eee ce eee eee ee cece cence eee 147 Applying The Old Effe E canti liada 147 Applying The Orton Effect 148 Applying An Outline Effect eee ee ee eee eee oaaao annn 148 Applying A Pencil Drawing Eten a 148 Applying A Pixel Explosion Effect 149 Applying A Pixelate Effect 22 2 soscevcw luck vec budelie A a in 149 Applying A Posterize Effect eee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee 150 Applying A Radial Waves Effect o eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee e eee eee 150 APPO A RAINE IOC tts sane a aeajr ee a ER 151 Applying A Ripple Effect ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee cece eens 151 Applying A Scattered Tiles Efecto da 152 Applying A Sepia Effect oinin coc occ 153 Applying A Sheet Metal Effect o eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eens 153 Applying A Shift Efesiers nnee iania teie aet sides ira 154 Applying A Slant Effect o 154 Applying A Sobel Effect errearen A a Sede a e a dit 155 Applying A Solarize Effect 0 0 ee ce ee ce eee cece ee ee eee eee cee ee ee eee eee eee ence eee eeeeeeeeee 155 Applying A Stained Glass Effect o ee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee e eee cece e eee 155 Applying A SUNSpot EffeCt s cocina coo costa di chassis iia 156 AppIViING A SWirl Effect a A latte ccs th Gal A a Ni da 156 Applying The Threshold Effect ci A A eds Se eee te 157 Applying A Topography Effect 2 225 erener a a suds eee wees ds r
189. ee eee ee eee ee ee cece eee eee eee 103 Viewing Images With Auto AdVanCe 220 22 22 lt 225s d2 cc so ae sd ceed deeucends ceseuenseiacsegaeenbsgseengeveesladeeeuscicos e 103 Displaying Text On Images In View Mod 2 2 ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee e eee eee ee eeee 104 Synchronizing View Mode ToA Folder occ 105 Viewing Offline IMAGES 2 occ cs seeedeeessaccuueess iaa 105 Using ACDSee Quick VIEW noes ote e ladeudessivause sess 106 Viewing Images In Another Application 0 0 00 202 e eee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee 107 Setting An Image As The Desktop Wallpaper 108 Viewing And Using Brush Files ce ee ce ee eee eee eee eee eee eee tee iser iocis 108 Playing VideoAnd AUGIO FIGS i cu ees ce ete tr tds dota 109 Selecting Part OA Media Pile os A A A a 110 Saving Video Frames AS IMAJOS 22 522 corres titiritero tac cssuiuss aa 110 Adding Or Editing Image A ta 111 Selecting Part OF MA taa 112 Viewing File Properties In View Mode __ 222 022 cee ee ce ee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee 113 Printing Images In View Mode 2 220 ce ee ee cee ee eee eee eee ee eee cece cece cece e eee eee 113 SHOWIMNGIONIGINGlS lt gt eae ot eens Gos rro acta nes coo an ii ondas oia 114 Committing Changes s ct it Beaten Sew sen ccd dene oceans rt it a dee 114 LOOMIN DIMAS rr A A AE 114 ZOOM AGW ANNA GC sec heen es eee A rs Teo Net ea 114 Setting Mie Zoomileey Cle tits eh A a oa it EE tah sane cht taht ee
190. elect by clicking the in the calendar drop down arrow To specify where to place RAW JPEG files select one of the following Place both in chosen destination folder Places RAW and JPEG files in the folder you have selected under Choose destination on the Import From dialog box Place JPEG in subfolder Places the RAW files in the folder you have selected under Choose destination on the Import From dialog box Then creates a new subfolder with the name you type into the Subfolder name field which activates when you select this option All the JPEG files are placed into the new subfolder Place RAW in subfolder Places the JPEG files in the folder you have selected under Choose destination on the Import From dialog box Then creates a new subfolder with the name you type into the Subfolder name field which activates when you select this option All the RAW files are placed into the new subfolder Organize settings Select the names of saved metadata presets or select Manage presets to open the drop down list Manage Metadata Presets dialog box of options Enter ACDSee and IPTC Metadata into to the fields to add to the files you are importing Opens the Keyword Picker dialog box where you can select existing keywords Assigns the imported files to any category selected in this tab You can select multiple categories P The Import dialog gives access to new IPTC Core 1 1 metadata fields introduced in Pro 4 a values set in the IPTC fiel
191. electthis option to skip hidden folders such as the Originals folders that are created when you process images Drag the slider to the left to decrease the display time for each photo and to the right to increase the display time for each photo Fromthe Order drop down list select Sequential to display photos in order or Random to display photos randomly Fromthe Transition drop down list select None if you do not want any special transition effects Slide if you want photos to enter the window from the right and exit to the left and Fade if you want to reduce photo opacity during the transition from one photo to another Select Apply to all if you want to apply these changes to all slideshows Drag the Opacity slider to the left to reduce the opacity of the Showroom window and to the right to increase opacity From the Size drop down list select either a Small Medium or Large Showroom window frame From the Frame drop down list select a frame style Select Always on top if you want the Showroom window to display on top of all other application windows Select Apply to all if you want to apply these changes to all Showroom windows Select Run at startup if you want to start ACDSee Showroom automatically when you start your computer Setting the ACDSee Quick View options You can customize ACDSee Quick View in a number of ways including displaying Quick View on top of any open windows displaying Quick view at full screen
192. en click the Saved searches icon The new saved search appears in the Saved Searches on the Organize pane and in the Saved Searches drop down list of the Search pane Special Items You can use Special Items to quickly view all of the images in your database and any uncategorized images Select one of the following items Image Well Displays all images cataloged in the ACDSee 14 database If you havea substantial image collection it may take a few moments to gather all of the information Embed Pending Displays all the files whose database data has changed but has not yet been embedded in the files Uncategorized Displays any images cataloged in the database that have not been assigned to a category Tagged Displays all the tagged photos on the computer 41 ACDSee 14 User Guide You can assign a rating or category to any type of file but the options in the Special Items area only apply to images The ACDSee 14 database and embedded data When you assign a file to a rating or category this information is stored in the ACDSee 14 database If you choose to you can also embed this information in each individual file making it easier to relocate and share files or retrieve the information from the file if you need to As the database information is always associated with a particular file If you move or rename files using an application other than ACDSee 14 like Windows Explorer the link between the file and the ACDSee 1
193. entation occ 75 Burning A CDOFDVD 22 3 2 occ it dci 76 Creating Video Files And VEDS c00econeneiociarn tieorrpresssa rente bata pre das 77 Creating An HTML Album ooo 3222 lt tc oras ia tt tidad 77 Uploading Images To Photo Websites eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee e eee eens 78 Creating A Contact Sheet cunoticias ti dechatetunesoces 79 Creating Archives Of Your FileS 2 0 0 2 ccc ce ee ee eee ee cee eee eee eee eee eee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeee 80 Extracting Archived zip Files 81 Creating A SendPIX Alun 225 356 tata al it tala hees iaa eai e iune 81 Publishing Images To TiVO eee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee cee eee eee eee eee e cece eee eens 82 Printing eee ae MT oOo a a IS A Eo 82 es A Sot 5 A RN ESA 82 Setting Printer Options 2 2 22200 2232cce ache c abatir e rta otitis 83 Setting Image Size And Positioning cion ee ee ee ec eee eee eee eee 84 Adding Text TO Pages cta ii tal 84 Setting Contact Sheet Printing OPti0NS _ 0 0220 en ee ee ee ee eee eee 85 BateniUnCuOniS 22ceeensenttcoem cnt ts one is tii tancia 85 About Batch Editing 85 Converting Multiple Images To Another File Format 0 0 0 0000 o eee ce ee cece eee eee eee cece eee eee 85 Rotating Or Flipping Multiple Images 86 Resizing Multiple Images 2 2 22 cede oo a a 87 Adjusting Exposure For Multiple Images 88 vii ACDSee 14 User Guide viii Renaming Multiple RSS cai praia 89 Managing Database Infor MatiON vecodi
194. ers you want to include and then click OK 3 Inthe Options section select the information to add tothe database 4 Click Start A progress bar shows your photos as they are cataloged 5 Click Finish If you are cataloging a large collection of files do not disrupt the process or use other software while it is running For 27 large file collections itis best to run cataloging overnight Converting an older database You can usethe ACD Database Convert Wizard to take database information from previous versions of ACDSee 14 or ACD mPower Tools and add it to your current database This ensures that any information associated with your files using a previous version of ACDSee 14 is referenced properly in the current database If you have already added information to your current ACDSee 14 database it is recommended that you create a backup of 27 your database before converting an older ACDSee 14 database To convert an older database 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Convert Database 2 On the Welcome page click Next to select your conversion options 3 On the Database Convert Options page specify the version of the database files you want to convert as well as the folder wherethe database files are located on your hard drive Click Next 4 Toautomatically rebuild image thumbnails IPTC and EXIF information after the conversion process is complete select the Rebuild thumbnails EXIF and IPTC data for local images check
195. ert File Format Wizard guides you through the process To convert an image to another file format 1 Dooneof the following In Manage mode select one or more images and then click Tools Batch Convert File Format In View mode click Tools Modify Convert File Format 85 ACDSee 14 User Guide nu A U N On the Select a format page select a new format for your image or images from the list displayed on the Format tab Select the Advanced Options tab to change the settings for this wizard Click Next to continue On the Set output options page identify where you want to place the converted images and specify how you want the wizard to handle any file name conflicts by selecting one of the following options from the Overwrite existing files drop down list Ask Prompts you when overwriting a file Skip Cancels the operation if thereis a file with the same file name and extension Replace Overwrites the file without prompting for confirmation Rename Prompts you to rename the file Click Next to continue On the Set multiple page options page you can specify how you want to handle any multiple page images you are converting If you did not select any multiple page images to convert and did not specify a multiple page image format as your output file format you can skip the options on this page When you are satisfied with your choices click Start Convert and wait a few seconds while the wizard co
196. es As new services become available they will appear in the New Services Available box New services mightinclude photo publishing and other online services As soon as a new service is available it appears automatically in the New Services Available box You can install and use new services right away To install a new service 1 When a new service appears in the New services available box click the service and then click Install 2 Follow the installation instructions as they appear Creating a contact sheet You can create contact sheets thumbnail previews of your images arranged on pages that you can use to organize and share your images You can use the Create Contact Sheet utility to save your contact sheets in multiple image formats and as HTML image maps You can save your options as a preset for future use The size of the thumbnails depends on how many columns and rows the contact sheet displays and how much spaceis displayed between them To create a contact sheet 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you want to include Click Tools Create Contact Sheet In the Contact sheet format area set the Contact sheet format options 2 3 4 Inthe Output Settings area set the Output Settings options 5 If desired add or change the text on the page 6 Click OK If you do not specify an output file path the Create Contact Sheet utility places a file named Contact Sheet lt ext gt in your
197. es in properties are bolded while similarities are displayed in regular font Displays a histogram for each image in the Compare Images Viewer Opens a dialog box where you can select the metadata to display for each image in the Compare Images Viewer ensure Properties is toggled to on Displays one image in the Compare Images Viewer Displays two images in the Compare Images Viewer Displays three images in the Compare Images Viewer Displays four images in the Compare Images Viewer If one image is displayed displays the Properties Histogram Magnifying Glass and Navigator panes Opens the Help file 39 ACDSee 14 User Guide B Save Opens a dialog box where you can save the image with a different file name and a different file format Previous Swaps the displayed image with the previous image in the Comparison List 5 Next Swaps the displayed image with the next image in the Comparison List A Zoom In Increases the magnification of the image 2 Zoom Out Reduces the magnification of the image x Delete Deletes the image from your hard drive ER Remove Removes the image from the Comparison List El Tag Tags the image so that it will remain selected when you close the Compare Images tool Gathering images in the Image Basket You can usethe Image Basket to gather and hold images and media files from different locations or folders Once you have placed items in the Image Basket you can use any of the tools or features
198. es in the database Search in Notes Searches the Notes field of files in the database Search in Categories Searches the Category assignments of files in the database Search in Folders Searches in the name of folders in the database Select one of the following options Entire database Performs a search on the entire ACDSee 14 database Note that any folders on your computer that have not been cataloged are not included in the search results Specific folders and categories Performs the search only within the categories and folders you specify Selecting this option opens the Categories and Folders area where you can select the location and categories in which you want to search Imports the current Manage mode settings including Selective Browsing settings into the Search pane Note that this may also remove criteria fromthe Search pane In the Properties area you can identify file properties that you want to search for and specify ranges of values toinclude or exclude from your search To use the Properties area 1 Belowthe Search file properties for field click Add 2 IntheAdd Search Criteria dialog box select one or more properties on which to base your search 3 Click OK 62 Chapter 3 Manage mode 4 IntheProperties area clickthe hyperlinks to define conditional statements for each property 5 Click Start to perform the search Searching with file name patterns You can type a text patte
199. es pane select the tag check box at the top left corner in the Metadata tab To untag a selected image Usethe keyboard shortcut Y backslash key to toggle the tag off Inthe Properties pane uncheck the tag check box at the top left corner in the Metadata tab To untag all tagged images 1 Click Tagged in the Organize pane to display all tagged files in the File List pane 2 Usethe keyboard shortcut CTRL Ato select all 3 Clickthe backslash key to toggle the tag off To display tagged photos In Manage mode click View Organize to display the Organize pane then click Tagged in the Special Items section Tagged photos from all your folders display in the File List pane To tag a photo in View mode Do one of the following In View mode select the check box in the bottom right corner of the status bar In View mode click View Properties to display the Properties pane click the Metadata tab then select the Tagged check box in the top left corner To tag a photo when you are comparing images 1 Inthe Comparison List select the check box in the bottom right corner of the image thumbnails 2 ClickOK The Compare Images Viewer closes You will see a checkmark in the check box of the images that you tagged Adding ACDSee Metadata to multiple files We recommend entering and editing metadata prior to processing your images If you usethe Restore to Original command the metadata will be lost unless it was entered prior to
200. etadata tab Properties pane Categories tab Rename template Renames each file as it imports according these predefined renaming templates drop down list Date time filename Creates each filename using the file date and time the file was created plus the original filename Date time Creates each filename using the file date and the time it was created Camera sequence number Creates each filename using the camera name and a sequential number starting at one Date time sequence number Creates each filename using the file date and the time it was created plus a sequential number starting at one Camera filename Creates each filename using the camera name and the original filename When you create and save your own renaming templates they also appear in this list for you to select Edit Opens the Rename Templates dialog box where you can create and save your own renaming templates Rotates your images automatically if your camera creates the information needed for this option to work Deletes items from the device after they are imported Opens the Advanced Import Options dialog box where you can change the date settings for files and specify where to place RAW and JPEG files To set the ACDSee 14 database use one of the following as the file date Exif date Uses the EXIF date embedded in the image by the camera File modified date Uses the date the file was last modified Specific date Uses the date you s
201. etail group select Sharpen 2 Drag the sliders to enhance or fix your image as described below 3 Doone of the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Sharpen options Amount Specifies the amount of sharpening applied by increasing contrast around the edges Radius Specifies the number of pixels to adjust around each edge Higher values increase the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out coarser detail while lower values reduce the number of sharpened pixels and tend to bring out finer detail Threshold Specifies how different the pixel lightness values within an edge must be before the pixels within the edge are sharpened Higher values sharpen only stronger edges but minimize the appearance of noise Lower values sharpen both strong and weaker edges but can increase the appearance of noise We recommend you set the threshold to enhance edges while keeping background noise to a minimum Threshold Select this option to create smoother transitions between sharpened and unsharpened pixels If this Feathering option is not selected you may see lines between pixels that have been sharpened and pixels that have not been sharpened Blurring an image You can use the Blur tool to apply different kinds of blur to an image and y
202. ew to the Filename column Filmstrip Displays thumbnail previews of your files in a single row across the bottom of the File List pane and displays the currently selected file in an expanded Preview pane Thumbnails Displays thumbnail previews of all image and media files in the File List pane You can customize the appearance of thumbnails and specify what information to display with them Tiles Displays each file in the File List pane on a tile thatincludes a thumbnail preview and file information You can resize the tiles using the Zoom slider Icons Displays files in a list represented by large default system icons for each file type List Displays a list of file names and extensions Details Displays a list of file names and details about each file such as size format and creation date You can customize the appearance of the Details view mode as explained below and specify what information it displays Customizing the Details view You can set the Details view to automatically resize columns display or hide grid lines and select an entire row when you select a column entry in that row You can also change the appearance of the Details view select which columns to display and customize the column order To select columns and set column order 33 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Manage mode click View View Choose Details 2 Inthe Choose Details dialog box do one or more of the following Toaddacolumn select a f
203. f the Create HTML Album Wizard Click Next to create your HTML album You may need to wait a few moments while ACDSee 14 generates the thumbnails and creates the Web page Click Create Another Album to create another album or click Finish to exit the wizard and return to ACDSee 14 You will need to use FTP or another method to postthe HTML album files to your Web site Uploading images to photo websites You can upload your photos or images directly from ACDSee 14 to sites like Flickr and SmugMug Of course you do need an account before you can upload pictures to these sites You can create an account as part of the first upload process from ACDSee 14 if you wish Connecting You can quickly upload your photos without having to leave ACDSee 14 To read about a service 78 Chapter 3 Manage mode 1 In Manage mode click File Send Upload to 2 Click one of the names in the Select a service to upload to box Information about that service displays in the right hand pane To upload images to a website 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you wantto upload ClickFile Send Upload to In the Upload Manager dialog clickthe service you want to use and then click Next Follow the instructions in the wizard to upload your images Each service has different steps un A U N If you need help click Help Each service has its own help file which you open from inside its dialog box New Servic
204. ffler Copyright 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc This notice must appear in all copies of the Software and related documentation The names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE MPEG 1 Codec is copyright MainConcept 2008 The MainConcept and Codec By logos are registered trademarks and MainConcept is a trademark of MainConcept AG or any of its subsidiaries CD DVD recording software developed under license from Padus Inc http www padus com Copyright 1996 2007 Padus Inc All Rights Reserved This software contains portions of imaging code owned and copyrighted by Pegasus Imaging Corp Tampa FL ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This software contains a cross browser JavaScript library Ext JS Version 1 6 licensed from Sencha Inc http
205. file The options on the Task Pane menus also change dynamically For example if you select multiple images in the File List the options in the Fix and Enhance Photos menu change to list options that you can use with multiple images Customizing toolbars You can customize the appearance and organization of toolbars in Manage mode and View mode by selecting which toolbars to display and specifying each toolbar s buttons or commands You can also discard your changes and reset the toolbars to their default layout at any time Displaying and hiding toolbars You can choose to display or hide the specific toolbars in Manage mode and View mode To display or hide a toolbar Do one of the following In Manage mode click View Toolbars and then select the toolbar you want to display or hide In View mode click View and then select the toolbar you want to display or hide Customizing toolbar contents You can customize the following toolbars In Manage mode The Main toolbar and the File List toolbar In View mode The Bottom toolbar You can add remove and rearrange buttons on these toolbars You can also display or hide text labels and tool tips for the buttons on these toolbars and change button size All toolbar customization options are on the Customize dialog box To display the Customize dialog box Do one of the following In Manage mode click View Toolbars and then select Customize In Manage mode click the
206. file image IPTC or multimedia attributes Displays the default Windows Explorer shortcut menu instead of the ACDSee 14 shortcut menu Setting the Thumbnail Info options You can use the Options dialog box to change what information to display with thumbnails of images in the File List pane These options are set under File List Thumbnail Info To adjust the Thumbnail Info options 185 ACDSee14 User Guide 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click File List Thumbnail Info 3 OntheThumbnail Info page set or change the options as described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 Thumbnail Info options Information Overlay icons File name Choose Thumbnail Info Choose Tiles Info Show unrated untagged and unlabeled overlay icons on hover Rating Database information Icon Category Shortcut Offline Excluded items Tagged items Untagged items Auto rotate Sound Edited Geotagged Label Setting the Thumbnail Style options Displays the name of each file on the thumbnail in the File List pane Opens a dialog box where you can select the information to display on each thumbnail in the File List pane Opens a dialog box where you can select the information to display on each tile in Tiles view mode Shows unrated untagged and unlabeled overlay icons on hover Displays a rating overlay icon on thumbnails if the fil
207. folders folders Subfolders are not included Setting the File List pane options You can use the Options dialog box to set options for the File List pane to suit your preferences such as grouping archive files with subfolders or highlighting image types with different background colors You can also customize your thumbnails the file types ACDSee 14 displays and adjust how ACDSee 14 handles files and thumbnails in the File List pane To adjust the File List pane options 182 Chapter 7 Options and configuration 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options In the Options dialog box click File List On the File List page set or change the options as described below NS Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 File List options 183 ACDSee14 User Guide File List Configure Filters 184 Automatically select new files Group archives with folders Use embedded thumbnails Generate high quality thumbnails Show thumbnails on folders Remember each folder s sort settings lt CTRL gt key activates hot tracking Use animations Show all files Automatically selects new files when they are added to the folder displayed in the File List pane Treats archive files as folders when sorting items in the File List pane Displays the RAW files embedded thumbnail if the RAW file has them Creates a high quality thumbnail of the RAW file in the background while the embedded thumbnail is disp
208. formation If you saved your backup to disc and the backup spanned multiple discs you can restore from any disc in the sequence This can be particularly useful if a disc is lost or damaged but you would like to recover the remaining information To restore database information 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Restore Database 2 Onthe Welcome page click Next to select the backup 3 On the Restore Options page select the backup and date from which you want to restore or browse to the location of your backup and select a bkup file 4 If you are restoring from a disc and the backup spanned multiple discs it is recommended that you select the last disc in the sequence Click Next when you are ready to restore your database When restoring a backup froma series of discs or backup files ACDSee 14 will only restore the information included in and 2 prior to the selected disc or backup file Therefore unless required it is recommended that you select the last disc or file in the backup sequence Maintaining the database It is recommended that you regularly perform database maintenance and optimization to increase hard drive space remove redundant or extraneous information and increase overall ACDSee 14 performance 97 ACDSee 14 User Guide You can use the tools in the Database Maintenance dialog box to update folders or to identify folders whose thumbnails and database information you would like to delete The Datab
209. g categories keywords and other metadata Search for files and create saved searches Publish and share files including emailing files creating slideshows burning files to CD or DVD and uploading images to your favorite photo Web site Printimages Edit batches of files Manageand maintain your ACDSee 14 database 17 ACDSee 14 User Guide Importing photos Importing files with ACDSee 14 You can use ACDSee 14 to download images from devices like your digital camera flash drives CD DVDs scanners mobile phones or other removable devices In Manage mode you can also use the File Import From Disk option to import files from a network and any kind of disk or drive that can be mapped while preserving the original folders and subfolders Importing files using the Windows AutoPlay dialog box When you connect your digital camera or other device to your computer the Windows AutoPlay dialog box prompts you to choose one of the following Import pictures using ACDSee 14 Select this option to open the Import dialog box You can then select settings to rename backup and place the files You can save your import settings and give them a name so that you can re use them later You can also create advanced settings for import dates and RAW JPEG options if your camera takes both file formats You can also create a file renaming template to use with specific kinds of files or projects Manage pictures using ACD
210. ge After creating a black image the effect uses colored lines to outline the detail of an image where significant color differences exist Greater differences between colors in the original image produce brighter outline colors The Sobel effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect but produces sharper and brighter outlines To use the Sobel effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickSobel 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Solarize effect You can usethe Solarize effect to simulate the effect of overexposing an image as though the film was exposed to light before developing You can select or change the Solarize options to apply this effect to your image and save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Solarize effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Solarize 3 OntheSolarize tab drag the Threshold slider to specify the brightness threshold of the image 4 Inthe Effect area specify which pixels you want to adjust by selecting one of the following options Solarize adjusts pixels located above the specified threshold option The effect takes any pixels above the threshold and replaces them with their negative value When you solarize an image a higher threshold value sets a brighter threshold and colors need to be brighter to be
211. ge expansion Bell Smoothes the image B Spline Produces smooth transitions but may cause excessive blurring Lanczos Produces the sharpest images but may alsointroduce someringing artifacts Mitchell Produces smooth transitions when enlarging photo realistic images This filter is good compromise between the ringing effect of Lanczos and the blurring effect of other filters Applies gamma correction to the printed images Type a number from 0 10 to 3 00 in the Gamma value field to adjust the gamma of the image Higher values make the image appear brighter while lower values make the image appear darker Your camera may capture EXIF information that when shared with your printer will optimize printing results Selectthis option if your camera and printer support EXIF 2 2 printing 83 ACDSee 14 User Guide Setting image size and positioning You can use the Page Settings tab in the Print dialog box to adjust and control the size of the images you are printing and the positioning of images on each page Page Settings options Page position Specifies where to place the image on each page Margins Specifies the size of the margins Type a value or click the arrows in the Top Bottom Left and Right spin boxes Number of prints Specifies how many copies of each image to print The print utility adds pages as required Automatically Specifies whether you want the print utility to determine automatically which orientation to u
212. ges and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 5 Click Exit to leave Special Effects and return to Edit mode Applying an Outline effect The Outline effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect You can use the Outline effect to create a highlighted outline of your image However with the Outline effect you can control the thickness of the outline whether an edge is outlined or not and the color that displays behind the outlined image You can save your options as a preset for future use To use the Outline effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Outline On the Outline tab set the options as described below oe Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Outline options Line width Specifies the width of the outline in the effect The higher the value the wider the outline Threshold Specifies how sharp an edge must bein order to be outlined If you specify a higher value more edges in the photo will be outlined Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Click the color picker to select a different color Applying a Pencil Drawing effect You can use the Pencil Drawing effect to create a pencil drawing from your images To create a pencil drawing from an image 148 Chapter 5 Edit mode 1 In Edit mode in the Add group cli
213. ges dynamically as you adjust the size of the border Advanced Opens a fly out of advanced size controls Use the sliders up and size down arrow keys or type in a number to set the size of each side controls of the border individually For example you can set the bottom border to be larger to include a space for copyright information Click on the arrow beside the Size slider to open the advanced size controls menu Color box Activates when you select the Color radio button Do any of the following Clickon acolor in the image to make the border that color The clicked color appears in the Color box Clickon the color in the middle of the Color box to open the Colors dialog where you can adjust the color in multiple ways Click the down arrow beside the box and hover over the quick color box until you find a color you like When you click inside the quick color box the picked color appears in the Color box and the border changes to the selected color Texture Activates when you select the Texture radio button nox Do any of the following Click the side arrow to open the texture library and view thumbnails of textures to select Click the forward and back arrows to browse through the textures one at a time without opening the library Straight Sets the edge of the border to be a straight line Irregular Activates when you select the Irregular radio button Do any of the following Click the side arrow beside th
214. ginal image is blurred slightly This blurred version of the image is subtracted from the original image revealing the edges in the original image These edges can then be sharpened by increasing contrast 234 Glossary sharpness The sharpness in an image is determined primarily by your digital camera s lens and sensor You can also create the illusion of sharpness by increasing the contrast between edges within an image shortcut menu Menu that appears when you right click within a program Sometimes referred to as a context menu slideshow Automated sequential display of images You can use slideshow software such as ACDSee 14 to display slideshows of your images T tagging Tagging like categories and ratings is a great way to organize and group your photos without moving the files into different folders You can tag a photo with one click Similarly you can display all tagged photos with one click thumbnails Small preview of a full sized image timestamp Date and time associated with a file TiVo TiVo is a television recording device and service You can publish your digital photos from ACDSee 14 to your TiVo device and view them on your television transitions Special effects used between images or video segments in slideshows screensavers and videos U underexposed Images that are underexposed have too many shadows Images typically become underexposed if you don t expose your digital camera s sensor
215. gle variance Specifies the angle of the rain drops Typea number from 0 to 50 or drag the arrow to adjust the angle Strength variance Specifies how much variety there should bein the length of the rain drops Drag the slider to the left if you want rain drops to havea similar length Drag the slider to the right if you want to vary the length of rain drops If you vary the length of rain drops they look natural Background blur Specifies the amount of blurin the photo Heavy rain will block your vision Use this option to blur the photo so the rain effect looks natural Angle Specifies the angle at which the rain drops are falling Color Specifies the color of the rain drops Applying a Ripple effect You can use the Ripple effect to divide your images into concentric circles that resembles what you see when you drop a pebble into water You can select or change the Ripple options to apply ripples to your image and save your options as a preset for use at 15a ACDSee 14 User Guide another time To apply a Ripple effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Ripple 3 Onthe Ripple tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Ripple options Horizontal position Specifies the center of the ripples on the horizontal axis A value of 500 places the ripples in the middle of
216. group click Rotate Flip Crop or Resize In the Exposure Lighting group click Exposure Levels Auto Levels Tone Curves or Lighting In the Color group click White Balance or Color Balance In the Detail group click Sharpen Blur or click Noise to remove or add noise You have several options in saving your images See Saving images in Editfor more information Reverting to original settings You can discard your Edit settings and revert to the original settings for your image For steps to revert your image see Restoring originals Histogram and image viewing controls While editing an image you can adjust the magnification with the zoom controls located in the bottom right corner Histogram Displays the histogram preview for the current image The histogram provides a graphical m representation of the intensity level of pixels within each color channel Spikes at either end of the graph indicate clipped colors Keeping the histogram open is particularly useful when adjusting exposure as the histogram reflects all adjustments as you make them You can also display the Histogram as a separate window by selecting View and then Histogram Undo Redo Undo to discard all changes made on the current tab Redo to return to the options that you had e selected prior to clicking Undo In Edit Undo and Redo buttons display the changes you can undo or redo Display Full Screen Displays the image on a full screen Press F to
217. guration 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options In the Options dialog box click File List Thumbnail Style On the Thumbnail Style page set or change the options as described below OS Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 Thumbnail Style Options Thumbnail frame Show frame Displays a white frame around each thumbnail Show drop shadow Shows thumbnails with a 3D drop shadow Show slide Displays a shaded background behind the thumbnail and its information background Show slide border Displays a thin black border around the outer edge of the thumbnail Folder style XP style folder Displays folders as an XP style image 3D style folder Displays folders as a 3D folder with transparency Thumbnail ratio Custom Specifies a custom height to width ratio for the shape of the thumbnails in the File List pane Drag the slider under the preview to set the ratio The preview shows you the shape as you move the slider Portrait Specifies a standard 3 4 portrait ratio for the shape of the thumbnails in the File List pane Landscape Specifies a standard 4 3 landscape ratio for the shape of the thumbnails in the File List pane Thumbnail spacing Slider Increases or decreases the space between each thumbnail High quality scaling Uses high quality thumbnail scaling in the File List pane Setting the Details View options You can use the Options dialog box to change how thumbnails display in the File List pane To adjust
218. h Measurement of an image s resolution For example 92 DPI means 92 dots horizontally and 92 dots vertically which equals 8 464 dots per squareinch More dots per inch result in higher resolution and image quality dynamic range The dynamic range of an imageis directly related to the dynamic range of your digital camera s sensor If your digital camera s sensor has a large dynamic range it can capture the darkest shadows and brightest highlights at the same time without clipping the shadows or highlights RAW images preserve the dynamic range of your digital camera s sensor Adjusting the tonal range of the image changes how the dynamic range of the image is represented on a monitor or in a photo E elevation Height of an imaginary light source over an image The elevation of the light source works in conjunction with azimuth to generate a three dimensional emboss effect encode Writing or saving a file format encryption Method of converting data into a secure format You need a digital password or key to read an encrypted file EXIF Exchangeable Image File 230 Glossary Standard for storing information primarily with images that use JPEG compression Most digital cameras create EXIF information and embed itin the image file For example EXIF information can include details about shutter speed and whether a flash was used export Moving data from one application to another The exporting application places the data
219. h from the drop down list and then click the Delete icon Click Yes to confirm the deletion when the prompt opens In the Files and Text area you can identify what you are searching for and where you want to search for it Search for files or folders named With the text Search in Sync to browser settings Properties area Type a portion of the file or folder name for which you want to search or select a previous search term from the drop down list You can also use wildcards to search for file name patterns To exclude all non image files click the right arrow button beside the field and select Images only Type the text you want to search for within the ACDSee 14 database This can include portions of a caption or keyword or even the name of a folder or category that might contain the files you want to find When you search by both file name and a keyword or phrase an itemis included in the search result only when it includes both criteria To specify what parts of the database you want to search and indicate how to treat the text you type in the field click the arrow next to the field and select any of the following options Find all words Only returns files that match all of the words you enter Find whole words only Only returns files that contain the entire word exactly as you type it Search in Caption Searches the Caption field of files in the database Search in Keywords Searches the Keyword field of fil
220. h image and change the orientation of the images on each page To print your images 1 Selectthe image or images you want to print 2 Dooneof the following In Manage mode click File Print In View mode click File Print All Images If you wantto printa single image in View mode select Print Image 3 Under Print layout do one of the following Select Full page and then choose a print size from the Format list Select Contact sheet and then set the Contact sheet format options to define the appearance of your contact sheet Select Layout and then choose one of the available layout options 82 Chapter 3 Manage mode 4 Onthe Printer Options tab specify the printer you want to use the paper size the number of copies you want the range of pages that you want to print and image resolution 5 OnthePage Settingstab specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths 6 Specify the number of prints of each photo If you are printing a Full page or a Contact sheet this option is available on the Page Settings tab If you are printing a Layout this option is available below the list of layouts 7 Add captions headers or footers You can only add captions headers or footers if you are printing a Full page or a Contact sheet 8 ClickPrint Setting printer options When printing your images with ACDSee 14 you can specify which printer you want to use and set the printer options on the Printer Optio
221. hapter 5 Edit mode Scattered Tiles options Tile size Specifies the size of the tiles Scatter amount Specifies how much the tiles will move from their original positions Background color Specifies the color of the background Click the color picker to select a different color Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the tiles When you apply the Scattered Tiles effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the tiles randomly This makes the effect different every time you apply the filter You can define a specific random seed to generate identical tile patterns To generate a new random seed click Random Seed Applying a Sepia effect You can use the Sepia effect to give your images an antique look The Old effect is similar to the Sepia effect but produces a more realistic appearance of age To add a sepia tone to an image 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickSepia 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Sheet Metal effect You can usethe Sheet Metal effect to turn your images into sheet metal impressions You can save your options as a preset for future use OS To apply a Sheet Metal effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 ClickSheet Metal 3 On the Sheet Metal tab set the options as described below 4 Dooneof the following Click Done to
222. hat clearly identifies how you plan to use the template or what kind of information the name will contain For example Camera name_photographer When you click Save the name of your new template is added to the drop down list of system templates Deletes the renaming template currently selected in the drop down list unless itis a pre defined system template which cannot be deleted Use this field to create the renaming template You can type in the photographer s name and an underscore between each element of the template to make it easier to read Use the following placeholders to ensure that each filename is unique Insertan When your files are renamed the will be replaced by the original file name Inserta When your files are renamed each will be replaced by a sequential number If you have a large number of files insert several s For example if you enter the first file renamed will be numbered 001 the next 002 and soon If you have over 1000 files insert Inserta metadata placeholder lt gt and the data inside these brackets is replaced with whatever data you have chosen For example if you choose lt Camera Model gt the model of the camera is inserted into each file name Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box where you can select from a long list of metadata to insert into your template As you type or add placeholders in the Rename Template field the same updates to show you a s
223. he Zoom tools to enlarge or reduce the size of the image you are viewing When an image is zoomed toa larger size than the View mode window you can use the Scroll tool hand icon to pan or scroll the image To zoom an image in or out Click once on the image to toggle between your default view and Actual Size view Click Tools Zoom and then select one of the Zoom menu options 114 Chapter 4 View mode Zoom menu options Zoom In Increases the magnification of the image Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the image Actual Size Displays the image at its original dimensions 100 Fit Image Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in View mode window Fit Width Fits the image within the left and right sides of the View mode window Fit Height Fits the image within the top and bottom of the View mode window Zoom Lock Displays all images at the zoom option of the current image If the zoom level is adjusted the new zoom level is applied to all images that you view Zoom To Opens a dialog box where you can select a zoom level Pan Lock Locks the panned area of an image If you select Fit Image you can display the previous or next image by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your _ keyboard To change your default image view click Tools Zoom and select Actual Size Fit Image standard Fit Width or Fit __ Height Setting the zoom level You can usethe Set Zoom Level dialog box to set a spe
224. he file has information stored in the ACDSee 14 database information ler File format Displays the file format LJ Category Appears if the file has been categorized a Shortcut Appears if the item is a shortcut to another file E Offline Appears if the file is stored on an offline device Excluded items Appears if the file has been excluded from the ACDSee 14 database Tagged items Appears if the file has been tagged z Untagged items Appears if the file has not been tagged 6 Auto rotate Appears if the file has been automatically rotated Edited Appears if the file has been edited Maximizing the File List pane To make the most of your available screen space you can choose to maximize the File List pane and hide the rest of the Manage mode panes The only parts of the Manage mode window that remain visible are the File List pane and whichever toolbars you are currently using To maximize the File List pane 1 ClickView Maximize File List 2 Toshow only the File List pane and its toolbar click View Full Screen 3 Clickthe Close Full Screen button to return to Manage mode Browsing using the Folders pane The Folders pane displays a directory tree of all the folders on your computer similar to Windows Explorer You can select one or more folders in the Folders pane to display their contents in the File List pane You can also use the Folders pane to create shortcuts to your favorite files folders or applications
225. he sync works in one direction images from your computer are uploaded to your ACDSeeOnline com account Set selected folders to Sync to Web and have all files in these folders upload to your ACDSeeOnline com pages whenever you click Sync to Web To set a folder to automatically Sync to Web i 2 3 4 5 6 In Online mode click Login Login to your account Click the Transfer tab In the Folders panein the bottom half of the screen right click a folder and select Set as Sync to Web Folder In the Set up Sync to Web folder dialog box set the options as described below Click OK a can alsoset Sync to Web folders by clicking File Manage Sync to Web Folders To run Sync to Web 1 Zi In Transfer on the right side along the screen split click Sync to Web Click OK To edit a folder s Sync to Web settings 177 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Transfer in the Folders pane in the bottom half of the screen right click a Sync to Web folder and select Edit Sync to Web Folder 2 IntheEdit Sync to Web Folder dialog box set the options as described below 3 Click OK Sync to Web Folder options Upload Type Use the drop down list to select one of the following Upload Original with associated data Uploads images in their current file format including any associated files such as those containing metadata This option is the best for images you want to archive Upload Original as JPG Converts the imag
226. hierarchy of categories in the Categories tab of the Properties pane Select the Categories tab in the Properties pane to create rename delete and move your categories To create a category 1 Doone of the following Right click a category in the Organize pane and then select New Category In Manage mode click Edit Set Categories New Category 2 Selectone of the following Createa new top level category Createa sub category within the current selection 3 If you are creating a sub category select a top level or parent category from the drop down list If you right clicked a category in the Organize pane the new sub category will be added below that category by default 4 Typeaname for the new category in the Name field 5 Click OK When you create a new top level category you can select an icon to help identify the category The Icon drop down only _ appears if the Show Icons check box is selected on the Organize page of the Options dialog box In Manage mode click Tools Options and then select Organize Manage Categories To manage your categories Select a category in the Organize pane and do one of the following Tomove the category drag it to the new location Toedit the category right click the selected category and select Edit Category Todelete the category right click the selected category and select Delete 43 ACDSee 14 User Guide Create Category sets If you have a
227. ifies the size of the swirl effect Strength Specifies the strength and direction of the swirl Higher values create a clockwise swirl while negative values create a counter clockwise swirl Focus Specifies the concentration of the swirl Higher values concentrate the effect on the center of the swirl while lower values spread the swirl across the image Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Swirl direction Specifies the direction of the swirl Select one or both of the following Swirl horizontally Moves the swirl towards the top and bottom of the image Swirl vertically Moves the swirl towards the right and left sides of the image Applying the Threshold effect You can use the Threshold effect to create a black and white image You can save your options as a preset for future use To apply the Threshold effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Threshold 3 OntheThreshold tab set the options as described below 4 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Threshold options Threshold This slider determines which pixels become black and which ones become white in the black and white image Any pixels that are brighter than the selected threshold w
228. ile is saved in the same folder and is played when the imageis viewed To record and add an audio file to an image 111 ACDSee 14 User Guide oN Dw Do one of the following Selectan image in Manage mode Open an imagein View mode Click Tools Image Audio Edit In the Edit Audio dialog box select or change the Record sound settings options as described below Click Record and do one of the following Useamicrophone and record a sound Play audio from an audio player on your computer Click Record to stop the recording Click Save As to save the audio file In the Save Sound File dialog box type a name in the File name field and then click Save Click OK Record sound settings options Capture device Specifies which of your computer s devices you want to record the audio Input format Determines which sample rate and audio type are used to record the sound The formats displayed depend on the sound card you have installed on your computer Overwrite Replaces the recorded audio from the Start marker slider location Mix Combines the recording with the existing audio file Insert using start Inserts the recording at the start marker location Drag the Start marker slider to select a position marker Append to sound Adds the recording to the existing audio file file Replace sound file Replaces the entire audio file with the new recording Selecting part of an image You can use the Select tool in View
229. ile or files You can set or change the Read Only and Hidden properties of a file or folder and view a summary of any EXIF information contained in a file Embedding ACDSee Metadata into files 1 If you have metadata in your files and they are copied moved or renamed outside of ACDSee 14 the link between the file 27 and the database will be broken but you can rebuild the database using the embedded data in the file t ACDSee 14 uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file Only some file formats and file extensions support XMP Theseinclude GIF JPEG DNG PNG and TIF In the case of these file formats the ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee 14 and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata For formats that currently do not support XMP including RAW PSD ABR the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder as its file Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself you need to rename or move them together or you could lose the ACDSee Metadata permanently 49 ACDSee 14 User Guide Using the Map pane The map pane allows you to add and view photo locations on the map Use the map to select groups of files for further workflow steps and select photos for display in View mode The locations of files are displayed in the Map pane based on the latitude and longitude information in the file properties If you have a Ca
230. ill become white and any pixels that are darker than the threshold will become black Applying a Topography effect You can use the Topography effect to change the details of your images into contour lines You can save your options as a preset for future use To apply a Topography effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Topography 3 Onthe Topographic Map tab drag the Rounding slider to adjust the amount of curve in the contour lines 4 Drag the Number of lines slider to specify how many contour lines you want to add 157 ACDSee 14 User Guide 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Water effect You can usethe Water effect to insert an expanse of water below the subject of a photo and to display a reflection of the subject in the water You can control the position of the water below the subject For example you can position the water below a person s chin or below their waist You can also control the appearance of ripples in the water and how dark or light the water appears You can save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Water effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Water 3 On the Water tab set the options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane
231. image Adding a vignette You can use the Vignette effect to add a frame around a subject such as a person or a bouquet of flowers You can change the focal pointin the portrait You can also control the appearance of the border You can save your options as a presetfor use at another time To apply a Vignette effect 1 2 3 In Edit mode in the Add group click Vignette Set the options as described below Do one of the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the tab Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tab P Click Reset to clear your changes and resetto default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 138 Vignette options Horizontal Vertical Clear zone Transition zone Stretch Shape Show outline Frame Frame settings Chapter 5 Edit mode Specifies the focal point of the portrait on the horizontal axis A value of 500 places the center in the middle of the photo Specifies the focal point of the portrait on the vertical axis A value of 500 places the center in the middle of the photo Specifies the size of the clear area around the focal pointin the portrait Drag the slider to the left to reduce the size of the clear area Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the clear area Specifies the width of the transition area between the clear zone and the frame Drag the slider to the left to narrow the transition area Drag the
232. in ACDSee 14 to edit share or view those files To use the Image Basket 1 Toopen the Image Basket in Manage mode click View Image Basket 2 IntheFile List pane select the files you want to add Drag the items to the Image Basket or right click a selected item and select Add to Image Basket 3 Toremove one or morefiles right click the file and then select Remove from Image Basket 4 Toremove all files right click the Image Basket and then select Clear Image Basket a can also add images to the Image Basket by dragging them from Windows Explorer Organizing Organizing and managing files in ACDSee 14 In addition to its browsing viewing and editing capabilities ACDSee 14 features integrated management tools you can use to organize and sort your images and media files These tools include batch functions tools that can alter or adjust multiple files at the same time category and rating systems and a powerful database to hold all of your important image information You can use the ACDSee 14 batch functions to convert the file format rotate resize rename and adjustthe time stamp or the exposure of a single image a group of images all at once With the category color label and rating systems you can create a virtual folder structure and use it to find related images and media files with a single click ACDSee 14 displays file properties and image information in an easily accessible Properties pane that you can use
233. in the Format field which activates when you select this option The folders are created as the sampleshows and the files are imported into the lowest folders on each date Separate folders by file s date Creates separate folders based on the individual file dates in the format selected from the Format drop down options Preserve folder names Preserves existing folder names when you use the From Disk option to import For example if you have a flash drive or CD containing images in a complex set of subfolders the whole folder tree is imported intact Format Displays date format options for the Nested folder options see above Sample Displays a sample of the nested folders that will be created using the current settings see above Backup to Backup destination Creates a backup set of files using an exact duplicate of the subfolders you have drop down list selected under Place in subfolders You can also do one of the following Click Browse and then navigate to an existing folder to use as a backup destination Click Browse and then Make New Folder to create a new folder as a backup destination While existing ACDSee metadata is included in the backup copy any __ Organize settings IPTC or ACDSee Metadata added during import will not be included 23 ACDSee 14 User Guide Rename files to Automatically rotate images Delete items from the source after import Advanced Organize settings Properties pane M
234. include GIF JPEG DNG PNG and TTF In the case of these file formats the ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee 14 and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata For formats that currently do not support XMP including RAW PSD ABR the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder as its file Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself you need to rename or move them together or you could lose the ACDSee Metadata permanently To copy or move files 1 Doone of the following Inthe File List pane select one or more files and then click Edit Copy To Folder or Move To Folder While viewing an image or media file in View mode click Edit Copy To Folder or Move To Folder 2 Inthe Copy To Folder or Move To Folder dialog box do one of the following Select the Folders tab and locate the folder on your hard drive where you want to place the files Selectthe History tab and select a folder from the list of recently accessed folders Select Create Folder and enter the name of a new folder 3 Inthe Overwriting duplicate files drop down list select one of the following options to specify how ACDSee 14 should handle overwriting files Ask Prompts you for confirmation when overwriting a file Rename Prompts you to rename a file Replace Overwrites any file with the same file name and extension Skip Cancels th
235. ings then select your brother s name from the list of photographers All images captured by your brother will display Below are some tips for searching with auto categories 64 Chapter 3 Manage mode Identifying commonly used search categories If there are certain auto categories in the Photo Properties grouping that you use frequently you can save time by adding them to the Commonly Used grouping Some Photo Properties groupings are available in the Commonly Used grouping by default You can add as many auto categories as you want to the Commonly Used grouping and you can easily remove any grouping from the Commonly Used grouping when you no longer need them To add an auto category grouping to the Commonly Used grouping 1 Expandthe Photo Properties grouping 2 Right click the auto categories grouping that you want to add to the Commonly Used grouping and select Add to Commonly Used The grouping is added to the Commonly Used grouping It remains visible in the Photo Properties grouping as well To remove an auto category grouping from the Commonly Used grouping 1 Expandthe Commonly Used grouping 2 Right click the auto categories grouping that you want to remove from the Commonly Used grouping and select Remove from Commonly Used The grouping is removed from the Commonly Used grouping Refining your auto categories search You can refine your auto categories search by selecting more than one auto category For exampl
236. int reject review or sharpen and then click acolor label in the Organize pane to quickly display all of the files assigned to that label Or use them in combination with the Group by or Filter By features to refine your list Color labels like tagging categories and ratings are a way to set aside organize and group your photos without moving them into different folders 9 If the Properties pane or Organize pane is not visible in Manage mode click View Properties or View Organize Quickly Assign a Color Label by using the Hover Icons in Thumbnail view 1 Hover over athumbnail to display the gray label line 2 Click gray label line to make your selection 46 Chapter 3 Manage mode Example of hovering over a thumbnail to click and select a color label co Ae IMG_5331urs IMG_5331 JPG P ai hover icons display in Thumbnail view only Assign and Search Color Labels in the Organize pane The Organize pane allows you to both assign and search color labels To assign a color label to a file in the Organize pane 1 In Manage mode do one of the following Selectthe files you want to color label and then click the radio button next to the color label in the Organize pane Drag selected files to a color label in the Organize pane Drag the color label from the Organize pane to selected files Right click the files and then click Set Label and click the color in the fly out To search all images assigned to a color
237. int utility to create and print contact sheets complete with headers footers and captions specific to each image As you change the options in the Print dialog box you can view a dynamically updated preview of the image and its position on the page You can adjust the output size print multiple copies of each image and change the orientation of the images on each page To print a single image 1 In View mode select the image you want to print 2 ClickFile Print Image 3 Under Format choose a print size 4 On the Printer Options tab specify the printer you want to use the paper size the number of copies you want the range of pages that you want to print and image resolution 5 OnthePage Settingstab specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths and specify the number of prints of each photo 6 Add captions headers or footers 7 Click Print To print all images 1 In View mode click File Print All Images 2 Under Print layout do one of the following Select Full page and then choose a print size from the Format list Select Contact sheet and then set the Contact sheet format options to define the appearance of your contact sheet Select Layout and then choose one of the available layout options 3 Onthe Printer Options tab specify the printer you want to use the paper size the number of copies you want the range of pages that you want to print and image resolution 113 ACDSee 1
238. ions 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click CD DVD Management 3 On the CD DVD Management page set or change any of the options described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 CD DVD Management options Burn Basket Show Burn Displays the Welcome step in the Burn Basket Wizard Basket Wizard welcome step Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box where you can change the folder where Burn Basket files are stored Photo Disc Use disc Attempts to identify a Photo Disc by its volume label This setting is recommended Identification volume label if you are working with multi session Photo Discs Use disc Attempts to identify a Photo Disc by its serial number This setting is preferred serial when working with single session Photo Discs or importing or converting Photo number Discs from a previous version of ACDSee 14 Setting the Properties pane options You can use the Options dialog box to customize the information available on the Metadata tab in the Properties pane To customize the Metadata tab in the Properties pane 190 Chapter 7 Options and configuration 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options In the Options dialog box click Properties Pane On the Properties Pane page hide the Tagged Rating and Color Labels by deselecting the corresponding check box Hide the Categories by deselecting the check box Click Manage Metadata Views to open the Choose Met
239. isted You can refine your results by choosing to display only those files that are assigned to all of the specified categories To toggle between behaviors right click the bar above the categories you selected and select Match Any or Match All Tips for selective browsing When you add a criteria to the Selective Browsing pane you are indicating that the files you want to browse must have that attribute For example if you select a folder in the Folders pane then ACDSee 14 displays only files in that folder If you select a rating in the Organize pane ACDSee 14 displays only files assigned to that rating You can combine criteria to refine your selective browsing even further For example if you select a category and a date range then ACDSee 14 displays only those files that belong to both the category and date range you selected ACDSee 14 does not display items that fall within the date range unless they are also assigned tothe correct category and does not display files assigned to that category unless they also match the date range Hiding the Selective Browsing pane You can usethe Auto Hide feature to automatically hide the Selective Browsing pane and increase space for the File List pane When the pane is set to auto hide it rolls away when you click outside it leaving only an edge displayed You can access the pane again by moving the cursor over the edge Searching with auto categories Do you have hundreds possibly thousands
240. it or add ACDSee Metadata to your files ACDSee 14 automatically adds the new data to its database If you have the Display embed ACDSee metadata reminder check box selected in the Options dialog box click Tools Options Database next time you close ACDSee 14 the Embed ACDSee Metadata in Files dialog box opens and offers to embed the new data into the changed files themselves Embedding ACDSee Metadata in the files as well is a safe way to back up this data and make it easier to retrieve if you should need to For example once you have assigned ACDSee Metadata to a file the file is linked to the database If the fileis moved using Windows Explorer or any application other than ACDSee 14 the link will be broken However if you have embedded this data in the file and the link is broken you can still retrieve the ACDSee Metadata using the embedded data in the files You can use ACDSee 14 to rename move or copy the file even to another computer and the embedded ACDSee Metadata will transfer with the file To embed ACDSee Metadata in a file when you are prompted 1 Dooneof the following Toembed data in files that are on a network select the Include Network Drives check box To write the information to a sidecar file if the file format does not support embedding inside the file select the Write sidecar files for formats that do not support embedded XMP Toaccept the current selection in the dialog and have these options happen a
241. ize for the crop window 1 Typethe desired crop window proportions into the Width and Height spin boxes 2 Inthe Units drop down list select a unit of measurement 3 Usethe Dots per inch spin box to specify a resolution To constrain the crop window to a ratio 1 Selectthe Constrain cropping proportion check box 2 Selecta ratio from the drop down list and select or clear the Landscape check box to toggle the crop window between landscape and portrait orientation 3 Doone of the following Position your cursor over the edge of the crop window until it changes into a double pointed arrow and then drag the edge of the crop window to the desired size Usethe Width or Height spin box to specify a dimension for one side of the crop window ACDSee 14 automatically resizes the other dimension based on the ratio you selected Resizing an image You can resize an image by adjusting its dimensions in pixels percentage or actual print size While resizing you can also choose an aspect ratio and aresampling filter to adjust the resized image s appearance You can save your options as a preset for future use To resize an image 1 In Edit mode in the Geometry group click Resize 2 Select one of the following resize options Pixels resizes the image to specific dimensions in pixels Percent Resizes the image toa percentage of the original Actual Print size in Resizes the image to match a specific output size Click the d
242. just the thumbnail dimensions and reposition the pane anywhere on your screen You can also display information other than the histogram below the image in the Preview pane by setting the Preview options 9 If you use dual monitors you can move the Preview pane to your second monitor so that you can see a large preview of your images To open or close the Preview pane 37 ACDSee 14 User Guide Click View Preview Rotating images You can rotate images in Manage and View modes using the Rotate icons in the bottom toolbar P When you rotate unedited JPEG images ACDSee 14 performs a lossless rotation To rotate images 1 In Manage mode or View mode select one or more images 2 Clickthe Rotate Left or Rotate Right icon in the bottom toolbar Rotate icons Rotate Left Rotates the image 90 to the left Rotate Right Rotates the image 90 to the right Comparing images You can use the Compare Images feature to compare a group of images The tool highlights both the similarities and the differences in the properties metadata and pixel intensity levels of images you select You can save your preferred images to a new location on your hard drive or tag images you would like selected in Manage mode and then delete move rename or alter the images To compare images 1 IntheFile List pane select the images that you want to compare 2 Click Tools Compare Images Up to four images display in the Compare Images Viewer 3
243. l button and use the tools as described below Select Crop straightened image if you want to crop the image after it is straightened Select Preserve straightened image if you do not want to crop the straightened image Select the color that you would like to display behind the straightened image fromthe Fill color drop down 161 ACDSee 14 User Guide Select Show grid overlay to display a grid over the image You may find that the grid helps you straighten the image and understand how the image will be cropped 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Rotate icons Horizontal Click on the horizontal icon and then use the cursor to draw a line on the image that you wantto setas the Ter horizontal line E Vertical Click on the vertical icon and then use the cursor to draw a line on the image that you want to set as the vertical line Flipping an image You can flip an image both vertically and horizontally in Edit To flip an image 1 In Edit mode in the Geometry group click Flip 2 Dooneor both of the following Selectthe Horizontal Flip check box Selectthe Vertical Flip check box 3 Dooneof the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool Click Cancel to discard
244. label Click the color label in the Organize pane to display all corresponding files in the File List pane To select all images assigned to a color label in the file list Clickthe Select drop down above the File List pane and click Select by Color Label to choose a color All files assigned to that color label will be selected within the File List pane 9 Clickthe Home button at any time to return to your unfiltered File List Assign Names to Color Labels You can assign names to color labels in the Labels settings The name assigned to a label is added to the photo s metadata see note below To Assign Names to your color labels 1 Inthe Organize pane click the Labels settings button and select Edit Label Sets 2 Renamethe color labels in the dialog box and click OK 3 Youwill havethe option to Save over the current label set or Save Asa new one ACDSee 14 uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file Only some file formats and file extensions support XMP Theseinclude GIF JPEG DNG PNG and TIF In the case of these file formats the ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee 14 and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata For formats that currently do not support XMP including RAW PSD ABR the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder as its file Because a sidecar file is separate fromthe file itself you need to renam
245. lay theme 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Manage Mode 3 IntheDisplay theme drop down list select a theme 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 203 Chapter 8 Shortcuts Chapter 8 Shortcuts Manage mode keyboard shortcuts You can usethe following keyboard shortcuts while working in Manage mode There are also shortcuts that can be used specifically in the Calendar pane 9 To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print 205 ACDSee 14 User Guide This shortcut backslash grave accent ALT LEFT ARROW ALT RIGHT ARROW ALT 0 to 5 ALT B ALT C ALT COMMA ALT ENTER ALT F4 ALT G ALT 1 ALT K ALT M ALT O ALT PERIOD ALT Q ALT SHIFT F ALT W ALT X BACKSPACE CTRL 0 to5 CTRL backslash CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL I CTRL INSERT CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L CTRL M CTRL N CTRL O CTRL P 206 Has this result Tags or untags the image Toggles image audio on or off Returns to the previous folder you browsed in the File List pane Returns to the folder you last moved back from in the File List pane Assigns a color label to the currently selected item Press ALT O to remove a color label Adds the selected items to the Burn Basket Copies one or more selected files to a folder you specify Opens the previous tab in
246. layed then replaces the poorer quality thumbnail once itis ready Displays thumbnails of a folder s contents on the folder icon in the File List pane Selectthis option if you want ACDSee 14 to remember the sort settings that you used in specific folders Activates hot tracking when holding the CTRL key When selected you can hot track update the contents of the Preview and Properties panes without changing your file selection by holding the CTRL key and moving your cursor over the File List pane Activates or deactivates animation for some features as they close or open For example group headers Shows image files folders media files and archive files in the File List Apply filtering criteria Show hidden files and folders Show THM files Show XMP files Highlight image files Pop ups Configure file information Show the Windows Explorer shell context menu as the default right click menu Shows any of the following that you select and hides any that are not selected Show image files Show folders Show media files Show archive files Shows system and other files and that are normally hidden for safety Shows Canon THM files in the File Fist Shows XMP sidecar files in the File List Don t highlight image files Use a single color to highlight image files Use multiple colors to highlight image files Mouse cursor hover activates pop ups lt SHIFT gt key activates pop
247. layed in ACDSee 14 EXIF orientation Status bar date Specifies the date to display in the status bar for a selected file Date Time output format Select one of the following Default system format Uses the default system format when displaying the date and time in information overlays Custom format Uses the specified format to display the date and time in all information overlays Select a format for both Date and Time from the drop down lists Setting the Manage mode options You can use the Options dialog box to set various options for Manage mode including the default start folder To set Manage mode options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Manage Mode 3 Onthe Manage mode page set or change the options as described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 181 ACDSee 14 User Guide Manage mode options Default start folder Remember from Opens Manage mode in the same folder that was open the last time you used previous session ACDSee 14 and automatically applies any browsing criteria you were using Home folder Always opens Manage mode to the specified Home folder Click the Browse button to locate a starting folder on your hard drive Taskbar Notification Show icon in Displays the ACDSee 14 icon in the Taskbar Notification area area Taskbar Notification area Continue running Continues to run ACDSee 14 in the background after you exitthe applicatio
248. lected Send using your default email client the wizard adds your images and email information to a new email message You can edit the message and then send it as you normally would If you selected Send through an SMTP server in the wizard enter the email address you want to send the email to a subject for the email and a message Click Next When the images have been sent click Finish to close the wizard Some Internet based email applications such as Hotmail and Yahoo free accounts do not support SMTP and cannot be _ used with the Send Email Wizard For others such as Gmail Yahoo upgraded accounts and AOL you must configure the account for POP SMTP To learn how to configure these types of email accounts visit their specific websites and search for SMTP Creating a desktop screensaver You can create a desktop screensaver using your own images You can set the screensaver options to adjust how long each imageis displayed set the background color apply transition effects and add header or footer text To create a screensaver 1 Za 3 4 5 In Manage mode in the File List pane select a group of images and then click Tools Configure Screensaver In the ACDSee Screensaver dialog box click Add to browse for more images to add to your screensaver or select images you do not want to include and click Remove Click Configure specify the options as described below and then click OK To automatically use
249. lection Click Invert to swap your selection to the opposite area from the original usually the outer part of the image Fromthe Wand Type drop down list select one of the following Brightness Selects pixels similar in brightness to the area of the image you clicked Color Selects pixels similar in hue to the area of the image you clicked RGB Selects pixels with red green and blue combination similar to the area of the image you clicked Click Done You return to Edit where you can select an editing tool or a special effect to apply to the selection To use the Marquee 1 2 3 4 5 Clickthe Marquee to select it Select either Rectangle or Ellipse as the shape for your marquee Clickand drag to draw the selection on the image Do any of the following Toadd to an existing marquee hold down SHIFT and drag another marquee that includes any part of the original selection line Release the mouse and the selection now includes the additional area Toadd multiple marquees to your selection hold down SHIFT and drag as many as you want As long as none of the edges touch you can continue adding areas to the selection Tosubtract from an existing marquee hold down CTRL and drag another marquee that intersects with the one you want to reduce Release the mouse and any part that was inside the new marquee is removed Click Done You return to Edit where you can select an editing tool or a special effect t
250. lections tool Selective Browsing SendPix albums Sepia effect sharing archives contact sheets emailing images HTML albums PDFs screensavers SendPix albums slideshows VCDs video files with ACDSee sharpen Sheet Metal effect Shift effect shortcuts Manage mode mouse View mode Slant effect slideshows auto advance configuring sharing Sobel effect Solarize effect sorting files 60 61 8 37 37 110 112 125 63 81 153 167 80 79 68 77 75 73 81 73 77 77 66 171 153 154 205 211 208 154 103 70 73 155 155 36 sound adding to images 141 recording 111 Stained Glass effect 155 start folder default 182 starting ACDSee 4 Sunspot effect 156 supported file formats 217 Swirl effect 156 switching modes 6 sync uploading images 177 sync to web 177 synchronizing files between folders 59 View mode to a folder 105 system requirements 225 T tagging images 55 text adding to an image 131 132 adding to pages printing 84 displaying on images in View mode 104 lists of files 95 theme color 182 203 Threshold effect 157 thumbnails rebuilding 99 setting display options 185 setting ratio options 186 views 33 timestamp 58 timestamps 58 TiVo 82 toolbars 199 Topography effect truecolor TWAIN about importing photos U undo redo USB mass storage device about user interface v video files creating extracting frames playing View mode auto advan
251. ll open in Quick View which is like a pared down version of View mode in ACDSee 14 With Quick View you can quickly scroll through your images temporarily rotate images and zoomin and out If you are viewing a particularly appealing image in Quick View you can also set the image as your desktop wallpaper or print the image You can easily switch from Quick View to ACDSee 14 You also havethe option to open an image in Manage View or Edit mode If you are accustomed to using keyboard and mouse shortcuts in View mode you can use most of those shortcuts in Quick View as well To open an image in Quick View 1 With ACDSee 14 closed double click an image For example double click the image in Windows Explorer or in an email message 2 Usethe viewing options described below to view the image 106 Chapter 4 View mode ACDSee Quick View viewing options X b 2 G Previous View the previous image Next View the next image Rotate Left Rotate the image to the left Rotate Right Rotate the image to the right Zoom In View the image at a higher magnification Zoom Out View the image at a lower magnification Delete Move the image to the computer s Recycle Bin To open the image in ACDSee 14 Click Manage View Develop or Edit mode To set an image as your desktop wallpaper 1 2 Click Previous or Next until the image that you want to make your desktop wallpaper displays in Quick View Click Tools Set Wall
252. load 1920 x 1440 JPG Converts the image to JPG and sets the size to 1920 x 1440 This option is the best for high quality JPGs Upload 1024 x 768 JPG Converts the image to JPG and sets the size to 1024 x 768 This option is the best for images you want to view on a Netbook and results in the fastest upload Do one of the following to select an image to upload Click and drag an image into the top part of the screen to upload it to your ACDSeeOnline com account To select multiple images press the SHIFT or the CTRL key and click on the images to select them You can also click and drag your cursor to select multiple images Drag a folder of your images to the top part of the screen Select images and click the up arrow icon beside Transfer Manager or click Sync to Web to upload all the images in the Sync to Web folders When upload is complete images are displayed in the order they were uploaded Overlay icons indicate the file type and if the image has been developed or edited You can upload a folder with sub folders Online mode respects folder hierarchy when uploading a folder to your ACDSeeOnline com account Setting folders to automatically Sync to Web P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline com tab then click Help If you want to upload all the images from a folder on your computer to ACDSeeOnline com and keep the folder synced as you add new images you can set your folder to automatically Sync to Web T
253. m ALT O ALT U ALT X ALT SHIFT U CTRL CTRL A CTRL F8 CTRL F12 CTRL SHIFT D CTRL SHIFT I CTRL SHIFT 1 CTRL SHIFT 2 CTRL SHIFT 3 CTRL SHIFT 4 CTRL SHIFT 5 CTRL W DELETE ENTER F2 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Num Num SHIFT ALT A SHIFT ALT C SHIFT ALT T Resulting action Sets selected folder as an Upsync folder Downloads selected files and folders Displays Properties pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode Group forward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode Group backward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays Options dialog Uploads selected files and folders Removes files from the image basket Upsyncs all files Selects tagged files Selects all files and folders Changes the view in the upper screen in Transfer mode to thumbnail view of images in your account Changes the view in the upper screen in Transfer mode to a detailed view of images in your account Clears image selection Inverts image selection Displays Folders pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays Organize pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays Search pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays Calendar pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays the image basket Closes ACDSee 14 Deletes files or folders Opens the selected tem in View mode Renames files a
254. m the Templates drop down list Replaces any number signs in the template with sequential numeric characters Replaces any number signs in the template name with sequential alphabetic characters Specifies the first letter or number of the sequence Inserts file specific information into the file name template Position the cursor in the Template field and then click Insert Metadata to open the Choose Property dialog box Select the metadata you want to insert and then click OK Specifies upper or lower case for file names and file format extensions Search and Selectthe Use Search and Replace to rename files check box to replace certain letters or words in the file Replace names You can replace spaces with underscores or change upper case letters to lower case and combine your changes with any naming template Search for Replace with Case sensitive Identifies the characters you want to replace in the file names Identifies the characters to use in place of the original text Indicates whether you want to limit the search to the same case you typed in the Search for field Advanced Select any of the Advanced Options to adjust the behavior of the Batch Rename tool Options Automatically close wizard when finished Save current settings as defaults Warn about extension changes Automatically resolve naming conflicts Managing database information About the ACDSee 14 database Closes the Batch Rename
255. mat Encode plug ins allow ACDSee 14 to save or convert images to many different file formats The files that you can edit and save with ACDSee 14 depend on which encoding plug ins areinstalled on your computer Archive Allows ACDSee 14 to display and save archives of many different file formats The archives that you can view and create with ACDSee 14 depend on which archive plug ins are installed on your computer Camera Allows ACDSee 14 to browse images on your digital camera and transfer them toa folder on your hard drive Command Extension Adds functionality to ACDSee 14 For example there is a plug in that you can use to share your images over the Internet Pane Extension Adds a paneto ACDSee 14 where you can perform tasks like order prints of your digital images We cannot ensure the quality of plug ins that are not certified by ACD Systems As with any other piece of software you 27 are trusting that the plug in is free of viruses and that the company that produced the plug in is trustworthy 99 ACDSee 14 User Guide Managing plug ins The Plug in Settings dialog box displays a list of all the ACD Systems plug ins installed on your computer You can also usethe Plug in Settings dialog box to control which plug ins ACDSee 14 uses To access the Plug in Settings dialog box In Manage mode click Tools Plug in Settings Disabling a plug in You can disable a plug in in the Plug in Settings dialog box so that ACDS
256. mera with geotagging capabilities the geographic location is automatically conveyed visually on the map You can also add map coordinates to files by dragging them directly onto the map Geotagged images are indicated on the map with pins You can click a pin on the map to select files within a geographic location for viewing or processing If your geotagged image pin is not displayed on the map try using the keyboard shortcut F5 torefresh the map aA following file formats can be added to the map JPG TIFF RAW DNG and PNG 9 ACDSee Pro automatically adds file information including geotags to the database as you browse However if you have a large number of files you may want to catalog those files first to speed up the loading time for the pins on the map To catalog your files click Tools Database Catalog Files To open the Map pane In Manage mode click View Map CTRL SHIFT M The Map pane appears above the File List pane in Manage mode by default You can drag the Map title bar to a new location and float the pane or dock it in another position like the other movable panes in ACDSee 14 9 You can toggle the Map on and off with the keyboard shortcut CTRL SHIFT M in Manage mode To add files to the map by dragging 1 In Manage mode drag one or more files onto the map 2 ClickSave All in the top left corner of the map Ideally images should be geotagged prior to processing If an image is geotagged after it has been e
257. mode to select a rectangular area of an image You can then zoom in on the selection copy the selection save the selection as a new image printthe selection and usethe selection as the desktop wallpaper To select part of an image 1 2 3 4 112 Clickthe Select Tool icon Drag the cursor across the image to create a marquee Right click inside the marquee and select one of the options described below To cancel the selection click an area of the image outside of the marquee Chapter 4 View mode Selection options Zoom To Zooms in on the selected area Copy Copies the selected area to the Clipboard Save Crop As Saves the selected area as anew image Print Prints the selected area Wallpaper Creates desktop wallpaper using the selected area and centers it on your desktop shrinking it to fit if Centered necessary Wallpaper Tiled Creates a tiled desktop wallpaper pattern using the selected area Viewing file properties in View mode You can view an image s properties in View mode and edit the information in the Properties pane To view an image s properties In View mode click View Properties For more information about the Properties pane and adding or editing ACDSee metadata see Using the Properties pane Printing images in View mode With the ACDSee 14 print utility you can print your images on any size of paper in any orientation and at any resolution your printer can support You can also use the pr
258. multiple resolutions as separate pages 1 24 bpp including HAM and HAM8 multiple pages and animations not supported 48 bit support 48 bit support JFIF and Adobe CMYK Reads both the full image and the embedded thumbnail All sub types supported Up to 3072x2048 resolution 16BASE All sub types supported All sub types supported Can read all pages Ghostscript 8 0 required 24 bpp All sub types supported First page only PSD PSP Quick Time RSB SGI TGA TIFF WBMP WMF XBM XPM Adobe PhotoShop Document Paint Shop Pro gtif qif qfi Fujifilm RAW Sun Raster Pentax RAW Leica RAW Contax RAW Casio RAW Red Storm image format SGI Image Format Targa TGA Tag Image File Format Wireless Bitmap Windows Metafile Format X bitmap X pixmap Image write support formats BMP GIF IFF JP2 JPEG PCX PNG PSD RSB SGI WBMP TGA TIFF Windows Bitmap Graphics Interchange Format EA Amiga Interchange File Format JPEG2000 JPEG JFIF ZSoft Publishers Paintbrush Portable Network Graphics Adobe PhotoShop Document Sun Raster Red Storm image format SGI Image Format Wireless Bitmap Targa TGA Tag Image File Format Chapter 9 File formats RGB grayscale duotone paletted and bi level Lab color interpreted as grayscale only Version 5 and version 6 Support for Apple QuickTime still image codecs Uncompressed and RLE compressed All sub types are supported 8 32
259. n in Taskbar You can restart ACDSee 14 by clicking the icon in the Taskbar Notification Notification area area on exit Run ACDSee in Starts ACDSee 14 in the background when you turn on your computer You Taskbar can open ACDSee 14 by clicking the icon in the Taskbar Notification area Notification area when system starts Display theme Specifies the color scheme to use in ACDSee 14 Clear path history on Clears the list of recently accessed folders whenever you exit ACDSee 14 exit Show full path in title Displays the full path of an image in the ACDSee 14 title bar bar Error Reporting Selectthis option if you do not want to see a system error report if there is an error in ACDSee 14 Setting the Quick Search options You can usethe Quick Search options to refine your search To set Quick Search options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Manage Mode Quick Search 3 On the Quick Search page set or change any of the Quick Search options described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 Quick Search options Include file names Searches for file and folder names that begin with the search term Include categories Searches for categories that match the search term and returns any files assigned to those categories Subcategories are not included Include contents of Searches for folder names that begin with the search term and returns the contents of those
260. n As a result multiple resizes can change the overall color and appearance of the image If your first resize attempt does not produce the desired result click the Undo button Avoid increasing the size of an image Increasing image size makes the image s pixels more apparent causing a grainy effect Exposure Lighting tools Adjusting image exposure You can usethe Exposure tool to adjust an image s exposure contrast and fill light You can save your options as a preset for future use _ To adjust the image exposure in an image 1 In Edit mode in the Exposure Lighting group click Exposure 2 Setthe options as described below 3 Doone of the following Click Apply to apply your changes and set options on another tab Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and resetto default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 164 Chapter 5 Edit mode Image Exposure options Exposure Drag the slider tothe rightto increase the exposure or drag to the leftto decrease exposure Auto Clickthe Auto button to automatically adjust the exposure level Contrast Drag the slider tothe rightto increase contrast or drag to the left to decrease contrast Fill Light Drag slider to the right to increase the amount of light in the darkest areas of the image or drag to the left to decrease fill ligh
261. n key to move to the next photo The cursor remains in the same field of the Properties pane for each photo allowing you to quickly enter content for the same field for multiple photos Enter content into the field and again press Page Down to move tothe next photo Continue Step 3 until complete a do not need to click the Apply button when using this shortcut a can use the Page Up key to move back to the previous photo Removing IPTC keywords from Auto Categories You can remove unused IPTC keywords from the ACDSee 14 database Once removed the IPTC keywords will no longer display under Keywords IPTC in the Photo Properties Auto Categories list of the Organize Pane This process also applies for the Supplemental Categories field This field is only visible if selected from the Choose _ Metadata to Display dialog box found under Tools Options Properties Pane To remove IPTC keywords and supplemental categories 1 Zo 3 In Manage mode select any image which supports IPTC If the Properties pane is not already displayed click View Properties To ensure the image is writable do the following Selectthe File tab and check to see if there is a check mark in Read only Ifthere is a check mark the image is not writable Deselect the Read only check box to make the file writable In the IPTC section of the Metadata tab click the keyword picker button oe beside the Keywords field In the IPTC Keywords
262. n s Help file 1 Inthe Plug in Settings dialog box select one of the Plug in tabs 2 Selecta plug in in the Plug ins list 100 Chapter 3 Manage mode 3 Clickthe Plug in Help button 101 Chapter 4 View mode Chapter 4 View mode View mode is the main viewing component of the user interface Le Picture 065 jpg ACDSee 14 ee n fem Filmstrip lt Previous Next gt Y In View mode you can Click hold drag to pan around large images Press the keyboard shortcut F to toggle in and out of full screen view Zoomin or out on your images View images in a slideshow Play video and audio files and add audio to your image files Add captions to your images Organize files by tagging them adding categories keywords and other metadata Working with images in View mode Viewing images with Auto Advance You can usethe Auto Advance feature to create a quick slideshow preview of a group of images or all the images in a folder 103 ACDSee 14 User Guide To start Auto Advance 1 Open a group of images in View mode Click View Auto Advance Options In the Auto Advance dialog box set the options as described below Click Start To advance to the next image press Space Toreturn to the previous image press Backspace N 2 WR WN To stop or restart Auto Advance press Pause Auto Advance options Sequence Determines the order that you want to display your images Select
263. n the table below Do one of the following Click Apply to add the text to your image and keep the Text tool open so you can add more text The Text tool creates a new empty marquee and you can return to step 3 in the list above Click Done to add the text to your image and return to Edit If you still have an empty marquee open it will be discarded Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to Edit 131 ACDSee 14 User Guide Add Text options Bubble Text Settings Effect Settings Drop Shadow Settings Bevel Settings Talk Thought Stem Angle Thickness Length Fill Border Effect Distance Blur Opacity Angle Bevel Strength Elevation Angle Adding drawings to your image Encloses your text in a comic book text bubble with a pointed stem Encloses your text in a comic book text bubble with a dotted stem Specifies the direction of the text bubble stem Drag the arrow to adjust the angle Specifies thethickness of the text bubble border Specifies the length of the text bubble stem Specifies the background color of the text bubble Click the arrow to selecta color Specifies the color of the text bubble border Click the arrow to select a color Specifies the effect you want to apply to your text Each effect has different options that control its appearance Drag the sliders to adjust the appearance of the text Specifies the distance between the drop shadow and the te
264. n to the selected image Preview audio and Previews media files as you select them in the File List pane video clips Autoplay audio and Automatically starts playing audio and video files in the Preview pane video clips Instant image Displays an instant preview that improves in quality as the image is decoded preview Setting the Folders pane options You can customize the Folders pane by showing or hiding the Easy Select bar displaying archives and identifying excluded folders To customize the Folders pane 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Folders 3 Onthe Folders page set or change the options as described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 Folders pane options Easy Select Show Easy Select Displays the Easy Select bar in the Folders pane which you can use to select multiple folders Enable Easy Select Displays a tool tip when you place your cursor over the Easy Select bar tooltip Folder display Show archives in Lists archive files in the Folders pane Folder Pane Confirm drag amp drop Prompts you for confirmation of folder movements within the Folders move within folder pane views Show overlay for Displays an overlay icon on folders that are excluded from the ACDSee 14 excluded folders database Setting the Organize pane options You can customize the Organize pane to specify which confirmations you want to be prompted for while worki
265. nd folders Refreshes the view Displays thumbnails and details of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays filmstrip view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays thumbnails of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays tile view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays icon view of folders and file types in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays a list of folder and file types in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays a detailed view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode Sort forward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode Sort backward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode Displays ACDSeeOnline com mode Copies URL Displays Transfer mode Online mode mouse shortcuts Use the following mouse shortcuts in Transfer mode 214 9 To print this page for easy reference right click and select Print Shortcut Click drag CTRL click SHIFT click Resulting action Selects a group of images Selects images you click on Selects a group of images Chapter 8 Shortcuts 215 Chapter 9 File formats Chapter 9 File formats Supported file formats ACDSee 14 supports over 50 different file formats The files that you can view or edit and save with ACDSee 14 depend on which file format support plug ins are installed on your computer Image formats Read supp
266. nd the modified pixel on the right 3 Tospecify the strength of the white balance adjustment move the slider Higher settings remove more of the unwanted color 4 Click Done to save your changes or click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the Edit pane If you are having difficulties achieving the desired effect try clicking an image area that is a different shade of white or gray P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 168 Chapter 5 Edit mode Adjusting color balance You can adjust an image s color values using the Color Balance tool You can save your options as a preset for future use To adjust an image s color 1 In Edit mode in the Color group select Color Balance 2 Adjustthe sliders as described in the table below 3 Dooneof the following Click Apply to apply your changes Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and resetto default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Color Balance options Saturation Adjusts the saturation of the image Drag the slider to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease saturation Hue Adjusts the hue of the image Drag the slider to the rightto increase or drag to the left to decrease hue Lightness Adjusts the image brightness Dr
267. ndomly selects the color of each noise pixel but more pixels match a defined color To define a color click the color picker and selecta color Noise placement Adds noise to image areas that closely match a defined color Select the Set color check box to enable noise placement and click the color picker to specify a color Random Seed Indicates the random placement of noise in an image When you use Add Noise tool ACDSee 14 places the noise pixels based on a random seed This makes the image noise different each time you use the Add Noise tool You can define a specific random seed to generate identical image noise To generate a new random seed click Random Seed 174 Chapter 6 Online mode Chapter 6 Online mode P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline com tab then click Help Edi You can use Online mode to upload your images to ACDSeeOnline com an image sharing and storage service available to ACDSee 14 users With Online mode and ACDSeeOnline com you can upload and browse through your online images without having to launch an Internet browser You need to create an ACDSeeOnline com account first before uploading your photos cd imagelibrary ACDSee 14 oz With ACDSeeOnline com you can Create your ACDSeeOnline com account Upload images Set privacy settings for your image folders Working in Online mode For help with ACDSeeOnline com clickthe ACDSeeOnline comtab then click Help
268. ng When a file has a rating the number appears on top of the thumbnail in the File List pane Color Labels Color labels can be used in many ways to help you organize your files You can use different colors to represent different stages of your workflow As you review your photos you can assign them tothe color labels and rename them accordingly Auto Categories Most digital cameras create and embed information about the file as you take a photo This information is called metadata and can include the name and model of the camera the file size shutter speed camera settings used in the shot and much more ACDSee 14 uses this information to create auto categories When you click on an auto category ACDSee 14 searches for images containing that metadata You can select one or more auto categories to find files for example photos of a certain size taken by a particular camera You can also add to this data using the Properties panes Saved Searches If you find yourself creating the same search criteria frequently you can save the search to use again later Saved searches appear atthetop of the Search pane but they also appear in the Organize pane for you to re run using a single click on the name or in the white check box of the Easy select bar To create a new saved search from the Organize pane 1 Inthe Saved Searches area of the Organize pane click the New saved search icon The Search pane opens 2 Enter your search criteria and th
269. ng with categories and choose whether to show the Easy Select bar To set the Organize pane options 188 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options OS Click OK Organize options Category deletion File removal Easy select Icons In the Options dialog box click Organize Confirm if category has assigned files Confirm if category has sub categories Confirm file removal from category Show Easy Select Enable Easy Select tooltip Show icons for categories ratings and special items Enable setting categories ratings and color labels Setting the Calendar pane options Chapter 7 Options and configuration On the Organize page set or change the options as described below Prompts you for confirmation when deleting a category with assigned files Prompts you for confirmation when deleting a category containing sub categories Prompts you for confirmation when un assigning files from a category Displays an Easy Select bar in the Organize pane which you can use to select multiple categories special items and ratings Displays a tool tip when you place your cursor over the Easy Select bar Displays icons so you can easily identify categories ratings color labels and special items Allows you to set categories ratings and color labels in the Organize pane You can customize the ACDSee 14 Calendar to start each week on a specific day to use a 12 or 24 hour clock format and to use
270. ng your database information differs from creating a backup in that you can chooseto export only the parts of your database that you want to share or store with specific files such as those on a CD Other ACDSee 14 users can import your information without affecting their existing database To create a backup of your entire database including image or media files usethe ACD Database Backup Wizard To back up the contents of a local folder to a remote location such as a network drive use the ACDSync Wizard To use the ACD Database Export Wizard 1 If you want to export your database information for a specific group of images or media files select the files in the File List pane in Manage mode 2 Click Tools Database Export Database 3 Click Next to begin using the wizard 4 Onthe Content and Format Options page specify how you want to export your database information by selecting one of the following options and then clicking Next Export entire ACDSee database to a read only compressed version Exports the entire contents of your ACDSee 14 database to a compressed version that can be shared with other ACDSee 14 users Export database information for selected items to a read only compressed version Exports all of your database information for the images selected in the File List pane Export database information to a text file Exports the selected information to an XML based text file Select the check boxes next t
271. nize pane Saved Searches are listed below Auto Categories where you can run them again by clicking once on the Saved Search name The Search pane will not return results for folders that are not cataloged in the ACDSee 14 database Cataloging happens automatically when you browse to a folder You can also click Tools Database Catalog Files To open the Search pane In Manage mode click View Search Search pane areas The Search pane contains several areas to help you manager your searches When you createa search remember that the search tool will only return files that match all of the criteria that you specify Saved searches In the Saved searches area you can save a complex search to use later select a search to run again or delete a saved search 61 ACDSee 14 User Guide Saved searches Save a search Delete a search Files and Text If you have saved a search it is listed in this drop down list for you to select and run again When you click Start at the bottom of the pane the search results are listed in the File List pane Saved searches are also listed on the Organize pane from where you can run them with a single click on the Saved Search name Clickthe Save icon and then Save or Save As to save or overwrite a saved search When the Saved Search dialog opens type in a name for the search If you use a descriptive name it makes it easier to remember the criteria in your saved search Selecta searc
272. nline Folder 3 Inthe New Online Folder dialog box enter a name for the new folder 4 ClickOK By default the new folder is Private To change the folder to Public a right click on the folder and then click Make Public To share the URL fora public folder 1 In Online mode click Transfer 2 Inthe Folders pane in the top section of the window right click on a public folder 3 Click Copy URL 4 Paste the URL into an email instant message or other application to share it with someone 178 Chapter 6 Online mode 9 Right click a public folder and select Share to Email post on a social networking site or to create a widget Changing the rating system P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline comtab then click Help Photos that you have rated in Manage mode are rated with a star rating system in Online mode You can select how to use stars to rate your photos To change your rating system 1 Click Tools and then select Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box select ACDSee Online 3 In Ratings select Convert Rating 1 to 5 stars or Convert Rating 1 to 1 star 4 Click OK Downloading images P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline comtab then click Help ACDSeeOnline com is also a storage service for ACDSee 14 users You can download your images from your ACDSeeOnline com account to your computer at any time To download your images 1 In Online mode click Login 2 Login t
273. ns tab in the Print dialog box Printer options Printer Paper size Orientation Copies Print range Resolution Filter Use gamma correction Use EXIF 2 2 printing when available Specifies the printer you want to use Select a printer from the drop down list and clickthe Properties button to set its options Refer to the printer manufacturer s Help file or manual for more information Specifies the size of the paper e g Letter Legal A4 Specifies Portrait or Landscape page orientation Specifies the number of copies you want to print Select one of the following options All Prints all of the pages in the document Pages from Prints a range of pages Specify the first and last pages of the range in the fields Specifies a resolution in pixels per inch PPI for the image The higher the value the more dots per inch and the higher the resolution of the printed image For example 600 PPI is 360 000 600 x 600 pixels per square inch Specifies the resampling filter to use when printing images Click the drop down list and select one of the following Box Displays considerable tiling or jaggies when you resize an image Triangle Produces good results for image reduction and enlargement but displays sharp transition lines Bicubic Produces good results with photo realistic images and with images that are irregular or complex Uses interpolation to minimize the raggedness normally associated with ima
274. nt a slideshow of the photos fromthis location Send photos from this location via email P If geotagged image does not display try using the keyboard shortcut F5 to refresh the map Pin Legend 9 Indicates geotagged location Y Indicates more than one geotagged location in this area Zoom in to see locations 9 Indicates selected geotagged location 9 A dot on a pin of any color indicates unsaved image location Creating and assigning keywords With ACDSee 14 you can create a master list of keywords and store the list in the database By using a master list you can reduce the number of duplicate or misspelled keywords and improve your search returns and image management The database automatically updates the keywords assigned to files with any changes you make to the keywords in the master list To create and maintain the master keyword list 1 2 3 In the Properties pane on the Metadata tab click the Keyword Picker button beside the Keywords field In the Keyword Picker dialog box click Edit List In the Keyword List Editor dialog box do one of the following Tocreate a new keyword type a new keyword into the New value field and then click Add To delete a keyword select a keyword in the Value list field and then click Remove Torename a keyword select a keyword in the Value list field Click Rename type a new name for the keyword and then press Enter To assign keywords to your files select one o
275. nt to do next 124 Chapter 5 Edit mode To save the image and return to the mode you were in previously 1 ClickDone 2 Select one of the following Save Save your changes Save as Savea copy of your edited image with a new name or format Discard Discard your changes Cancel Remain on the same image in Edit with your changes intact without saving the image To save the image and continue processing other images 1 ClickSave 2 Selectone of the following Save Save your changes Save As Save a version of your edited image with a new name or format and switch to the updated image Save a Copy Save a copy of your edited image with a new name or format and continue to work on the original file Copy to Clipboard Copy the edited image to the clipboard Save a Copy is useful for making multiple versions of an image while continuing to work from the original file instead of a __ new processed copy For example if you take a RAW image and save a copy of it as a JPG instead of switching to this lossy JPG image you remain on the unprocessed RAW file with the settings still intact P Save is not available for RAW file formats because you cannot directly save changes to a RAW file To discard changes to the image and return to the mode you were in previously Click Cancel or usethe keyboard shortcut ESC Selections tools Using selections Use selections to isolate an area of a phototo appl
276. ntly destroyed Restore the folders and files if you want to move them from the private folder to a non secure location on your computer Tagging images Itis easy to take hundreds of photos at an important event like a wedding or a marathon After you have transferred your photos to your computer you may want to review them and sort out your favorites Tagging is afast and easy way to identify your best photos or to separate them for editing or review The tagging check box is at the bottom right corner of the thumbnails Click the check box to tag or un tag photos Photos remain tagged until you clear the checkmark from the check box You can display all your tagged photos with one click by clicking Tagged under Special items in the Organize pane Tagging like categories and ratings is a way to set aside organize and group your photos without moving the files into different folders Tagging is intended as a temporary means of separating your images Once tagged you can move or apply categories and ratings to the images and then clear all of the tags Categories ratings color labels and folders are more effective for organizing and grouping your images over a long period of time 55 ACDSee 14 User Guide To tag a selected image Usethe keyboard shortcut Y backslash key to toggle the tag on Selectthe check box in the bottom right corner of the thumbnail Right click on one or more thumbnails and select Tag Inthe Properti
277. nto the text for each image Font Sets the font size and color of the caption text To insert metadata in image text 104 Chapter 4 View mode 1 Position the cursor in the Description text box where you want to display the file information and click Insert Metadata 2 Inthe Choose Properties dialog box select the file information you want to include 3 Click OK The information you added is inserted as a placeholder that will be replaced by the specific text for each image Hiding image text You can hide either the header or footer or disable both at once without changing or deleting the information in the header and footer fields To hide the image text 1 In View mode click View Edit Header Footer 2 Dooneor both of the following Clear the Header check box to remove text from the top of the image Clear the Footer check box to remove text from the bottom of the image 3 Click OK Ps show or hide both headers and footers simultaneously click View Show Header Footer Synchronizing View mode to a folder You can use the Sync to Folder option to change the images being displayed in View mode To synchronize to a folder 1 In View mode click File Sync To Folder 2 Typethe path to the folder you want to synchronize or click the Browse button to locate the folder 3 Selector change the New Images options as described below 4 Click OK New Images options Show new images Displays images as s
278. nverts your images Rotating or flipping multiple images You can rotate or flip multiple images at preset angles To rotate or flip an image 86 E 2 In Manage mode select one or more images and then click Tools Batch Rotate Flip In the Batch Rotate Flip Images dialog box select the angle of rotation you want to apply See below for an explanation of each angle If you select an image with multiple pages and wantto apply the selected angle of rotation to all ofthe pages select the Apply to all pages of the current image check box Do one of the following Click Next Image to move on to the next selected image If you select multiple images and you want to apply the same angle of rotation to all of them select the Apply to all selected images check box Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images When you are ready to apply the rotations to your images click Start Rotate Chapter 3 Manage mode Rotate Flip angles Rotates the image counter clockwise 90 degrees Rotates the image 180 degrees Rotates the image clockwise 90 degrees Rotates the image according to any EXIF data contained within the image Does not affect images without EXIF information Flips the image along the vertical axis Flips the image along the horizontal axis Flips the image along the vertical axis and then rotates it counter clockwise 90 degrees Flips the image along the verti
279. o appear in the Notes section attached to each slide These notes do not appear on the slide itself Click Create The presentation opens in PowerPoint where you can edit it like any other presentation Burning a CD or DVD You can usethe Burn Basket to burn a CD or DVD of your photos and files to use on a computer You must have a CD or DVD writer installed in your computer to use the Burn Basket With the Burn Basket you can organize arrange and store your photos and files until you are ready to burn them to a disc Depending on the disc format you choose you can create your own folders use existing folders or havethe Burn Basket create the folder structure automatically 9 If you want to create a CD of your photos to view on a TV use the VCD wizard which creates a CD in the right format for a TV To create a CD or DVD 1 76 To open the Burn Basket pane do one of the following In Manage mode click View Burn Basket In Manage mode click Tools Create CD or DVD In the Burn Basket select the device you want to use to create your disc from the Disc Burner drop down list in the toolbar The options in this drop down list depend on the CD DVD hardware you have on your computer Fromthe Content Format drop down list select one of the following The options in this drop down list depend on the burner you select in step 2 and what file formats it supports Data Disc Creates a standard CD or DVD on whi
280. o apply to the selection Applying edits or effects to selections You can use the Selections tool to isolate an area of an image Once selected you can apply many of the editing tools such as color and exposure or any of the special effects filters to the selected area An active selection in an image looks like a line of marching ants To apply an edit or effect to a selection 1 2 128 Use the Selections tool to create a selection then click Done to return to Edit The selection remains active Selecta tool to use from any of the following groups Exposure Lighting Color Chapter 5 Edit mode Detail Add Special Effects 3 Usethe tool to edit the image Use any of these special selections options Show Hide Click to show or hide the marching ants around the selection Hiding the selection line makes it easier Selection to judge the effect of various effects Use Selection Click to use the selection or apply the edit or effect to the whole image This control means you can edit just the selection then deselect Use Selection and apply another edit to the whole image without 2 clearing the selection Invert Selection Click to invert the selection g Modify Selection Click to return to Selections to modify your selection on the image When you make a new selection and click Done you return back to the editing tool you were using previously Feathering Drag to increase or decrease the blurring between the
281. o select a window display theme 3 Click Backup reminder and set reminders to backup your database Finding other resources and support The Help menu on the ACDSee 14 menu bar contains links to open plug in help files and options that link you to the ACDSee Web site where you can find updates newsletters and system requirements 15 ACDSee 14 User Guide Other links take you to the support page to the registration page or the community home page where you can join the community and participate in the ACDSee forums The Help menu is also where you can convert a trial version of ACDSee 14 to a full version by entering a license code Click Help to see the following menu options Plug in Help ACDSeeOnline com Help ManageacdID Account Check for Updates and Messages Quick Start Guide What s New Product Support and Resources Customer Support ACDSee Products ACDSee Community Facebook Twitter About ACDSee 14 16 Chapter 3 Manage mode Chapter 3 Manage mode Manage mode is the main browsing and managing component of the user interface and is what you see when you start ACDSee 14 using the shortcut icon on your desktop ES imagelibrary ACDSee 14 DQO impots Bath Create Slideshow Send External Editors In Manage mode you can Import your photos from a device CD or DVD disk or scanner Browsefiles and folders Organize files by tagging them addin
282. o the information you want to include 5 OntheLocation Options page specify a location for the exported information and a name for the text file if necessary and then click Next 6 Onthe Summary page review your choices You can click Back to make changes or click Next to begin exporting your database information 7 ClickFinish to closethe wizard and return to ACDSee 14 Generating file lists You can generate a text file that lists all of the files in the folder currently displayed in the File List pane The text file places the file name size image file format modified date image properties caption and rating for all of the files in the folder into a table and creates a single text file 95 ACDSee 14 User Guide To generate a list of your files In Manage mode click Tools Database Export and then select Generate File Listing ACDSee 14 automatically generates the file listing and opens it as a text file in your default text editor You can then edit or save the text file Backing up your database You can usethe ACDSee Backup Wizard to back up all of your database information which you can then restore in the case of a system failure or other event You can also choose to back up your image media or archive files along with the relevant database information The ACDSee Backup Wizard creates a series of files in a specified location that contain your entire database The backup is generated using your folde
283. o your account 3 Clickthe Transfer tab Your screen splits in two with the bottom part of the screen displaying images on your computer and the top part of the screen representing your images online 4 Inthetop part of the screen in the Folders pane navigate through your ACDSeeOnline com folders to the images you want to download 5 Inthe bottom part of the screen in the Local Computer pane select a folder that you want to download your image to 6 Dooneof the following to select an image to download Clickand drag an image into the bottom part of the screen to download it to your computer To select multiple images press the SHIFT or the CTRL key and click on the images to select them You can also click and drag your cursor to select multiple images Drag a folder of your images to the bottom part of the screen Selectimages and click the down arrow icon beside Transfer Manager Using Transfer Manager P For help with ACDSeeOnline com click the ACDSeeOnline comtab then click Help 179 ACDSee 14 User Guide The Transfer Manager lets you monitor the progress of your uploads and downloads on your ACDSeeOnline com account and also lets you cancel or pause image transfers The Transfer Manager has two tabs Uploads and Downloads These twotabs list images that are being uploaded downloaded paused or canceled To open the Transfer Manager Click Tools Transfer Manager You can do the following in Transfer M
284. of color in the image Noise is visually distracting soin most cases you will want to reduce noise in your photos However if you reduce noise too much you may unintentionally reduce image sharpness You can usethe Noise Removal tool to remove both luminance and color noise in your images Removing noise You can usethe Remove Noise tool to remove noise from your images while preserving details that you want to retain You can usethe Remove Noise tool to remove hot image pixels caused by digital cameras with malfunctioning CCD array sensors or the extra pixels caused by a dusty scanner or camera lens To remove noise from an image 1 In Edit mode in the Detail group click Noise Selectthe Remove Noise tab Set the options as described below we S Do one of the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the Remove Noise tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Noise Removal options Despeckle Removes noise Square Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel square x Removes noise using a3 x 3 pixel X shape Use this option when you want to preserve an image s thin and diagonal lines Plus Removes noise using a3 x 3 pixel plus shape Use this option when you want to preserve an image s thin vertical and horizontal lines Hybrid Removes digital camera noise
285. of images Do you use more than one camera Do different members of your family share cameras Or do you have images on your computer that were captured by friends and family If you answered yes to any of these questions you should consider using auto categories to search for images You will see auto categories in the Organize pane below Ratings Double click or click the plus sign to expand auto category groupings Double click or click the minus sign to collapse the auto category groupings Some auto category information is added to your images by your camera For example cameras will record information such as the camera make and model the white balance settings you used the focal length you used and the aperture You may want to supplement that information with the city province state or country in which you captured the images as well as keywords or copyright You can dothis using the Batch Set Information tool or by manually entering information in the Properties pane When you click on an auto category ACDSee 14 searches for images or belonging to that category For example imagine that you use more than one camera You can expand the Photo Properties and Camera Model groupings then select the category representing your camera model All images captured with that camera model will display Similarly imagine that your brother captures a lot of images and sends them to you You can expand the Photo Properties and Photographer group
286. older or detail name in the Available Details pane and then click Add Adding a folder adds all detail names within the folder Toremove acolumn select a detail name in the Currently Displayed Details pane and then click Remove Tomove a column tothe leftin the File List pane select its name in the Currently Displayed Details pane and click Move Up Tomove a column tothe right in the File List pane select its name in the Currently Displayed Details pane and click Move Down 3 Click OK You can click Reset to display only the default column names in the Currently Displayed Details pane and you can also move a column in the File List pane by dragging its header to a new position A vertical line indicates where the column will be inserted Filtering files You can use the Filter By options to identify the types of files and folders you want to display in the File List pane To filter files in the File List pane Do one of the following Click View Filter By and select a filter option Click the Filter drop down and select a filter option 9 If all your thumbnails seem to disappear click Filter All and they reappear To create a custom filter 1 Doone of the following Click View Filter By Advanced Filters Click the Filter drop down and select Advanced Filters 2 Select Apply filtering criteria 3 Selector clear one or more of the following options to show or hide that file or folder type in the
287. omize 2 Inthe Customize dialog box click the Keyboard tab and select External Editors from the Category list 3 Entera shortcut key into the Press New Shortcut Key field 4 Click Assign and close the dialog box Your new keyboard shortcut has been set To add an external editor to the FileList toolbar in Manage mode 1 Clickthe Toolbar drop down arrow to the right of the External Editors menu option and select Add or Remove Buttons Customize 2 Inthe Customize dialog box in the Commands tab select External Editors from the Category list 3 Clickand drag an External Editor from the list onto the FileList toolbar 4 Closethe dialog box The External Editor is added to the FileList toolbar To add an external editor button to the toolbar in View mode 1 Click the Toolbar drop down arrow next to the tools and select Add or Remove Buttons Customize 2 Inthe Customize dialog box in the Commands tab select External Editors from the Category list 3 Clickand drag an External Editor from the list onto the toolbar 4 Closethe dialog box The External Editor is added to the toolbar To manage your image editors 1 Inthe Configure Photo Editors dialog box in the Editors list select the application you wantto change 2 Doany of the following Tochange the location of the executable file or the name of the application displayed in the Editors list click Edit Set the location and name of the application and then click
288. one of the following options Forward Reverse Random Repeat Automatically restarts the slideshow after the lastimage has been displayed Delay Specifies how long to display each image Drag the slider or type a value from O to 864000000 to set the time in milliseconds Sound Selectthe Play audio clips check box to play any audio embedded in the selected images Displaying text on images in View mode You can usethe Header Footer tool to display text with your images in View mode The text is displayed while you are viewing the image but does not modify the original image You can also hide the headers and footers without changing the settings To add text directly to your photos and save it as part of the image see Adding text to an image To edit image headers and footers 1 In View mode click View Edit Header Footer 2 Dooneor both of the following Select the Header check box to add text at the top of the image Select the Footer check box to add text at the bottom of the image 3 Selector change the text options as described below 4 Click OK Text options Alignment Specifies the justification of the captions Background Adds a background color to the text Click Color to specify a color Description Displays the text you want to see on your images Type the text you want to appear or click inside the field to set an insertion point for inserting metadata Insert Metadata Inserts file specific information i
289. oon as they appear in the folder If this option is cleared new images are added to immediately the end of the slideshow Ignore open files Delays adding a new file to the slideshow until the transferring application has finished moving or downloading the file Sort by name Sorts the images displayed in the slideshow by their file name To stop synchronizing to a folder In View mode click File Sync To Folder Viewing offline images ACDSee 14 stores thumbnails and database information for images contained on CDs or other removable media as Photo Discs You can then browse the thumbnails and view the information for those images even when the disc is not in your CD ROM drive To add a Photo Disc 105 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 Placea disc containing images into your CD ROM drive 2 In Manage mode click File New Photo Disc 3 Inthe New Disc dialog box type a name for your disc in the Title field and then click OK You can then browse the contents of the Photo Disc in the Offline Media section of the Folders pane If you add or remove images from a disc that you have already added to ACDSee 14 as a Photo Disc you can update the J information stored in the database Insert the disc in your CD ROM drive and then right click the name of the disc in the Folders pane and select Update Photo Disc By default ACDSee 14 identifies Photo Discs by their serial numbers This is the most reliable setting to use when working with Ph
290. or Uses a tiled image as the background for the page Click Browse to locate the picture you want to use You can use the Archive Creator plug in to create archives of your images and media files Archive Creator supports multiple archive formats and helps you manage your files using compression encryption and password protection tools To create an archive 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select a folder or group of files 2 Click Tools Create Archive 3 Inthe Create Archive dialog box in the Options area click the Archive Type drop down list and select the archive format you want to create Some archive formats have additional settings that you can adjust by clicking the Settings button 4 Doany of the following Toinclude the contents of any subfolders you selected select the Include subfolders check box Toinclude any hidden files in your archive select the Include hidden files check box Toremove the selected files and folders from your hard drive once they have been added to the archive select the Delete files after archiving check box To protect the contents of your archive with a password select the Password Protect Archive check box and type a password into the field beside it Note that not all archive types support passwords and some formats require them 5 Typea path and file name into the Output File field or click Browse to locate a folder on your hard drive 80 Chapter 3
291. or Replace images in list Add images to list Automatically decodes the next image in sequence in View mode resulting in shorter load times Keeps the previously decoded image in memory for quick display in View mode Does not open a new View mode window if an image is opened from another application Opens a new View mode window to display images opened from another application Resamples images in View mode to minimize the raggedness normally associated with image expansion Resamples images in View mode to produce smooth transitions but may cause excessive blurring Does not apply resampling to images displayed in View mode Replaces the list of images open in View mode with images dropped into View mode from another application Adds any images dropped into View mode by another application to the list of images already open Keeps the ACDSee 14 window as the top window in a stack of windows Opens images in View mode in full screen mode Press F to exit full screen mode Hides the cursor in full screen mode Displays an instant preview in View mode that improves in quality as the image is decoded If selected ACDSee Quick View is set as the default viewer for images when ACDSee 14 is closed Automatically returns to Manage mode after moving or deleting an image in View mode Adds all images in a folder to the current image list when viewing any file from that folder Displays the image s full file path in
292. or direction area select one of the following options to indicate which direction you want to mirror the image Horizontal Vertical 4 Drag the Mirror axis slider to adjust the position of the mirror A value of 500 places the mirror in the center of the image 146 Di Chapter 5 Edit mode Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Negative effect You can use the Negative effect to create a negative of your image You can also apply the Negative filter to a negative scanned from a roll of film to produce a positive image To create an image negative 1 2 3 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Negative Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying an Oil Paint effect You can use the Oil Paint effect to give your images a painted appearance You can save your options as a preset for future use To create an oil painting from a photo I 2 3 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Oil Paint On the Oil Paint tab drag the Brush width slider to specify the width of the brush strokes in the effect The higher the value the wider the brush stroke Drag the Variance slider to specify the color variance in each brush stroke Higher values increase
293. orage device or if there are no files on your device ACDSee Device Detector will not be able to detect it For more detailed information about using the ACDSee Device Detector click the ACDSee Device Detector camera icon in the Taskbar Notification area and select Help Importing photos from a device The Import From dialog box gives you multiple options for importing your files from cameras card readers flash drives and other mass storage devices If you want to simply import files with a few clicks you can Or you can select from several options to streamline your workflow and perform multiple tasks with each import In the Import From dialog box you can view the thumbnails of the files on the device by their date or file type You can change the size of the thumbnails to make it easier to select those you want to import or leave on the device and then view only those you have selected You can also choose the destination folder or subfolders for the files create a backup set of files as you import and rename the files during the import process automatically rotating them if your camera has this option Advanced settings give you options to change the date you want to use and where to place RAW and JPEG files if your camera creates both file formats You can even organize your files as you import by adding Categories IPTC and ACDSee Metadata Then you can save all these settings as a preset to use or adapt later 19 ACDSee 14
294. orage mechanism The ACD Systems Database is a cache caption Text associated with a file or a comment or description added to a printed image cataloging Adding file information tothe ACDSee 14 database category Assign categories to photos to help sort and manage them more easily chromatic aberration A lens artifact that can result in fringes in high contrast areas of some photos CMYK Color model that uses cyan magenta yellow and black key as its primary colors color cast Changes the hue of an image while keeping the saturation and brightness intact For example many digital cameras produce pictures with a slightly blue color cast ACDSee 14 includes a tool that removes an unwanted color cast color channel value Contains all pixel information for a single color A grayscale image has one channel while an RGB image has three channels You can adjust RGB values when editing a color color gamut Range of colors thata devicesuch as a printer or monitor can produce or display color management Process of adjusting your computer settings so that the color output from your printer matches the colors you see on your monitor color space There are two types of color spaces device independent or device dependent A device independent color space such as RGB describes all possible colors A device dependent color space describes the subset of colors from the device independent color space that a particular device c
295. orize them do one of the following Right click one of the files click Set Categories and then click the category to which you want to assign the file Right click one of the files click Set Rating and then click the rating to which you want to assign the file y You can also assign categories and rating in the Context menu Select one or more files in the File List pane right click and t select Set Categories or Set Rating to make your selection 9 Ratings embedded by ACDSee can be seen in other applications supporting xmp rating and vice versa To embed metadata into one or more selected files click Tools Embed ACDSee Metadata In Selected Files Use the context menu right click in the category tree to do the following Assign Items Remove Items Create New Category Search Cut Copy Paste Delete Edit Category To search a category or rating in the Organize pane Click the Category name or Rating number to display all corresponding files in the File List pane Assign ratings in the Properties pane The Properties pane provides another way to assign ratings To assign files to ratings in the Properties pane 45 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 IntheFile List pane selectthe files you want to assign a rating 2 IntheProperties pane select the Metadata tab 3 Clickthe rating you want these files to have from the numbers listed at the top of the Properties pane Assign Categories in the Properties pan
296. ormation about how to use that particular feature The Help menu also contains a direct link to the What s New in the Help that lists all the features new to this release of the software To use the main help file 1 OntheMenu bar click Help Contents 2 Tobrowsethehelp file select the Contents tab and browsethrough the table of contents whichis organized by workflow 3 Tosearch for a particular work or phrase select the Search tab type in the word and click List Topics 4 Tousethe Index select the Index tab and type in a keyword To use the context sensitive help In the dialog click the Help button or press Fi on the keyboard to open the help topic about that feature To open the What s New On the menu bar click Help What s New Using the Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide contains a set of links on the left side that you can click to get a tour of the main features in ACDSee or set some important preferences To close the Quick Start Uncheck the Always show at start up option in the bottom left corner of the dialog box and click Close To re open the Quick Start Guide On the Menu bar click Help Quick Start Guide To use the Quick Start Guide for quick access to more information Click the links on the left side of the Quick Start Guide or the Next button for a high level tour To set preferences 1 Click Default start folder to select which folder to open at start up 2 Click Display theme t
297. ort Write support Archive formats Read support Writesupport Video and audio formats Read support File Formats that ACDSee 14 reads 217 ACDSee14 User Guide ABR ANI ART BMP CNV CR2 CRW CUR CVX DCR DCX DNG DIV EMF EPS FPX GIF ICN Ico IFF JP2 JPC JPG KDC MAG MRW NEF ORF PBM PCD PCX PEF PGM PIC PCT PDF PIX PNG PPM PS 218 Brush files Windows animated cursor AOL ART Windows Bitmap Canvas Canon RAW CR2 Canon RAW CRW Windows cursor Canvas Kodak RAW DCR Multiple page PCX Digital negative DjVu Enhanced Metafile Format Encapsulated PostScript FlashPix Graphics Interchange Format AT amp T ICN Windows icon EA Amiga Interchange File Format JPEG2000 JPEG2000 JPEG JFIF Kodak KDC MAG Konica Minolta RAW Nikon RAW Olympus RAW Portable BitMap Kodak PhotoCD ZSoft Publishers Paintbrush Pentax RAW PEF Portable GrayMap SoftImage PIC Macintosh PICT Adobe Acrobat documents Alias PIX Portable Network Graphics Portable PixMap Adobe Postscript Shows cursor animation Still images Windows and OS 2 2 8 16 24 32 bpp RLE and uncompressed Thumbnails only Thumbnails only All sub types and multiple pages supported An open source archival format for RAW files Win32 enhanced placeable metafiles Displays embedded thumbnail TIFF formats and first page only Multiple resolution support Single page and animated 87a and 89a Shows
298. oto Discs particularly if you areimporting or converting Photo Discs from previous versions of ACDSee 14 However if you are working with or planning to work with multi session discs the serial number may be regenerated or changed each time you change the contents of a disc Therefore the volume label is the required method of identification for multi session Photo Discs Rebinding Photo Discs Depending on the method used to identify Photo Discs ACDSee 14 may encounter a Photo Disc that it does not recognize This is most common when you are using the serial number method to identify Photo Discs and you insert a multi session disc ACDSee 14 may not recognize the disc as serial numbers are likely to change when updating a multi session disc You can usethe Rebind option to update the identification information and associate the correct database information with your disc To rebind a Photo Disc to its ACDSee 14 database information 1 IntheRebind Photo Disc dialog box carefully review the Current disc information to be sure that the correct disc is in the drive 2 Selectthe Photo Disc record that you want to rebind to the current disc from the Photo Disc Name list 3 ClickRebind Using ACDSee Quick View ACDSee Quick View is an image viewer that you can use to quickly view images without opening ACDSee 14 For example imagine that you want to view an image that someone sent to you in an email If you double click the image it wi
299. ou can also save your options as a preset for future use To blur an image 1 In Edit mode in the Detail group select Blur 2 Inthe Blur type drop down list select the type of blur to apply 171 ACDSee 14 User Guide 3 Setthe options as described below 4 Dooneof the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the Blur tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings Blur types Gaussian Linear Radial Spread Zoom Produces an even smooth blur Amount Specifies the amount of blur Move the slider to the right to intensify the effect Produces a blurring effect that gives the illusion of movement Amount Specifies the amount of blur Move the slider to the right to intensify the effect Angle Specifies the direction of the blur effect Produces blur around a center point Click the image to set the center point Amount Specifies the amount of blur Move the slider to the right to intensify the effect Clockwise Specifies clockwise blur Counter clockwise Specifies counter clockwise blur Horizontal position Specifies the blur s center point on the horizontal axis Vertical position Specifies the blur s center point on the vertical axis Produces a smeared or frosted blur Amount Specifies the amount of blur Move the slider to the right to in
300. ou can control playback volume and appearance select parts of a media file to play or save and create an image from a video frame To play video or audio files In Manage mode in the File List pane do one of the following Double click a video or audio file Select one or more files and press Enter Select one or more files right click a selected file and then select View Usethe Media toolbar to adjust the volume stop pause or restart the file playback and control the appearance of media files Automatically playing audio and video files You can configure your settings to play audio and video files automatically as soon as you open them in View mode or as you view them in the Preview pane in Manage mode To start playing media files automatically 1 In Manage mode or View mode click Tools Options Preview 2 Selectthe Autoplay audio or video clips check box 3 Click OK The Media toolbar You can use the Media toolbar to quickly access common media viewing and editing tools Media toolbar buttons gt Play Plays the media file or selection Changes into the Pause button when a media file or selection is playing 0 Pause Pauses the media file or selection a Stop Stops playback of the media file or selection 109 ACDSee 14 User Guide Selection and media controls toolbar buttons Show Selection Toggles between showing and hiding the selection handles al Play Selection Plays only the selected por
301. ours to adjust for time zones Select either Shift forward or Shift backward and type a number into the Hours Minutes and Seconds spin boxes 5 Click Adjust Time Stamp to begin adjusting your files 6 Whenthe wizard is finished click Done to return to ACDSee 14 Backing up your files to another computer The Sync Wizard will guide you through the process of creating a synchronized copy of your files to protect you from local hard drive failure You can synchronize your local folders with a network drive remote computer or external hard drive You can name the synchronization specify the actions you want to take each time you synchronize your files schedule the synchronization to run at specific intervals and edit or remove the synchronization at a later time 1 The Sync Wizard does not backup your database when your files are copied to a new location To back up files with 2 database information use the ACD Database Backup Wizard To create a synchronization 1 In Manage mode click File Sync Create Sync 2 Onthe Welcome page click the Next button when you are ready to continue 3 OntheSynchronization Options page do the following Inthe Source folder field specify the folder containing files you would like to copy Inthe Backup destination field specify a folder on a network drive remote computer or external hard drive in which to place the backup files Inthe Options area specify how Sync should handle erro
302. ox where you can select or change the font options for your text Insert Metadata Tag Inserts file specific information called metadata into the caption Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box and select the metadata you want to insert Sharing slideshows and screensavers You can view a slideshow of your images from Manage or View mode at anytime by clicking Tools Slideshow keyboard shortcut CTRL S in Manage mode With ACDSee 14 you can also create slideshows and screensavers of your favorite photos and send them to friends and family or display them on your website You can even save your slideshow or screensaver project to edit at a later time To create a slideshow ui 2 In Manage mode click Tools Create Slideshow File On the Welcome page to create a new slideshow select the Create a new slideshow radio button To specify what type of slideshow you want to create select one of the following options Standalone slideshow Creates a single executable file exe containing all of your images and everything needed to view them You can share this type of file with anyone who has a computer even if they do not own ACDSee 14 Windows screensaver Creates a standard Windows screensaver file scr that can be stored and used on any Windows system Adobe Flash Player slideshow Creates a compact Adobe Flash file swf that you can display on a Web site To edit an existing slideshow or screensaver project
303. p Next Group Table of Contents Switches the Calendar pane to Events view In the Events view you see only those months during which images or media files are available Next to the month you see the number of dates on which images or media files are available Expand the month to see the dates and the number of pictures available for those dates You can add a description and a thumbnail image to help you remember the event Switches the Calendar pane to Year view In Year view you see a series of tables Each table represents a specific year Next to the year you see how many images or media files are associated with that year The months during which images or media files are available are highlighted Switches the Calendar pane to Month view In Month view you see a series of tables Each table represents a specific month Next to the month you see how many images or media files are associated with that month The dates on which images or media files are available are highlighted Switches the Calendar pane to Day view In Day view you see a series of tables Each table represents a specific day Next to the date you see how many images or media files are associated with that date The time at which the images or media files are available are highlighted Switches the Calendar pane to the Photo Calendar In the Photo Calendar you see a single month with thumbnails for any day that contains photos A pop up of the first four images opens if
304. p button in the wizard Publishing images to TiVo You can use ACDSee 14 to publish your images to your TiVo To use the TiVo Publish Wizard you must have a TiVo box and have installed the TiVo Publisher desktop software on your computer For more information visit TiVo com To publish your images to TiVo 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you want to share 2 ClickFile Send Publish to TiVo 3 Onthe Welcome page of the TiVo Publish Wizard select one of the following Publish to a New Album Creates a new albumin your TiVo Desktop folder Click Next to give the new album a name Publish to an Existing Album Adds the selected images to an existing album in your TiVo Desktop folder Click Next to select an album from a list Publish to the Root of your Tivo Adds the images directly to your TiVo Desktop folder 4 Click Next to review your choices and then click Next again to publish your images Printing Printing images With the ACDSee 14 print utility you can print your images on any size of paper in any orientation and at any resolution your printer can support You can also use the print utility to create and print contact sheets complete with headers footers and captions specific to each image As you change the options in the Print dialog box you can view a dynamically updated preview of the image and its position on the page You can adjust the output size print multiple copies of eac
305. pacity to an entireimage or to a selected part of an image Opacity The Opacity slider changes the opacity of the edited image It gives you control of how much of the edit should be visible on the image Blend modes The ability to control how the edits and the image merge means that other blend modes besides opacity can be used to affect the final image Normal Screen Multiply Dodge Burn Overlay Difference Darken Lighten Hard Light Soft Light Hue Saturation Color Luminosity Dissolve Pixels in the edited image are combined with those in the original Only opacity affects this blend Combines the edited image color with the inverse of the original photo color resulting in a color thatis the same or lighter Combines the edited image color with the original photo to produce a darker color Multiplying any color with black produces black multiplying any color with white leaves the color unchanged Combines the edited image color with the original pixels in the photo to produce a lighter color Combines the edited image color with the original pixels in the photo to produce a darker color Preserves the shadows and highlights of the lower layers while applying either Multiply or Screen blend mode based on the original image area s color values Subtracts the edited image color from the color of the original photo Any white in the edited image produces a true negative of the color in the image
306. paper and select one of the following Centered Displays the image in the center of the desktop Tiled Displays the image in one or more tiles until the desktop is covered If the image is small it may appear in several tiles on the desktop If the image is large it may appear in only one or two tiles Stretched Stretches the image proportionally to fill as much of the desktop as possible To restore your system to the default desktop wallpaper Click Tools Set Wallpaper Restore To print the image 1 2 3 Click File Print Under Format choose a print size On the Printer Options tab specify the printer you want to use the paper size the number of copies you want the range of pages that you want to print and image resolution On the Page Settings tab specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths and specify the number of prints of each photo Add captions headers or footers Click Print Viewing images in another application You can open a file in another program from within ACDSee 14 For example you can open documents in the application used to create them To use the shell open and edit commands 107 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Manage mode click File Shell 2 Selectone of the following options Open Opens the file using the application that Windows associates with its file extension Edit Opens the file using the default system application or opens a dialog
307. plication from inside ACDSee 14 You can also create a shortcut by dragging a file folder or executable file directly from the File List pane tothe Favorites pane To create a Favorites shortcut 1 IntheFile List pane selecta file folder or executable file 2 Dooneof the following Right click the item you selected and then select Add to Favorites Click File Add to Favorites 3 Typeaname for the new shortcut and click OK Creating a new folder You can create a folder or an entire directory tree in the Favorites pane to help organize your shortcuts To create a new folder 1 Inthe Favorites pane right click the Favorites folder or a folder you previously created and then select New Folder 2 Typethe name of the folder and press Enter UN If you move a file or a folder that is a favorite you break the link and the favorite no longer works Deleting a shortcut or folder You can delete a shortcut or folder from within the Favorites pane To delete a shortcut or folder 32 Chapter 3 Manage mode In the Favorites pane right click the shortcut or folder click Delete and then click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the shortcut or folder Using the Organize pane The Organize pane is one of the most useful panes in Manage mode as it provides so many tools for organizing managing and finding your files You can drag files intothe categories ratings or color labels of the Organize pane to assign and
308. pply a Weave effect 159 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Weave On the Weave tab set the options as described below ee a Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Weave options Strip width Specifies the width of the vertical and horizontal strips Gap width Specifies the width of the gap between the strips Background color Specifies the color of the background Click the color picker to select a different color Applying a Wind effect You can use the Wind effect to add wind lines that make stationary objects in your image look like they are moving You can select or change the Wind options to add wind to your image and save your options as a preset for future use To apply a Wind effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Wind 3 Onthe Wind tab select or change the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Wind options Strength Determines how strong the wind lines are in the image The higher the value the stronger the wind lines Threshold Determines how sharp an edge must be before the filter will apply wind The higher the value the sharper the edge needs to be Chance of wind Determines the amount of
309. ptions dialog box to control the quality of the JPEG image encoding method color subsampling method and whether to update or create embedded thumbnails in the JPEG image JPEG options Image quality Encoding Color component sampling Embedded thumbnails Save these settings as the defaults Drag the slider to determine the quality of the JPEG image Progressive Select to enable progressive encoding Optimize Huffman codes Select to optimize Huffman codes to increase compression 2 1 Horizontal Select to subsample color channels on the horizontal axis by a factor of 2 1 2 1 Vertical Select to subsample color channels on the vertical axis by a factor of 2 1 Only update existing thumbnails Select to update any existing embedded thumbnails Always add update thumbnails Selectto update any existing embedded thumbnails or create embedded thumbnails Never add update thumbnails Select if you do not want to update any existing embedded thumbnails or if you do not want to create embedded thumbnails Generate DCF compatible thumbnails Select to generate thumbnails that meet the Digital Camera Format DCF specification and are compatible with the thumbnail view on the LCD of a digital camera This option forces a fixed resolution of 160 x 120 and pads any extra space with black Selectthis option to use these JPEG settings by default for all JPEGs Customizing and configuring Auto hiding panes and panels
310. r but do not confuse these subfolders with the private folder itself To open a private folder 1 Closeany open private folders 2 Click View Private Folder 3 Clickthe Open button in the Private Folder pane header 4 Inthe Enter Password text box type the password of the private folder that you want to open 5 Click OK The contents of an open private folder remain visible until you close it Remember to close your private folder if you have to _ step away from your computer and do not want anyone to see its contents To close a private folder Do one of the following Click the Close button in the Private Folder pane header Click File Exit to exit ACDSee 14 The private folder is closed automatically To add files to a private folder 1 Open the private folder to which you want to add files 2 Dooneof the following Clickand drag the files onto the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane Selectthe files right click one of the selected files and then select Add to Private Folder A warning message displays 54 Chapter 3 Manage mode 3 Click Yes to move the files to the private folder When you add files and folders to a private folder they are removed from their original location in the file system and added 2 to the password protected private folder There is no way to recover files and folders from a private folder if you have forgotten your password Ensure that you choose a password
311. r a different type of file To create a renaming template I Ze 26 In the Import From dialog box select Rename files to Fromthe drop down list select one of the following system templates Date Time File name Renames the files using the date and time each file was created and the original file name Date Time Renames the files using the date and time each file was created Camera sequence number Renames the files using the camera name and a sequential number Chapter 3 Manage mode Date time sequence number Renames the files using the date and time each file was created and a sequential number Camera filename Renames the files with the name of the camera and each file s original name 3 Tocreate your own renaming template or add to a system template click Edit 4 Inthe Rename Templates dialog box select from the options as described in the table below 5 ClickOK P If you select the Skip video and audio files check box the rename process will not rename video and audio files Rename Templates options System template drop down list New rename template H Delete x Rename Template Insert Metadata Sample Skip video and audio files Browsing Click the drop down list to select a different pre defined system template Click to open the New Rename Template dialog box where you can type in a name for your own renaming template Give the renaming template a name t
312. r broaden your results To add selective browsing criteria 63 ACDSee 14 User Guide With the Selective Browsing pane open do any of the following IntheFolders pane select one or more folders Inthe Organize pane select one or more categories and or a rating Inthe Calendar pane select one or more date ranges As each criteria is added to the Selective Browsing pane ACDSee 14 searches its database for files in that folder that match the date range and are assigned to the classification and displays them in the File List pane You can then select those files and use the ACDSee 14 features to edit share move and view them however you want You can also adjust or refine your criteria in the Selective Browsing pane Toremove a selected criteria from the Selective Browsing pane right click any of the criteria and then select Remove From Scope Toexclude all of a certain type of criteria click the bar above the list and toggle the option to include that type in the scope For example to exclude the listed folders from the scope click the Folders bar and then click Include Folders in Scope The folders you selected will still be displayed in the Selective Browsing pane but will not factor in the results Toremove all criteria of a certain type click the bar above the list and select Clear All The default behavior for categories in the Selective Browsing paneis to display files that match any of the categories l
313. r file that is stored in the same folder as its file Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself you need to rename or move themtogether or you could lose the ACDSee Metadata permanently Viewing files that have data to embed If you want to see the files that have data that needs to be embedded there is a quick way to list them using the Embed Pending option To view files that have data to embed In the Organize pane under Special Items click Embed Pending All the files that have data to embed are displayed in the File List Retrieving ACDSee Metadata that is embedded in files If you simply browse to the folder where the files are located some of the ACDSee Metadata is retrieved and written to the database The safest way to retrieve all the ACDSee Metadata is to click Tools Database Catalog Files Then the following applies If the files are GIF JPEG DNG PNG and TIF formats all the data will be retrieved and written to the database If the files still have their sidecar files in the folder and they still have the same file name the database information is retrieved and written to the database If the files have become separated from their sidecar files or renamed their ACDSee Metadata cannot be retrieved and will be lost Excluding folders from the database You can choose to exclude folders from the database and keep the contents separate from your other images and media files By default the
314. r more keywords in the Available Keywords list and then click Assign To remove a keyword from your files select a keyword in the Assigned Keywords list and then click Remove When you are satisfied with your changes click OK to close the Keyword Picker dialog box 51 ACDSee 14 User Guide Copying and moving files You can usethe Copy To Folder and Move To Folder commands to relocate files and folders on your hard drive and specify how to handle overwriting existing files You can also select from a list of previously accessed folders to save time looking through your directory structure When you use ACDSee 14 to relocate your files by default any ACDSee Metadata associated with those files is copied to the __ new location However if you do not want to copy the associated files clear the Include related files for non RAW images check box When you do NOT use ACDSee 14 to move or copy your files you break the link to any database information you have added 27 to those files This is because ACDSee 14 cannot track the files You will lose important categorizing and other database information You can fix this by clicking Change Binding and rebinding the database If you have embedded the database information in the files themselves you can also retrieve this information using Tools Database Catalog Files ACDSee 14 uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file Only some file formats and file extensions support XMP 37 These
315. r structure and is unique to your computer To back up portions of your database or to share database information with another ACDSee 14 user usethe ACD Database Export Wizard For some suggestions about managing your database backups see Database backup tips and strategies To back up your database information 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Back Up Database 2 Onthe Welcome page select whether you would like to create a new backup or update an existing backup Click Next If you choose to update an existing backup please go to step 5 3 OntheNew Backup page select the information you would like to back up Click Next 4 Onthe Backup Location page click Browse and specify a location for your backup and type a name for the backup file Click Next 5 OntheBackup Summary page review your settings If you chose to update an existing backup click the Backup to update drop down list and then select the existing backup Click Next Backup information options Do not include thumbnails Excludes thumbnails from the backup saving a substantial amount of storage space on your disc or hard drive Include thumbnails for offline Includes only thumbnails for files that do not reside on your hard drive such as files PhotoDiscs Include thumbnails Includes all thumbnails in the database This will require more space on your hard drive or disc to storethe backup Backup files of type Backs up the specified filetypes with the d
316. r too light without affecting other areas of the photo You can also simultaneously lighten dark areas that are too dark and darken areas that are too bright Examples would be a photo of a person silhouetted against a bright background like the sea or a window In fact most photos taken on a dull day or with a flash can be improved in various ways with fine adjustments You can save your options as a preset for future use The Lighting tool lets you make quick and easy adjustments using three sliders ACDSee 14 analyzes the photo and varies the adjustment throughout the image automatically For example darker images are brightened more By clicking the Auto button you can have ACDSee 14 fully analyze the photo and set the slider positions automatically You can also click directly on an area of the imageto generate automatic settings optimal for that area usually the subject of the photo To open the Lighting tool 167 ACDSee 14 User Guide In Edit mode in the Exposure Lighting group click Lighting To add light to dark areas 1 Drag the Highlights slider to the right to add light to the dark parts of the photo 2 Adjustthe settings using any of the controls in the table below To darken areas that are too bright 1 Drag the Shadows slider to the right to lighten and return detail to areas that are too dark 2 Adjustthe settings using any of the controls in the table below To adjust midtones that are too light or dark
317. rame dialog box select a folder in which to save your file 4 Inthe File name field type a filename 5 Clickthe Save as type drop down list and select a file format You can click the Options button to select or change any options associated with the file format 6 ClickSave To extract and save multiple video frames as images 110 Chapter 4 View mode 1 Select part of the video 2 Onthe Selection and media controls toolbar clickthe Extract Frames button and then select one of the following options Extract Selected Frames Extracts all the video frames contained in the selected portion of the video file Extract All Frames Extracts all of the video frames in the video file 3 Inthe Extracting Frames dialog box click the Browse button and then select the folder where you want to save your files 4 Inthe Filename field type a filename to use when saving the images Numbers are added to the filename for each frame 5 Clickthe Format drop down list and select a file format You can click the Options button to select or change any options associated with the file format 6 ClickOK Adding or editing image audio ACDSee 14 supports images with embedded audio and images with associated audio files Images with embedded audio are TIFF or JPEG images with audio saved inside the image file You can embed audio inside an image file by adding audio to the image Images with associated audio are image files paired with separ
318. randomly This makes the fur strands different every time you apply the filter You can define a specific random seed to generate identical fur patterns To generate a new random seed click Random Seed Applying a Glowing Edges effect You can usethe Glowing Edges effectto add color to the lines and details of people or objects in your images The colored lines and details appear to glow You can save your options as a preset value for future use To apply a Glowing Edges effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Glowing Edges 3 On the Glowing Edges tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Glowing Edges options Intensity Specifies the amount of color added to the edges within the image The higher the setting the more intense the color that is applied to the image Color Specifies the color of the edges Applying a Granite effect You can use the Granite effect to give your images the appearance of being painted on arock wall You can save your options as a preset for future use To use the Granite effect 145 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Granite On the Granite tab set the options as described below NS Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane
319. rive for specific file types Publishing and sharing Sharing files with ACDSee 14 ACDSee 14 makes it easy to share your images and other files with friends and family You can email files directly from ACDSee 14 upload images to a Web site and create your own Web pages with the HTML Album plug in ACDSee 14 includes a Burn Basket pane to help you burn your images safely onto a disc You can also create slideshows and screensavers that you can give to anyone with a computer they do not need ACDSee 14 to view them You can even publish your images to your TiVo and view them on your television screen 66 Chapter 3 Manage mode Taking a screen capture You can usethe ACDSee 14 Screen Capture utility to create images from different areas of your screen You can select what areas to capture how you wantto perform the capture and where to store the captured image To take a screen capture 1 Oo a w In Manage mode or View mode click Tools Screen Capture In the Source area of the Screen Capture dialog box identify the part of the screen you want to capture See the table below for a description of the Source options If you want to include your cursor in the output image select the Include mouse cursor check box In the Destination area identify where you want to place the output image In the Initiate capture area identify how you want to take the screen capture Click Start to launch the screen capture tool An icon
320. rn into the Search pane s Search for files and folders named field to search for file names You can search for simple patterns such as portions of file names or more advanced patterns that include wildcards File name pattern wildcards Wildcard Result Example Matches any single character in the file name ca jpg results in cat jpg cap jpg and car jpg but not cats jpg Matches zero or more characters in the file name cat results in cat jpg cats jpg and cathy jpg Matches any of the enclosed characters ca tr results in cat jpg or car jpg but not cap jpg Matches any character not enclosed cat 0 results in cata jpg and catb jpg but not cat0 jpg ete Matches any character in the specified range cat a f0 9 results in cata jpg catb jpg catf jpg and cat0 jpg catl jpg cat9 jpg Blocks the use of other wildcard characters that are Because square brackets are wildcards if you also characters permitted in a file name such as wanted to search for a file name that contains a square brackets The and characters are not bracket you can precede the bracket with a permitted in file names so this function does not work backslash Ata Gels ACD 123 results in ACD 123 gif Patterns are not case sensitive To use multiple patterns separate the names with spaces or semicolons To match a _ pattern containing a space or semicolon enclose the pattern in double quotation marks If you do not include the
321. rop down list to specify a unit of measurement 3 If you want to maintain a specific width to height ratio select the Preserve aspect ratio check box and then select one of the following options from the drop down list 163 ACDSee 14 User Guide Original Maintains the original image s width to height ratio 1x1 Forces the width and height to be equal 2x3 Forces a width to height ratio of 2 3 3x2 Forces a width to height ratio of 3 2 3 x5 Forces a width to height ratio of 3 5 5 x3 Forces a width to height ratio of 5 3 Custom Applies a custom ratio Enter a width to height ratio in the Custom Aspect Ratio dialog box 4 Selecta resizing filter from the Resizing Filter drop down list 5 Under the resize option you selected in step 3 type the image s new dimensions into the Width and Height spin boxes If you selected Actual Print size in click the Resolution drop down list and then select aresolution in dots per inch for your output image 6 Toestimate the size of the output image click Estimate new file size 7 Doone of the following Click Done to apply your changes and close the Resize tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool 9 Resizing tips Maintain image quality by reducing images only by 33 50 or 66 Other percentages can distort the aspect ratio Avoid resizing an image repeatedly Each resizing places image pixels using a slightly different orientatio
322. rs or click the color box to display a dialog of swatches to choose from Drag the Nib Width slider to set the diameter of the brush measured in pixels Drag the Feathering slider to set the blurring radius of the brush measured in pixels Selecta blending option from the Blending drop down menu to affect how your brush strokes blend with your _ imageas you draw To adjust the Nib Width or Feathering sliders on the fly right click on the image for quick access to the brush settings 4 Drag over the image to draw 5 Dooneof the following Click Done to add the drawing to your image and return to Edit Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to Edit Y Scroll with your mouse to adjust the size of the nib width at anytime Adding borders You can usethe Borders tool to add one or more borders and edge effects to your images You can set the size of each side of the border change the color and texture of the border or pick up a color from within the image by clicking on that color in the image There are libraries of edges and textures to get you started but you can save your own textures or edges to the ACDSee folder so that they appear in the library for you to use You can also use Edge blur to soften the edges or blend the image into the background texture You can also add a third dimension to your images using the Drop Shadow and Raised edge effects Using combinations of multiple borders and edge effects
323. rs and logs Inthe Confirmations area specify how Sync should handle file duplication conflicts Click Next when you are ready to continue 4 Onthe Synchronization Schedule page do the following Inthe Name text box type a name for your synchronization Inthe Schedule area specify whether you would like to run the synchronization immediately or schedule the synchronization Click Finish when you are ready to complete the wizard r Schedule An account with no password cannot set up a schedule You must set a password for your account for schedules to work A blank password will not work you must have a real password with more than one character Updating or deleting a synchronization You can adjust the settings of a synchronization schedule it to run at regular intervals or delete the synchronization from ACDSee 14 To update or delete a saved synchronization 59 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Manage mode click File Sync Edit Sync 2 IntheSaved Synchronizations dialog box select a synchronization from the list 3 Dooneof the following Toschedule the synchronization click Schedule Specify how often to run your synchronization and then click OK Toadjust the settings click Edit In the Edit Synchronizations dialog box update the folder containing files you would like to copy and a folder on a network drive remote computer or external hard drive in which to place those files In the Options area up
324. s In ACDSee 14 close the Borders tool if itis open In Manage mode copy and paste your texture files into this folder C Program Files Common Files ACD Systems borders textures In Manage mode select the image you want to use and then click Tools Edit In the Add group click Borders Select the Texture radio button and then click the arrow on the right side of the texture box to open the texture library Thumbnails of the textures display for you to select Edge files are grayscale images that are resized to fit the image The image file shows through any areas in the edge file that are white and does not show through any black areas Pixels that are tones of gray in the edge file show through with relative opacity depending on how close the pixels are to black or white in other words the darker the gray pixel the less it shows through To add your own edges to the edges library 1 Ze In ACDSee 14 close the Borders tool if itis open In Manage mode copy and paste your edge files intothis folder C Program Files Common FilesYACD Systems borders edges In Manage mode select the image you want to use and then click Tools Edit In the Add group click Borders Select the Irregular radio button and then click the arrow on the right side of the edge box to open the edge library Thumbnails of the edges display for you to select P If you open an image with borders already applied another border will be applied to the
325. s effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Waves 3 Onthe Waves tab select or change the options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Waves options Wavelength Specifies the distance between waves Drag the slider to the left to reduce the distance between waves and increase the distortion caused by the waves Drag theslider to the right to increase the distance between waves and reduce the distortion caused by the waves Amplitude Specifies the height of the waves Drag the slider to the left to reduce the height of the waves and the distortion caused by the waves Drag the slider to the right to increase the height of the waves and the distortion caused by the waves Angle Specifies the angle of the waves Type a number from 1 to 360 or drag the arrow to adjust the angle Background color Specifies the background color Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Applying a Weave effect You can use the Weave effect to give a photo the appearance of being woven into a tapestry or basket You can control the width of the vertical and horizontal strips the width of the gap between the strips and the background color that displays through the gap You can save your options as a preset for use at another time To a
326. scs Photo Repair tool photos Pixel Explosion effect pixel resize options Pixelate effect plug ins about managing viewing properties polaroid Posterize effect Preview bar Preview pane customizing using printing contact sheet options setting size and positioning texton pages Properties pane options using Q quarantining files R Radial Waves effect Rain effect Index 148 53 198 75 148 105 130 141 149 123 149 99 100 100 141 150 123 187 37 85 84 84 190 48 99 150 151 243 ACDSee 14 User Guide ratings assigning RAW images supported formats recording image audio red eye reduction removeable devices renaming file or folder multiple files while getting photos replacing files resizing multiple images one image restoring database information restoring originals retro effect RGB Ripple effect rotating in Edit in Manage and View mode multiple photos S scanner Scattered Tiles effect screen capture screensavers creating sharing Search pane searching file name patterns for duplicate files Image Well Quick Search bar setting Quick Search options wildcards 244 44 222 111 129 18 33 89 26 53 87 163 97 121 146 169 15d 161 38 86 25 152 67 68 73 61 63 65 66 60 182 63 with ACDSee with the Search pane second monitor moving the panes selecting files part of a media file part of an image Se
327. se as a frame Click Browse to locate the image you wantto use Creates a drop shadow effect around each thumbnail Click the color picker to define a color Creates a fading frame effect around the image Click the color picker to define a color Creates a matte effect around each thumbnail Clickthe color picker to define a color Creates a beveled edge effect on each thumbnail This effect is not displayed in the Preview window Prints a solid color as a background for the page Click the color picker to define a color Prints a tiled image as the background for the page Click Browse to locate the image you want to use Batch functions About batch editing In ACDSee 14 you can make one type of edit to many images For example if you need to resize multiple images you can use the Batch Resize tool Or if you need to rotate multiple photos by 90 degrees you can usethe Batch Rotate Flip tool You can speed up the batch editing workflow by tagging your files For example you can quickly tag the files you wantto change then click Tagged in the Organize pane to display all the tagged files in the File List pane Then you can select the files and choose a batch tool Converting multiple images to another file format You can convert multiple images to any supported file format You can setthe options for each format individually specify how to handle multiple page images and apply the conversion defaults automatically The Conv
328. se for each rotate picture based image If you select the check box the print utility changes each page s orientation to best suit the on print format image you are printing Maintain aspect Specifies whether you want the print utility to maintain the original image s aspect ratio Select one of ratio the following options to indicate how the print utility should handle the aspect ratio for oversized images Crop image to fit print format Prints only the part of the image that fits within the print format Shrink image to fit print format Prints the entireimage reduced to fitinside the print format Adding text to pages You can add headers and footers to pages and captions beneath your images To add captions to your printed images 1 NOM RB pon In the Print dialog box click the Caption tab Select Use caption text Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options In the text box type the text you want the caption to display Click Insert Metadata to insert file specific information into the caption for each image In the Text alignment drop down list select the caption positioning To set the maximum number of text lines for each caption to display select the Number of lines check box and then specify anumber in the field To add headers and footers to your printed pages 1 84 Do one of the following Click the Header tab and select Use header text Click the Footer tab and select Use
329. se the Rebuild Thumbnails and Metadata tool to immediately regenerate the thumbnails for selected images and rebuild the metadata To rebuild thumbnails 1 In Manage mode do one of the following Select one or more thumbnails in the File List pane Selecta folder in the Folders pane 2 Click Tools Database Rebuild Thumbnails and Metadata Quarantined files If ACDSee 14 has trouble reading a corrupted or incomplete image or mediafile or a file causes a plug in to generate an error ACDSee 14 will quarantine that file You can view a list of quarantined files and remove a file from the list To view quarantined files 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Quarantine Files 2 Toremove afile select itin the list and then click Remove 3 Todisable the Quarantine feature clear the Enable Quarantine check box 4 Click OK to close the Quarantine Files dialog box and return to ACDSee 14 Plug ins Working with plug ins A plug in is a software module that adds functionality to a larger program ACDSee 14 comes standard with many different plug ins Types of plug ins Image Decode Converts a file from a binary format to the image displayed in ACDSee 14 Decode plug ins allow ACDSee 14 to display images of many different file formats The files that you can view with ACDSee 14 depend on which decoding plug ins areinstalled on your computer Image Encode Converts the image displayed in ACDSee 14 toa binary file for
330. sed to maintain the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are smaller than the image s original dimensions The height is decreased tothe specified value and the width is decreased to maintain the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are smaller than the image s original dimensions The width and height are decreased as close tothe specified value as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio Resizes the image if the specified dimensions are smaller than the image s original dimensions The width or height is decreased as closeto the specified value as possible to minimize the size of the image while maintaining the aspect ratio Resizes the width to the specified value and resizes the height to whatever value is necessary to maintain the aspect ratio Resizes the height tothe specified value and resizes the width to whatever value is necessary to maintain the aspect ratio Resizes the image within the specified width and height The width and height are resized as close to the specified value as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio Resizes the image within the specified width and height The width or height is resized as closeto the specified value as possible to maximize or minimize the size of the image while maintaining the aspect ratio When you have finished editing an image you can choose from one of the many options for saving your image depending on what you wa
331. sing amounts of gray added until along the bottom the colors are mostly gray If you want a color to havea smoky look select it from the bottom end of this palette Similarly you will find colors like browns at the lower end of the red orange in this palette 170 Chapter 5 Edit mode On the far right is a color slider In the slider the actual color selected is where the small black arrow appears You can then adjust the color to add white or black to it by moving the slider up to add white for pastels until it is completely white or move the slider down to add black for a richer color until it is completely black Selecting and adjusting colors To select a color click on a square in either grid or on the color palette You can also drag over the color palette When you click a color or lift your finger off the mouse after dragging that color appears in the large Color Solid square and all its numerical values Hue Saturation Luminosity as well as Red Green Blue appear in the boxes You can also adjust acolor by changing the Hue Saturation and Luminosity numbers To select a precise color type in the values for that color You can dothe same using the Red Green Blue values Detail tools Sharpening an image You can use the Sharpen tool to sharpen an image by enhancing medium and high contrast edges You can save your options as a preset for future use To sharpen an image using Sharpen tool 1 In Edit mode in the D
332. ss Manage mode Burn Basket customizing toolbars Favorites pane File List pane Folders pane Image Basket keyboard shortcuts Map pane options Properties pane Quick Search bar Search pane Selective Browsing pane using views Map pane using Mirror effect mobile phone modes switching mouse shortcuts moving files Manage mode panes multiple images adjusting exposure renaming resizing navigator Negative effect 95 167 117 76 199 32 27 29 40 205 50 181 48 60 61 63 33 50 146 26 211 52 88 89 87 116 147 noise about adding to an image removing from an image o Oilpaint effect Old effect Online mode copy URL creating an account creating folders making folder public or private rating system uploading images optimizing the database options ACDSee Quick View Calendar pane contact sheet database file management Folders general Manage mode Organize pane Preview pane View mode Organize pane customizing organizing assigning categories assigning color labels assigning ratings files finding images quickly managing categories originals showing Orton effect 172 174 173 147 147 12 175 178 13 176 178 178 179 13 98 106 189 85 192 191 188 181 181 188 187 193 188 44 46 44 40 66 43 114 148 Outline effect overwriting files P panes auto hiding moving resetting to default layout PDF Pencil Drawing effect photo di
333. ssary ACDSee 14 User Guide A Absolute Colorimetric Rendering intent generally used for proofing Based on a device independent color space reproducing colors within the available gamut perfectly and reducing colors outside of the gamut to the nearest reproducible hue at the expense of saturation ACD InTouch Data exchange service for staying in touch with new developments at ACD Systems acquire Often used term to describe the process of locating images on peripheral devices such as scanners and digital cameras and adding the images to your hard drive Can also refer to taking screen captures See import album Collection of images often organized by theme or event In ACDSee 14 albums contain shortcuts to where the images are stored on your hard drive aliasing Jagged edges caused by pixels Occurs most often in low resolution images or images that have been enlarged See jaggies anchor Method of fixing an object such as a selection to a screen page or image location antialiasing anti aliasing Software technique for reducing jagged lines or jaggies Uses shades of gray and color to smooth out the contrast between adjacent pixels aspect ratio An image s width to height ratio For example an image with an aspect ratio of 3 1 has a width 3 times larger than its height archive Collection of files saved as a single file for storage Archive files usually use compression to reduce their size Yo
334. t image viewer Program that displays images ACDSee 14 is an image viewer import Bringing data into an application from another using a format that the receiving application understands interpolation Process that uses nearby pixels to estimate the color of new pixels added to the larger image For example interpolation might be used when enlarging a digital image IPTC Standard method of encoding information within image files so that items such as descriptive comments and copyright information can be transmitted with the image J K jaggies Individual pixels displayed in an image with low resolution The appearance of pixels in an image causes lines and curves to appear jagged L lens vignetting Unusual darkness in the corners of images as a result of an inability of the lens to distribute light into the corners of the image lossless compression Form of compression that retains all image data and quality lossless rotation and flipping Rotation of a JPEG image without loss of image quality This works best on images with dimensions that are a multiple of 8 or 16 lossy compression Form of compression that attempts to remove unnecessary data This data loss can affect image quality M marquee Dashed line frame that identifies a selected portion of an image Depending on the tool you can resize or move a marquee with or without changing the underlying image metadata Information about an image and ho
335. t Fill light brightens dark areas of the image Exposure warning Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of the image Overexposed pixels turn red AA underexposed pixels turn green Theicon is gray when disabled and turns yellow if enabled Adjusting image levels You can use the Levels tool to precisely adjust the contrast and light levels in your images You can save your options as a preset for future use ae To adjust image levels 1 In Edit mode in the Exposure Lighting group click Levels 2 Dooneof the following Set the options as described below to adjust the contrast and light levels manually Click Auto and selecta menu option to automatically adjust image properties 3 Dooneof the following Click Apply to apply your changes Click Done to apply your changes and close the Levels tool Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool P Click Reset to clear your changes and resetto default settings If you saved your changes you cannot reset your settings 165 ACDSee 14 User Guide Levels options Channel Shadows Midtones Highlights Auto Black Point picker Mid Point picker White Point Picker Specifies the brightness or color channel you want to adjust Specifies the blackpoint of an image Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin box to define the blackest area of an image As the value increases the dark colored areas of the image become darker You
336. t strength Specifies the amount of light contrast between the top and bottom of each wave Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Wave direction Specifies the direction of the waves Select one or both of the following Wave horizontally Makes the waves move towards the right and left sides of the image Wave vertically Makes the waves move towards the top and bottom of the image Applying a Rain effect You can use the Rain effect to make it look like it was raining when you took a photo You can control the amount of rain the angle of the rain and other characteristics of the rain You can save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply rain to a photo 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Rain 3 On the Rain tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Rain options Strength Specifies the length of the rain drops Drag the slider to the right to increase the length Opacity Specifies the opacity of the rain drops Type a number from 0 to 100 or drag the slider to adjust the opacity of the rain drops The higher the opacity the more the image is obscured Amount Specifies the number of rain drops An
337. t to open or close Moving panes You can move a pane from a docked or floating position to a new location You can move one pane at a time or several stacked panes To move a pane 1 Drag the pane s title bar and hold your cursor over any of the arrows of the Docking Compass 2 Whenthe shaded marquee displays the position of the pane you want release the mouse button 3 Toreturn a pane toits previous location double click its title bar To move a docked or floating pane Do one of the following Drag the pane s tab to a new location Only one pane moves Drag the pane s title bar to a new location Any panes stacked beneath it also move 9 If you use dual monitors you can move the panes to your second monitor to free up space on your main monitor Docking panes When you select a pane in the Manage mode the Docking Compass activates to help you place the pane precisely The Docking Compass consists of an outer and inner ring of arrows When you hold your cursor over any of the arrows a shaded marquee displays the potential position of the pane To dock a pane in Manage mode window 1 Drag the pane s title bar or tab to activate the Docking Compass 2 Todock a pane around the outer edge of the window hold your cursor over any of the outer arrows of the Docking Compass and then release the mouse button 3 Todock a pane around the outer edge of the File List pane or any another pane hold your cursor over the inner
338. ta 157 Applying A Water Effect eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee e eee eee ee eeee 158 Applying A Water Drops Effect ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee 158 Applying A Waves Electo dada A A abe aebanencs S AE 159 Applying A Weave Eesti 159 Applying A Wind EffECE lt script rd iaa 160 Creating A Custom Special Effect Filter Convolution Effect 0000 000002 eee eee eee 161 GSO SEY TOO AMARA SA atstererstei meester 161 rl oie tae eee epee te tse a Sea eee eee A ewe Ea eE 161 Flipping An Image 2 otto See ck oo ata e e a A A ia ae 162 CrOPpingAntlmMade reese eE E tarso na nooo accion sia presea recaen yes R E AE 162 ResizingtAn image cr A A a 163 Exposure Lightitig MOS A A bree ade oe be ad E ea 164 Adjusting Image Exposure u aa aa00000 0000000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eee eee cece e eee 164 Adjustingilmage Levels cciss ue ciece is decease ce aE E eri 165 Adjusting Levels Automatically 0000 0200 cee ee cece eee cee eee cee cece eee eee eeee 166 Adjusting Tone Curves 2 02 22 ee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee cece cence tence eeee 167 Adjusting SIT alc a ie eee et eS et a a oa 167 Color ET TR 168 Adjusting White BalanGe Se pete aa ar a a a pee edeeuee oetiok eee tuteaducadeetnaeadedeee see 168 Adjusting Color Balance 02 2 2 eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee RE RAAE EESE iSe 169 Using The HIStOGRaNM 22 002 cn centers caddie ueuvectddscekuus ch date
339. template for future use replace specific characters or phrases and insert file specific information into each new file name To rename a group of files 1 In Manage mode select one or more files and then click Tools Batch Rename 2 Inthe Batch Rename dialog box do one or more of the following Selectthe Template tab to specify the Template options Selectthe Search and Replace tab to set the Search and Replace options Selectthe Advanced Options tab to adjust the settings for the Batch Rename tool Review your changes to the file names in the Preview field 3 Click Start Rename P You cannot rename any file on a read only file system such as a CD ROM 89 ACDSee14 User Guide Batch Rename options Template Select the Use Template to rename files check box to create a renaming template You can specify a numerical or alphabetical sequence for the new file names and use the original file names new names or names based on image metadata Template Clear Templates Use numbers to replace Fs Use letters to replace s Start at Insert Metadata File name case Displays the template to use to rename the files Type an asterisk to insert the original file name intothe template Use one or more number signs to insert numeric or alphabetic characters depending which options you selected Clickthe arrow on the drop down list to select a recently used template Clears the recently used templates fro
340. tensify the effect Produces inward or outward blur to or froma center point Amount Specifies the amount of blur Move the slider to the right to intensify the effect Zoom in Creates a blur that zooms in to the image s center Zoom out Creates a blur that zooms out from the image s center Horizontal position Specifies the blur s center point on the horizontal axis Vertical position Specifies the blur s center point on the vertical axis About noise and noise reduction Image noise looks like random black white or colored pixels in an area of a photo where there should be solid color such as a dark nightsky In digital photography noise is typically more visible in the dark areas of a photo There are many causes of image noise You will increase image noise if you use a high ISO setting such as ISO 800 to capture a photo or if you extend the exposure time You would typically use a high ISO setting and extend exposure time to take a photo in low light However image noise can be caused by dead or stuck pixels in a digital camera s image sensor Similarly dust on a camera lens or scanner bed can cause noise by blocking or reflecting light Images generally have two types of noise luminance and color Luminance noise is random variations of brightness and particularly in gray areas may appear spotted when there should be a solid color in the area of the image 172 Chapter 5 Edit mode Color noise is random variations
341. that are larger than the window are displayed at their original size their original size View mode window are displayed at their original size Reduce Reduces largeimages and enlarges Reduces largeimages and enlarges Reduces large images and enlarges small and small images to fit the size of the small images to fit between the left images to fit between the top and bottom Enlarge View mode window and right sides of the View mode of the View mode window window If you select Fit Image you can display the previous or next image by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard Displaying a thumbnail of a magnified image Use the Navigator pane to display a thumbnail overview of magnified images A marquee indicates the area of the magnified image thatis visible in View mode To display and use the Navigator pane 1 In View mode click View Navigator 2 Drag the slider to increase or decrease the magnification of the image in View mode 3 Drag the marquee to the area of the image you would like to display in View mode To use the Quick Navigator pane 1 In View mode click and hold the Navigator button in the bottom toolbar 2 Drag the marquee to the area of the image you would like to display in View mode 116 Chapter 4 View mode Panning a magnified image In View mode you can pan large images by moving them vertically horizontally and diagonally across the display area to view specific areas of theim
342. the Details View options 1 In Manage mode click Tools Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click File List Details View 3 On the Details View page set or change the options as described below 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 Details View options Show grid lines Separates each row and column in Details view mode with a grid line Full row select Selects the entire row when you click a column entry in that row Column auto width Automatically resizes each column to fit its contents Highlight sort column Highlights the column used to sort files when you click on the column s title Choose Details Specifies the columns you want to use to sort files in Details view mode Setting the Preview pane options You can specify how ACDSee 14 displays previews of your images and configure settings to play audio and video files automatically as soon as you view them in the Preview pane To set the Preview options 187 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 Doone of the following In Manage mode click Tools Options Preview In Manage mode right click in the Preview pane and select Preview Options 2 On the Preview options page set or change the options as described below 3 Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee 14 Preview options Delay Specifies how quickly the Preview pane displays an image after you select it in the File List pane Size Specifies the size of the previewed image in relatio
343. the highlighted text with a new description Press Enter or click outside of the description area The description is saved 31 ACDSee 14 User Guide To select a specific thumbnail in the Events view or Photo Calendar 1 Expandthe month to see the dates on which images or media files are available 2 Clickon a date to display the images or media files in the File List pane 3 Clickand drag an image or media file and drag it to the thumbnail area for the date When you release the mouse button the thumbnail is saved You can reset the default thumbnail by right clicking the thumbnail and selecting Restore Default Thumbnail To navigate a long list of dates in Events view 1 Toexpand and collapse specific groups click the signs which are located on the left side of the group header 2 Toexpand and collapse all groups right click a group header and select either Open All Groups or Close All Groups 3 Toscroll through multiple groups click the Next Group and Previous Group buttons which are located at the bottom of the File List scroll bar 4 Atthe bottom of the Calendar pane scroll bar click the Table of Contents button and select a date Browsing favorite files Creating a shortcut You can create shortcuts to folders and files and even run executable files from insidethe Favorites pane Favorite shortcuts can be copied renamed moved or deleted just like a folder You can even use an executable shortcut to start another ap
344. the new folder and press Enter Todelete a folder select a folder and press Delete Torename a folder right click the folder you want to rename and select Rename Type a new name for the folder and press Enter P You cannot rename a drive or any folder on a read only file system such as a CD ROM Browsing files by date or event With the Calendar pane you can browse your collection of image and media files using the dates associated with each file The Calendar paneincludes Events Year Month Day view and the Photo Calendar which shows thumbnails per day within a month You can click any date in the Calendar pane to display a list of files associated with that date To open the Calendar pane In Manage mode click View Calendar The Photo Calendar opens above the File List pane which moves down so that you only see a single row of thumbnails Your images will not display in the Calendar pane until you have either browsed the folder containing the images or used __ the Catalog Files Wizard to catalog your images so they are in the ACDSee 14 database If you are using the Photo Calendar you only see thumbnails if there are photos on a particular day in that month Days that have no photo are blank 30 Chapter 3 Manage mode Calendar pane view options P in i E e 040 Be e Events View Year View Month View Day View Photo Calendar Options Previous Item Next Item Previous Grou
345. the number of colors used in each stroke Drag the Vibrance slider to adjust the intensity of the colors in the image Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying the Old effect You can use the Old effect to give your images an antique look The Old effect is similar to the Sepia effect but produces a more realistic appearance of age To apply the Old effect 1 2 di In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect Click Old On the Old tab setthe options as described below Do one of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 147 ACDSee 14 User Guide Old options Age Specifies the intensity or degree of the effect The numbers do not correspond to how old the photo should appear Applying the Orton effect Create beautiful impressionistic images with the Orton effect The Orton effect mimics a darkroom technique created by sandwiching together two images one of which is slightly out of focus and both of which are slightly overexposed You can save your settings as a preset for future use To usethe Orton effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Orton 3 Dragthe Blur Contrast and Brightness sliders to adjust each effect 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your chan
346. the window The controls _ disappear while the slideshow is playing so you can fully enjoy your photos To create more than one ACDSee Showroom With ACDSee Showroom open do one of the following Right click in the ACDSee Showroom window and select New Showroom Click the ACDSee Showroom icon in the taskbar and select New Showroom To close ACDSee Showroom Do one of the following Click Close in the ACDSee Showroom window Click the ACDSee Showroom icon in the taskbar and select Exit ACDSee Showroom 74 Chapter 3 Manage mode If you have configured ACDSee Showroom to open when you start your computer it will automatically open the next time J you start your computer Creating a PDF You can use ACDSee 14 to combine your images into PDF portable document format files The Create PDF Wizard will guide you through the process of creating one or more PDF files from your images or adding images to a PDF slideshow To create a PDF 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you want to share 2 Click Tools Create PDF 3 Onthe Welcome page of the Create PDF Wizard select one of the following options and then click Next Create a PDF slideshow Combines all of your images into a single PDF file that you can view as a slideshow Create one PDF file containing all images Combines all of the selected images into a single PDF file with multiple pages Create one PDF file for each image Conver
347. these file formats in the future check each file type by clicking in the white square 4 Click OK toregister and or associate the new files 222 Chapter 9 File formats You can change file associations directly in Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7 by going to your desktop and clicking 7 Start Default Programs 223 System requirements System requirements ACDSee 14 User Guide To browse and view your images and videos and listen to your audio files with ACDSee 14 your system must include the following components Minimum Hardware Intel Pentium II1 AMD Athlon processor or equivalent 512 MBRAM 250 MB free hard drive space High Color display adapter at 1024 x 768 Software Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 Windows Vista or Windows 7 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 226 Recommended Intel Pentium 4 AMD Athlon XP processor or equivalent 1 GB RAM 1 GB free hard drive space High Color display adapter at 1280 x 1024 CD DVD burner for creating CDs and DVDs Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 Windows Vista or Windows 7 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or higher TiVo Desktop Software to publish images to TiVo Microsoft DirectX 9 0c for Microsoft DirectX file format support and to create slideshows and screensavers QuickTime 6 0 for QuickTime file format support Ghostscript 8 0 for PDF support Windows Media Player 9 0 Glossary Glo
348. ti is dere 169 Changing Image Color Depth cuna Li rs A a 169 Using The Color Dialog BOX 2 5 2 0 cccccec ce ccccucesececcucuccsccecccccussceccussutscecscuedushovecessucuacsccuceucnsees 170 D tail TOONS 42 2 22 2tepecet cede deck EE ii A et elk cece deeded e cere Goad 171 Sharpening An Image 171 BIUFFING AnUIIMAG Gs 22cnntecionai isis otto 171 About Noise And Noise RedUctioM ranco E E E O E a E EEEE 172 Removina M N EiS EEEE E ETE EEE E EAE dos NENE EEE E EE AAN EE A AAN 173 faa Ko llake MN Tol Ee E EEE EE EN AAE AAEE A ESEE ETE E o EA EAE 174 CHAPTER 6 ONLINE MODE aaan anaana aoaaa anaoa aaao aonana eee 175 Working In Online Mode lt ooooconii no dee tia ii id ciones 175 Creating An ACDSeeOnline com Account _ 22 22 eee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee 176 Uploading Images To ACDSeeOnline com 2 2222 eee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee cece eee eee eee 176 Setting Folders To Automatically Sync To Web ee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 177 Creating And Making Folders Public Or Private 00 0 cee eee ee eee ee ce eee ee cece e eee cence eeeee 178 Changing The Rating Systemi cees veceiae 35 dido id tarde eat tr cias 179 Downloading IMAGCS soar a vce ee erascawaweceadienuuus dev seexeskuscebsdeumeede E E E EOE OEE ES sexeawedesaccunescess 179 SINO Transfer Managen 2s3 02525 255 see eee e it dese cbseeectsd vy beeces 179 CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS AND CONFIGURATION coc 181 SEtund OPO A e tas 181 Se
349. tion of the media file a Save As Opens a dialog you can use to save the video with a new file name Extract Frames Opens a menu you can use to copy save and extract video frames 5 Loop Continuously plays the media file or selection a Rotate Rotates a video clockwise in 90 degree increments a Auto Levels Effect Automatically adjusts the color and light levels in a video LJ Gamma Effect Opens the Gamma dialog box which you can use to adjust the gamma of a video Higher values brighten the video while lower values darken it To reset the gamma level click Default Selecting part of a media file You can select asegment of an audioor video file and play it To select part of an audio or video file 1 Click the Show Selection button Move the selection handles to specify the beginning and end of the selection 2 3 Clickthe Play Selection button 4 Click the Play button Saving video frames as images You can extract an individual frame from a video and saveit as astill image or extract multiple frames and save each oneas a single image To extract and save a single video frame as an image 1 Doone of the following While the video is playing click the Pause button at the frame you want to save On the progress slider move the pointer to display the frame you want to save 2 Onthe Selection and media controls toolbar click the Extract Frames button and select Extract Current Frame 3 Inthe Extract Current F
350. to directly add and edit file information including ACDSee metadata You can add an author description notes and keywords to your files and adjust the category and rating assignments at the same time Organizing with the Organize pane The Organize pane is one of the most useful panes in ACDSee 14 as it provides so many ways to organize sort group search for and manage your files 40 Chapter 3 Manage mode Categories Categories are an easy way to organize your files into groups or hierarchies that make sense to you When you assign a file to a category you do not move the file from its folder or create an extra copy Your categories can be simple or complex and use any names you choose There are different icons to use for different categories to help you identify them at a glance Once your files are in categories you can search sort group and find them by category One way to assign files to a category is to select and drag one or more files from the file list and drop them onto the category Any file thatis assigned to a category has a blue tab above its thumbnail in the File List A file can belong to multiple categories but it will only have one blue tab Ratings You can assign a numerical rating from 1 to 5 to your images and files Once you have assigned ratings you can search sort and organize your files based on the ratings or a combination of ratings categories auto categories etc A file can have only one rati
351. to discard your changes and close the pane User Defined Convolution options Convolution matrix Specifies the formula to use when altering the image Type numbers in the matrix fields to change the pixels in the image Using a mathematical formula the color value of each pixel in an image is multiplied by the numbers in the matrix to produce an effect Division factor Specifies the fractional coefficient of the matrix Type a number into the Division factor field to use fractional coefficients in the matrix The product of the convolution matrix is divided by the division factor before being applied to a pixel Bias Specifies the brightness of the image Type a number into the Bias field to change the brightness of the image The bias number is added to the RGB values of each pixel A positive number brightens the image while a negative number darkens the image Clear matrix Resets the matrix Sample filters Loads a sample effect to use as a starting point for creating your own effect Geometry tools Rotating an image You can rotate an image at preset or custom angles in Edit You can save the rotation settings as a preset for future use To rotate an image at a custom angle 1 In Edit mode in the Geometry group click Rotate 2 Select one or more of the following Select one of the default orientation options Drag the Straightening slider to the left or right until the image appears straightened Click the Horizontal or Vertica
352. tric Rendering intent that maps the colors that fall exactly within the color gamuts of both the input and output devices Best used for single or limited color images as colors outside of both gamuts may be mapped to a single color render Drawing images to your screen rendering intent Approach used to map colors from one color gamut to another There are four rendering intents available Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation and Absolute Colorimetric resolution Quality and clarity of an image measured in pixels dots per inch or pixels per inch RGB Color model that uses red green and blue as its primary colors ringing artifacts Distortion around the edges of image subjects caused by compressing or resizing an image 5 saturation Purity of a color Higher color saturation results in more gray Saturation rendering intent Rendering intent that maintains color saturation from one gamut to another Best suited for images in which the actual color represented is less important than the color s vividness selection Portion of an image that you define with a selection tool A marquee surrounds a selection ACDSee 14 and ACD Photo Editor include selection tools SendPix ACD SendPix is a free electronic photo sharing service offered by ACD Systems sepia Sepia toned images are composed of shades of brown Many old photographs have a sepia tone sharpen The sharpen tool is for sharpening images The ori
353. ts each image into a separate PDF file 4 OntheChoose images page you can change the selected images and use the arrow buttons to reorder them Click Next to continue 5 Dooneof the following If you selected to create a PDF slideshow set or change the transition options by clicking the hyperlink next to each image Click Next to set the order color and file name options for your slideshow Click Next when you are ready to continue If you selected to create one or more PDF files specify a file name and location and then click Next 6 Click Finish to closethe wizard and return to ACDSee 14 Creating a PowerPoint presentation You can create a PowerPoint presentation quickly from inside ACDSee 14 using the Create PPT Wizard The wizard walks you through the process of creating or editing a presentation using your photos You can set slide duration the location of the file number of images per slide and whether or not to use a design template as a background You can also add captions a title or notes to each slide This feature only works if you have Microsoft PowerPoint installed on your computer The feature does not support RAW __ files so you will need to convert RAW files to another format To create a PowerPoint presentation 1 In Manage mode in the File List pane select the images you want to share 2 Click Tools Create PPT 3 On the Choose images page of the Create PPT Wizard click Add if you want to
354. tting The General OPLONS ceveccosnerooontcnacuros e E a E cars arriero rd 181 Setting The Manage Mode Options cc ee ee ee ee ee cence eee 181 Setting The Quick Search OptiOnSsce20 4 2222 cearcneraieeeagevass daran canada rica 182 Setting The File List Pane Opti0NS 0022 ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee cee e eee eee ee 182 Setting The Thumbnail Info Opti0NS 02222 eee ee eee ee ee eee eee ee ee cece eee eee e ees 185 Setting The Thumbnail Style Options c c2 ose eee a is it 186 Setting The Details View Opti0NS 002 eee ee ce eee eee ee eee eee ee eee cece eee eee 187 Setting The Preview Pane Options 00 187 Setting The Folders Pane Options cccec ccs eck c cee ve dica 188 xi ACDSee 14 User Guide xii Setting The Organize Pane OPtONS caca A as 188 Setting The Calendar Pane Opti0NS 0 22 0 o oe ee ee ee ee eee ce eee eee eee ee eee eee eee e eee 189 Setting The CD DVD Management Options 2 2 ees sec ce dees sek e deca se Sova debe dados dans oca dieras 190 Setting The Properties Pane Options 22 20 2222 coc eee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee eee 190 Setting The File Management Dpti0NS oc 191 Setting The Database Options 0 2022 eee ee cee eee eee eee eee cece cece eee eeeeee 192 Setting The View Mode Options oo cee ce eee a EESE 193 Setting The Display Options lt 2 ist rada caca orale dete oti a eae als 194 Setting Tne Edit Mode Options o iia 195 Setting The ACDSee Online Options 0 02 00 cee ee ce eee ce
355. u can use archiving software such as ACDSee 14 and ACDZip to create and view archives azimuth Angle of shadows that extend from the edges of image details In ACDSee 14 you can control azimuth when applying the Emboss effect to an image B background processing Tasks or programs that function without user interaction bandwidth Amount of data that can be sent through a network connection in a fixed amount of time Bandwidth is measured in kilobits per second Kbps barrel distortion In barrel distortion the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center batch editing Any operation or tool such as resizing converting or renaming that can be used to adjust multiple images or files simultaneously bit 228 Glossary Bits are small units of computer memory The color depth of your image is constrained by the number of bits available to store color information For example itis possible to store 256 different color values per color channel in 8 bit RGB images Similarly itis possible to store 65 536 different color values per color channel in 18 bit images blackpoint An image s darkest area You can control the intensity of the black in an image by adjusting its blackpoint blend modes Filters that change the effect of a tool or the appearance of a selected object brightness Lightintensity of an image You can make an image appear brighter or darker by adjusting its brightness E cache High speed st
356. u tried to view a RAW file without processing it would appear almost completely black It is therefore necessary to process your RAW files to produce a photo In ACDSee you can view RAW files using the embedded thumbnail image created by your camera If you want to process RAW images you must use a photo editing program such as ACDSee which includes tools for developing RAW images 221 ACDSee 14 User Guide Supported RAW formats ACD Systems constantly adds new RAW formats to the list of supported formats To make it easier to keep the list up to date it is kept on the company Web Site See all supported RAW formats Registering and Associating files ACDSee 14 can work with a large number of file formats If you are running Microsoft XP then you can set ACDSee 14 to be the default application to open certain file types This process is called associating files Microsoft Windows Vista and Windows 7 have made it necessary to change how ACDSee 14 associates files Because of these changes if you are running Windows Vista or Windows 7 you need to register file types or extensions as well as associate them When you register file types you tell the Windows Vista or Windows 7 that these file types are used with ACDSee 14 When you associate file types you set ACDSee 14 as the default program to open these kinds of files when you double click them For Microsoft XP To associate files with ACDSee 14 1 ClickTools File Associations 2
357. uce the images and greater than 100 to enlarge them Specifies whether the resize is applied tothe height width or both Specifies the new width for the images in pixels Specifies the new height for the images in pixels Specifies how to scale the images Select one of the following options Enlarge only Resizes only those images that are smaller than the specified heightand width Reduce only Resizes only those images that are larger than the specified heightand width Enlarge or reduce Resizes all images to the specified height and width Retains the width to height ratio of the original images Specifies whether the aspect ratio is maintained based on the specified width For more information about how the different combinations affect the images see Pixel resize options and resulting action Specifies the units of measurement Specifies the new width for the images Specifies the new height for the images Specifies the print resolution for the images Retains the width to height ratio of the original images Specifies whether the aspect ratio is maintained based on the specified width For more information about how the different combinations affect the images see Pixel resize options and resulting action In ACDSee 14 you can lighten or darken the colors of an image or a group of images with the Batch Adjust Exposure Wizard You can adjust each image individually and preview the changes before applying or make
358. ulges the distortion Background color Specifies the background color for the filtered image Select the Image check box to use the original image color or click the color picker to select a different color Bulge direction Specifies the direction of the distortion Select one or both of the following options Horizontal Moves the distortion horizontally Vertical Moves the distortion vertically Applying a Collage effect You can use the Collage effect to creatively break up a photo into a number of photos You can save your settings as a preset for future use To use the Collage effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Collage 3 Dragthe sliders to set the Number and Size of the photos 4 Selecta background color by clicking the drop down arrow to display gradients of colors or click the color box to display a dialog of swatches to choose from ul If you would like to reshuffle the photos click Randomize 6 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and closethe pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 7 Click Exit to leave Special Effects and return to Edit mode Applying a Colored Edges effect You can use the Colored Edges effect to trace the lines and details of people or objects in your images You can save your options as a preset value for future use To apply a Colored Edges effect 141 ACDSee 14 User Guide 1 In Edit mod
359. un it and setthe slideshow options to adjust how long each image is displayed set the background color apply transition effects and add header or footer text To start a slideshow in Manage mode 1 Dooneof the following Inthe File List pane selecta group of images IntheFolders pane select a folder Usethe Easy Select bar to select multiple folders that contain images 2 Click Tools Slideshow keyboard shortcut CTRL S To start a slideshow in View mode Click Tools Slideshow To configure a slideshow 1 In Manage mode do one of the following Inthe File List pane selecta group of images Inthe Folders pane select a folder or use the Easy Select bar to select multiple folders that contain images Click Tools Configure Slideshow In the Slideshow Properties dialog box select or change the slideshow options as described below To save your settings as the default slideshow behavior select the Save current settings as default check box Click OK ou BB U N Slideshow options 70 File Selection Basic Chapter 3 Manage mode Slideshow contents Specifies which of the following media to include in the slideshow All media in current folder Displays all the files images or video in the folder you have selected All media in current folder and subfolders Displays all the files in the currently selected folder and its subfolders Selected media Displays only the files that you selected
360. utomatically in future select Do not ask me this again 2 Click Yes to embed the data in the files A progress bar appears followed by the Embed Summary Report dialog that lists the following Items Selected Indicates the number of files that you selected Items Processed Indicates the number of files actually that were processed If you selected files that did not need to have date embedded this number may be different from the Items Selected Succeeded Indicates the number of files that had data embedded Failed Indicates the number of files that for a variety of reasons could not have data embedded To see the Error Log click View Errors 3 Click Close To embed ACDSee Metadata at any time 91 ACDSee 14 User Guide You can embed data in files at any time Click Tools Embed ACDSee Metadata and then select one of the following In All Files Embeds data for all files In Selected Files Embeds data for any files that you have selected 1 ACDSee 14 uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file Only some file formats and file extensions support XMP 27 These include GIF JPEG DNG PNG and TIF In the case of these file formats the ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee 14 and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata For formats that currently do not support XMP including RAW PSD ABR the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sideca
361. w it was taken For example the metadata of digital camera images can contain the date and time the picture was taken the shutter speed the exposure settings of the camera and whether a flash was used monochrome image Image containing a single color N noise Effect produced when a variety of pixel colors are used in the same color region Noise often occurs in images with high ISO setting or slow shutter speed 232 Glossary O opacity Determines how visible an effect is when applied to an image or a selection High opacity produces a more solid effect while low opacity results in a nearly invisible effect overexposed Images that are overexposed have too many highlights and tend to look faded You typically overexpose images by exposing your digital camera s sensor to light for too long P Q panning Moving zoomed images vertically horizontally and diagonally across the display area to view specific areas of the image PDF An acronym for Portable Document Format You can view PDFs on any computer using the free Adobe Reader software Perceptual Rendering intent that scales all of the colors within one gamut to fit within another gamut Best used for photographic images as it maintains the relationship between the colors more accurately than the colors themselves photo album See album photo editor See image editor pincushion distortion In pincushion distortion the photo appears to shrink inwards toward the center
362. while black produces no effect Applies pixels in the edited image that are darker than the original image Pixels in the edited image that are lighter than the original image disappear based on RGB values Applies pixels in the edited image that are lighter than the original image Pixels in the edited image that are darker than the original image disappear based on RGB values Adds strong highlights or shadows by applying Multiply or Screen based on the original image area s color values Adds soft highlights or shadows by darkening or lightening based on the original image area s color values Applies the hue value of colors in the edited imageto the color of the original image areas Applies the saturation value of colors in the edited image to the color of the original image areas Applies the hue and saturation of the edited image to the image This blend does not affect the luminance of the original image Applies the lightness value of colors in the edited image to the color of the original image areas Applies some pixels from the edited image layer onto the original image resulting in specks of color The Opacity slider controls the amount of speckling The blend mode and opacity controls apply to many of the editing tools and special effects filters When it does not make sense to have these controls they are omitted The blend mode and opacity controls are not on the following tools Crop Resize Rotate Flip Text Red Eye
363. wind lines to place in the image Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm The algorithm controls the formula used to detect the edges and the direction of the edge indicators Background color Specifies the background color Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Wind color Specifies the color of the wind lines Select the Image check box to use the original image colors or click the color picker to select a different color Wind angle Specifies the angle of the wind lines Random Seed Indicates the random placement of the wind lines When you apply the Wind effect to an image ACDSee 14 places the wind lines randomly This makes the wind lines different every time you apply the filter You can define a specific random seed to generate identical wind lines To generate a new random seed click Random Seed 160 Chapter 5 Edit mode Creating a custom special effect filter Convolution effect You can usethe Convolution filter to create your own special effects You can apply your custom made effect to your image and save your options as a preset for future use To create a custom effect filter 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Convolution 3 Onthe User Defined Convolution tab set the options as described below 4 Doone of the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel
364. wsing files by category or rating with the Organize pane the Contents bar displays the selected classifications as in the following example Thang SV Andh Caegory Garden The Contents bar also displays a date range when browsing with the Calendar pane and a summary of your search criteria when you use the Search pane File List drop down lists Filter Displays a list of filter options such as rating and category You can also select Advanced Filters and create a custom filter Group Displays a list of file attributes that you can use to group files in the File List pane Sort Displays a list of file attributes that you can use to sort the files in the File List pane View Displays a list of view options for viewing files in the File List pane Select Displays a list of file selection options File List toolbar e Add to image basket Adds selected images to the image basket Rotate left Rotates selected images to the left Rotate right Rotates selected images to the right Compare images Opens selected images in the Compare Images Viewer E a Zoom slider Controls the size of the thumbnails in the File List pane Drag the slider to adjustthe thumbnails Chapter 3 Manage mode Overlay icons al Sound Appears if the file contains embedded or associated audio e Rating Appears if the file has been rated in the ACDSee 14 database Color Label Appears if the file has been assigned a color label Sa Database Appears if t
365. x Opens a second instance of the ACDSee 14 program Opens the Open Files dialog box in which you can select one or more images to open in View mode Opens the currently selected image or images in the ACDSee 14 Print utility CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T CTRL TAB CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL ALT R CTRL ALT W CTRL ALT X CTRL RIGHT CLICK CTRL SHIFT 1 CTRL SHIFT 2 CTRL SHIFT 3 CTRL SHIFT 4 CTRL SHIFT 5 CTRL SHIFT A CTRL SHIFT B CTRL SHIFT C CTRL SHIFT D CTRL SHIFT E CTRL SHIFT F CTRL SHIFT I CTRL SHIFT L CTRL SHIFT M CTRL SHIFT O CTRL SHIFT P CTRL SHIFT T CTRL SHIFT TAB CTRL SHIFT W CTRL SHIFT ALT W DELETE ENTER F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 FS Chapter 8 Shortcuts Opens the Batch Resize Images dialog box Creates a slideshow from the currently selected images Opens the Batch Adjust Time Stamp dialog box Moves the focus of the Manage mode window between the currently displayed panes Pastes the contents of the Clipboard Closes ACDSee 14 Cuts the currently selected items to the Clipboard Opens the selected images in the Compare Images viewer Sets the selected image as a stretched desktop wallpaper Opens the current image in the default external editor Opens Windows Explorer context menu Opens or closes the Folders pane Opens or closes the Organize pane Opens or closes the Sear
366. xposure flipping renaming resizing rotating black and white blurring border brightness Burn Basket 0 Calendar pane 238 Index 90 18 225 18 18 80 46 44 222 111 109 111 103 96 97 85 88 86 89 87 86 170 171 133 164 76 30 cataloging files categories assigning finding unassigned images managing CD creating getting photos Photo discs setting CD DVD management options VCD color changing color depth color scheme committing changes comparing images contact sheets creating printing converting databases descript ion files images to another file format images to video to grayscale copy URL copying files images Crayon Drawing effect cropping Crosshatch effect customizing Calendar pane Database Editing Tools pane File List pane File management Folders pane keyboard shortcuts 92 44 66 43 76 25 105 190 77 169 182 203 114 38 79 85 93 94 85 77 169 178 52 52 142 162 143 189 192 200 182 191 188 202 Index 237 moving panes 8 Organize pane 188 Preview pane 187 toolbars 199 View mode 193 D database about 90 adding information to 56 backing up 96 cataloging files 92 converting 93 descript ion files 94 excluding folders 92 exporting 95 importing 93 keywords 51 maintaining 97 optimizing 98 options 192 quarantining files 99 rebuilding thumbnails 99 restoring 97 tips and strategies 97 date changing in multiple files
367. xt The higher the value the farther the shadow and the higher the text appears If adrop shadow is cut off or has a noticeably sharp edge you may need to increase the size of the text rectangle Specifies the amount of blur applied to the drop shadow Sharp shadows tend to seem less realistic than those with a slight blur Specifies the darkness of the drop shadow where it falls on the image Specifies the direction of the imaginary light source that creates the drop shadow Drag the arrow to adjust the angle note that this also adjusts the shading of the text bevel Specifies how much of each letter s edge is bevelled Higher values give the text a more rounded smoother look Specifies the difference between the highest and lowest points on the text Higher values heighten the difference between the flat portions of the text and the bevelled edges Specifies the height of the imaginary light source that creates the bevel s shadowed effect Lower values produce longer shadows on the text while a higher value produces a more direct lighting effect and shorter shadows Specifies the direction of the imaginary light source that creates the bevel effect Drag the arrow to adjust the angle note that this also adjusts the angle of the drop shadow You can usethe drawing tools in Edit to add lines and shapes such as squares circles and arrows to your image You can also adjustthe width feathering and blending of your brush which
368. y Pictures 4 The Database Maintenance tool will delete records creating unused space in your database To reclaim the unused space click Optimize Database and follow the instructions in the wizard 5 Click Close Optimizing the database You can use the Optimize Database Wizard to quickly remove redundant or outdated database records Optimizing your database along with performing regular database maintenance helps regain hard drive space and improves the overall performance of ACDSee 14 If you are cataloging large numbers of files regularly itis helpful to optimize weekly or after an extended cataloging session This is alsoa good time to backup the database To optimize your database 1 In Manage mode click Tools Database Optimize Database 2 Inthe Database Optimization Wizard click Next 3 Select one or both of the following Optimize the database tables and fields Removes obsolete information from the database reduces the space used by database fields and re indexes the tables Remove orphans from database Removes any orphan database entries caused by files or folders deleted by other programs 4 Click Next 5 When the wizard has finished click Finish to return to ACDSee 14 98 Chapter 3 Manage mode Rebuilding thumbnails and metadata Situations can develop in which your images will be out of sync with the thumbnail images displayed in the File List pane and the embedded metadata You can u
369. y a Posterize effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Posterize 3 OnthePosterize tab drag the Brightness levels slider to adjust the variance of colors in the image The lower the value the fewer colors used in the image 4 Dooneof the following Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane Applying a Radial Waves effect You can use the Radial Waves effect to display waves radiating from a center point in the photo You can change the center point in the photo and you can also control the appearance of the waves You can save your options as a preset for use at another time To apply a Radial Waves effect 1 In Edit mode in the Add group click Special Effect 2 Click Radial Waves 3 OntheRadial waves tab setthe options as described below 4 Dooneof thefollowing Click Done to accept your changes and close the pane Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the pane 150 Chapter 5 Edit mode Radial waves options Horizontal position Specifies the center of the waves on the horizontal axis A value of 500 places the waves in the middle of the image Vertical position Specifies the center of the waves on the vertical axis A value of 500 places the waves in the middle of the image Amplitude Specifies the depth and height of each wave Wavelength Specifies the amount of space between waves Ligh
370. y edits or filters to only that area rather than the whole photo There are three different selection tools and each selects area of a photoin a unique way The controls available change depending on which tool you select To use the Selections tool 1 In Edit mode in the Selections group click Selections 2 Select one of the tools Freehand Lasso Magic Wand Marquee See below for more detailed steps for using these tools You can also quickly access the Selections tool by clicking on the Create Selection button at the top when using some of _ the tools in Edit Once you make your selection and click Done to return to the Edit tool you can modify your selection by clicking Modify Selection You can use Selections with the following Edit tools 125 ACDSee 14 User Guide Add Vignette Special Effect Exposure Lighting Exposure Levels Auto Levels Tone Curves Lighting Color White Balance Color Balance Detail Sharpen Blur Noise The selection tools Freehand Lasso Click the left mouse button and drag the cursor to draw around the area that you wish to select As you draw a line appears showing where you have drawn When you release the mouse the end of the line joins to the start automatically to complete the selection The whole selection animates and looks like marching ants Magic Wand Click on any area of the image and all the pixels the same color are included in the selection You can choose whether to
371. you hover your cursor over a thumbnail Click on a thumbnail and all the pictures for that date display in the File List The total number of photos belonging to that month is in the top right corner of the calendar Drag the title bar to float this pane onto another monitor and drag a corner to resize it and make the thumbnails bigger or smaller Use the Calendar pane options to specify which date you want to use to organize your files For example you can quickly change so that you display photos by the following Datethe ACDSee 14 database cataloged the file Date the image was taken Date the file was modified Datethe file was loaded to your computer You can click Options to open the Calendar where you can set filter options choose the day to start the week and set clock formats Selects and moves to the closest previous date that has photos Selects and moves to the next closest date that has photos Scrolls to the previous group Scrolls to the next group Opens a list of event dates Adding descriptions and thumbnails in Events view You can add a description and a thumbnail image to dates in Events view to help you remember the event 9 Try right clicking the Calendar Title bar and select Floating to move the pane to a new location To add a description to a date in Events view Expand the month to see the dates on which images or media files are available Click Enter event description here and replace

ACD Systems ACDSee 14

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents